OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

Compare Revisions

  • This comparison shows the changes necessary to convert path
    /openrisc/trunk/gnu-old/gdb-7.1/readline/doc
    from Rev 834 to Rev 842
    Reverse comparison

Rev 834 → Rev 842

/rluserman.texi
0,0 → 1,88
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
@setfilename rluserman.info
@settitle GNU Readline Library
@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
 
@setchapternewpage odd
 
@include version.texi
 
@copying
This manual describes the end user interface of the GNU Readline Library
(version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), a library which aids in the
consistency of user interface across discrete programs which provide
a command line interface.
 
Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.
 
@quotation
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is
included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License.''
 
(a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify
this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free
Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.''
@end quotation
@end copying
 
@dircategory Libraries
@direntry
* RLuserman: (rluserman). The GNU readline library User's Manual.
@end direntry
 
@titlepage
@title GNU Readline Library User Interface
@subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @code{Readline Library} Version @value{VERSION}.
@subtitle @value{UPDATED-MONTH}
@author Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
@author Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
 
@page
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
@insertcopying
 
@sp 1
Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, @*
Boston, MA 02111-1307 @*
USA @*
 
@end titlepage
 
@contents
 
@ifnottex
@node Top
@top GNU Readline Library
 
This document describes the end user interface of the GNU Readline Library,
a utility which aids in the consistency of user interface across discrete
programs which provide a command line interface.
 
@menu
* Command Line Editing:: GNU Readline User's Manual.
* Copying This Manual:: Copying This Manual.
@end menu
@end ifnottex
 
@include rluser.texi
 
@node Copying This Manual
@appendix Copying This Manual
 
@menu
* GNU Free Documentation License:: License for copying this manual.
@end menu
 
@include fdl.texi
 
@bye
rluserman.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: texi2html =================================================================== --- texi2html (nonexistent) +++ texi2html (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,5429 @@ +#! /usr/bin/perl +'di '; +'ig 00 '; +#+############################################################################## +# +# texi2html: Program to transform Texinfo documents to HTML +# +# Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA +# +#-############################################################################## + +# This requires perl version 5 or higher +require 5.0; + +#++############################################################################## +# +# NOTE FOR DEBUGGING THIS SCRIPT: +# You can run 'perl texi2html.pl' directly, provided you have +# the environment variable T2H_HOME set to the directory containing +# the texi2html.init file +# +#--############################################################################## + +# CVS version: +# $Id: texi2html.pl,v 1.55 2000/07/27 14:39:41 obachman Exp $ + +# Homepage: +$T2H_HOMEPAGE = < (original author) + Karl Berry + Olaf Bachmann + and many others. +Maintained by: Olaf Bachmann +Send bugs and suggestions to +EOT + +# Version: set in configure.in +$THISVERSION = '1.64'; +$THISPROG = "texi2html $THISVERSION"; # program name and version + +# The man page for this program is included at the end of this file and can be +# viewed using the command 'nroff -man texi2html'. + +# Identity: + +$T2H_TODAY = &pretty_date; # like "20 September 1993" +# the eval prevents this from breaking on system which do not have +# a proper getpwuid implemented +eval { ($T2H_USER = (getpwuid ($<))[6]) =~ s/,.*//;}; # Who am i + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Initialization # +# Pasted content of File $(srcdir)/texi2html.init: Default initializations # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +# leave this within comments, and keep the require statement +# This way, you can directly run texi2html.pl, if $ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init +# exists. + +# +# -*-perl-*- +###################################################################### +# File: texi2html.init +# +# Sets default values for command-line arguments and for various customizable +# procedures +# +# A copy of this file is pasted into the beginning of texi2html by +# 'make texi2html' +# +# Copy this file and make changes to it, if you like. +# Afterwards, either, load it with command-line option -init_file +# +# $Id: texi2html.init,v 1.34 2000/07/27 14:09:02 obachman Exp $ + +###################################################################### +# stuff which can also be set by command-line options +# +# +# Note: values set here, overwrite values set by the command-line +# options before -init_file and might still be overwritten by +# command-line arguments following the -init_file option +# + +# T2H_OPTIONS is a hash whose keys are the (long) names of valid +# command-line options and whose values are a hash with the following keys: +# type ==> one of !|=i|:i|=s|:s (see GetOpt::Long for more info) +# linkage ==> ref to scalar, array, or subroutine (see GetOpt::Long for more info) +# verbose ==> short description of option (displayed by -h) +# noHelp ==> if 1 -> for "not so important options": only print description on -h 1 +# 2 -> for obsolete options: only print description on -h 2 + +$T2H_DEBUG = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {debug} = +{ + type => '=i', + linkage => \$main::T2H_DEBUG, + verbose => 'output HTML with debuging information', +}; + +$T2H_DOCTYPE = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {doctype} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$main::T2H_DOCTYPE, + verbose => 'document type which is output in header of HTML files', + noHelp => 1 +}; + +$T2H_CHECK = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {check} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$main::T2H_CHECK, + verbose => 'if set, only check files and output all things that may be Texinfo commands', + noHelp => 1 +}; + +# -expand +# if set to "tex" (or, "info") expand @iftex and @tex (or, @ifinfo) sections +# else, neither expand @iftex, @tex, nor @ifinfo sections +$T2H_EXPAND = "info"; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {expand} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_EXPAND, + verbose => 'Expand info|tex|none section of texinfo source', +}; + +# - glossary +#if set, uses section named `Footnotes' for glossary +$T2H_USE_GLOSSARY = 0; +T2H_OPTIONS -> {glossary} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_USE_GLOSSARY, + verbose => "if set, uses section named `Footnotes' for glossary", + noHelp => 1, +}; + + +# -invisible +# $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK is the text used to create invisible destination +# anchors for index links (you can for instance use the invisible.xbm +# file shipped with this program). This is a workaround for a known +# bug of many WWW browsers, including netscape. +# For me, it works fine without it -- on the contrary: if there, it +# inserts space between headers and start of text (obachman 3/99) +$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = ''; +# $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = ' '; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {invisible} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK, + verbose => 'use text in invisble anchot', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# -iso +# if set, ISO8879 characters are used for special symbols (like copyright, etc) +$T2H_USE_ISO = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {iso} = +{ + type => 'iso', + linkage => \$T2H_USE_ISO, + verbose => 'if set, ISO8879 characters are used for special symbols (like copyright, etc)', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# -I +# list directories where @include files are searched for (besides the +# directory of the doc file) additional '-I' args add to this list +@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS = ("."); +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {I} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS, + verbose => 'append $s to the @include search path', +}; + +# -top_file +# uses file of this name for top-level file +# extension is manipulated appropriately, if necessary. +# If empty, .html is used +# Typically, you would set this to "index.html". +$T2H_TOP_FILE = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {top_file} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_TOP_FILE, + verbose => 'use $s as top file, instead of .html', +}; + + +# -toc_file +# uses file of this name for table of contents file +# extension is manipulated appropriately, if necessary. +# If empty, _toc.html is used +$T2H_TOC_FILE = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {toc_file} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_TOC_FILE, + verbose => 'use $s as ToC file, instead of _toc.html', +}; + +# -frames +# if set, output two additional files which use HTML 4.0 "frames". +$T2H_FRAMES = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {frames} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_FRAMES, + verbose => 'output files which use HTML 4.0 frames (experimental)', + noHelp => 1, +}; + + +# -menu | -nomenu +# if set, show the Texinfo menus +$T2H_SHOW_MENU = 1; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {menu} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_SHOW_MENU, + verbose => 'ouput Texinfo menus', +}; + +# -number | -nonumber +# if set, number sections and show section names and numbers in references +# and menus +$T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS = 1; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {number} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS, + verbose => 'use numbered sections' +}; + +# if set, and T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS is set, then use node names in menu +# entries, instead of section names +$T2H_NODE_NAME_IN_MENU = 0; + +# if set and menu entry equals menu descr, then do not print menu descr. +# Likewise, if node name equals entry name, do not print entry name. +$T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY = 1; + +# -split section|chapter|none +# if set to 'section' (resp. 'chapter') create one html file per (sub)section +# (resp. chapter) and separate pages for Top, ToC, Overview, Index, +# Glossary, About. +# otherwise, create monolithic html file which contains whole document +#$T2H_SPLIT = 'section'; +$T2H_SPLIT = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {split} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_SPLIT, + verbose => 'split document on section|chapter else no splitting', +}; + +# -section_navigation|-no-section_navigation +# if set, then navigation panels are printed at the beginning of each section +# and, possibly at the end (depending on whether or not there were more than +# $T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE words on page +# This is most useful if you do not want to have section navigation +# on -split chapter +$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION = 1; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {sec_nav} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION, + verbose => 'output navigation panels for each section', +}; + +# -subdir +# if set put result files in this directory +# if not set result files are put into current directory +#$T2H_SUBDIR = 'html'; +$T2H_SUBDIR = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {subdir} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_SUBDIR, + verbose => 'put HTML files in directory $s, instead of $cwd', +}; + +# -short_extn +# If this is set all HTML file will have extension ".htm" instead of +# ".html". This is helpful when shipping the document to PC systems. +$T2H_SHORTEXTN = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {short_ext} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_SHORTEXTN, + verbose => 'use "htm" extension for output HTML files', +}; + + +# -prefix +# Set the output file prefix, prepended to all .html, .gif and .pl files. +# By default, this is the basename of the document +$T2H_PREFIX = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {prefix} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_PREFIX, + verbose => 'use as prefix for output files, instead of ', +}; + +# -o filename +# If set, generate monolithic document output html into $filename +$T2H_OUT = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {out_file} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_OUT = @_[1]; $T2H_SPLIT = '';}, + verbose => 'if set, all HTML output goes into file $s', +}; + +# -short_ref +#if set cross-references are given without section numbers +$T2H_SHORT_REF = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {short_ref} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_SHORT_REF, + verbose => 'if set, references are without section numbers', +}; + +# -idx_sum +# if value is set, then for each @prinindex $what +# $docu_name_$what.idx is created which contains lines of the form +# $key\t$ref sorted alphabetically (case matters) +$T2H_IDX_SUMMARY = 0; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {idx_sum} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_IDX_SUMMARY, + verbose => 'if set, also output index summary', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# -verbose +# if set, chatter about what we are doing +$T2H_VERBOSE = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {Verbose} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_VERBOSE, + verbose => 'print progress info to stdout', +}; + +# -lang +# For page titles use $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{...} as title. +# To add a new language, supply list of titles (see $T2H_WORDS below). +# and use ISO 639 language codes (see e.g. perl module Locale-Codes-1.02 +# for definitions) +# Default's to 'en' if not set or no @documentlanguage is specified +$T2H_LANG = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {lang} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => sub {SetDocumentLanguage($_[1])}, + verbose => 'use $s as document language (ISO 639 encoding)', +}; + +# -l2h +# if set, uses latex2html for generation of math content +$T2H_L2H = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_L2H, + verbose => 'if set, uses latex2html for @math and @tex', +}; + +###################### +# The following options are only relevant if $T2H_L2H is set +# +# -l2h_l2h +# name/location of latex2html progam +$T2H_L2H_L2H = "latex2html"; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_l2h} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_L2H_L2H, + verbose => 'program to use for latex2html translation', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# -l2h_skip +# if set, skips actual call to latex2html tries to reuse previously generated +# content, instead +$T2H_L2H_SKIP = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_skip} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_L2H_SKIP, + verbose => 'if set, tries to reuse previously latex2html output', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# -l2h_tmp +# if set, l2h uses this directory for temporarary files. The path +# leading to this directory may not contain a dot (i.e., a "."), +# otherwise, l2h will fail +$T2H_L2H_TMP = ''; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_tmp} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \$T2H_L2H_TMP, + verbose => 'if set, uses $s as temporary latex2html directory', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +# if set, cleans intermediate files (they all have the prefix $doc_l2h_) +# of l2h +$T2H_L2H_CLEAN = 1; +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_clean} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_L2H_CLEAN, + verbose => 'if set, do not keep intermediate latex2html files for later reuse', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {D} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => sub {$main::value{@_[1]} = 1;}, + verbose => 'equivalent to Texinfo "@set $s 1"', + noHelp => 1, +}; + +$T2H_OPTIONS -> {init_file} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => \&LoadInitFile, + verbose => 'load init file $s' +}; + + +############################################################################## +# +# The following can only be set in the init file +# +############################################################################## + +# if set, center @image by default +# otherwise, do not center by default +$T2H_CENTER_IMAGE = 1; + +# used as identation for block enclosing command @example, etc +# If not empty, must be enclosed in +$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL = ' '; +# same as above, only for @small +$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL = ' '; +# font size for @small +$T2H_SMALL_FONT_SIZE = '-1'; + +# if non-empty, and no @..heading appeared in Top node, then +# use this as header for top node/section, otherwise use value of +# @settitle or @shorttitle (in that order) +$T2H_TOP_HEADING = ''; + +# if set, use this chapter for 'Index' button, else +# use first chapter whose name matches 'index' (case insensitive) +$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER = ''; + +# if set and $T2H_SPLIT is set, then split index pages at the next letter +# after they have more than that many entries +$T2H_SPLIT_INDEX = 100; + +# if set (e.g., to index.html) replace hrefs to this file +# (i.e., to index.html) by ./ +$T2H_HREF_DIR_INSTEAD_FILE = ''; + +######################################################################## +# Language dependencies: +# To add a new language extend T2H_WORDS hash and create $T2H_<...>_WORDS hash +# To redefine one word, simply do: +# $T2H_WORDS->{}->{} = 'whatever' in your personal init file. +# +$T2H_WORDS_EN = +{ + # titles of pages + 'ToC_Title' => 'Table of Contents', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Short Table of Contents', + 'Index_Title' => 'Index', + 'About_Title' => 'About this document', + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Footnotes', + 'See' => 'See', + 'see' => 'see', + 'section' => 'section', +# If necessary, we could extend this as follows: +# # text for buttons +# 'Top_Button' => 'Top', +# 'ToC_Button' => 'Contents', +# 'Overview_Button' => 'Overview', +# 'Index_button' => 'Index', +# 'Back_Button' => 'Back', +# 'FastBack_Button' => 'FastBack', +# 'Prev_Button' => 'Prev', +# 'Up_Button' => 'Up', +# 'Next_Button' => 'Next', +# 'Forward_Button' =>'Forward', +# 'FastWorward_Button' => 'FastForward', +# 'First_Button' => 'First', +# 'Last_Button' => 'Last', +# 'About_Button' => 'About' +}; + +$T2H_WORD_DE = +{ + 'ToC_Title' => 'Inhaltsverzeichniss', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Kurzes Inhaltsverzeichniss', + 'Index_Title' => 'Index', + 'About_Title' => 'Über dieses Dokument', + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Fußnoten', + 'See' => 'Siehe', + 'see' => 'siehe', + 'section' => 'Abschnitt', +}; + +$T2H_WORD_NL = +{ + 'ToC_Title' => 'Inhoudsopgave', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Korte inhoudsopgave', + 'Index_Title' => 'Index', #Not sure ;-) + 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available! + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available! + 'See' => 'Zie', + 'see' => 'zie', + 'section' => 'sectie', +}; + +$T2H_WORD_ES = +{ + 'ToC_Title' => 'índice General', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Resumen del Contenido', + 'Index_Title' => 'Index', #Not sure ;-) + 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available! + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Fußnoten', + 'See' => 'Véase', + 'see' => 'véase', + 'section' => 'sección', +}; + +$T2H_WORD_NO = +{ + 'ToC_Title' => 'Innholdsfortegnelse', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Kort innholdsfortegnelse', + 'Index_Title' => 'Indeks', #Not sure ;-) + 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available! + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!', + 'See' => 'Se', + 'see' => 'se', + 'section' => 'avsnitt', +}; + +$T2H_WORD_PT = +{ + 'ToC_Title' => 'Sumário', + 'Overview_Title' => 'Breve Sumário', + 'Index_Title' => 'Índice', #Not sure ;-) + 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available! + 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!', + 'See' => 'Veja', + 'see' => 'veja', + 'section' => 'Seção', +}; + +$T2H_WORDS = +{ + 'en' => $T2H_WORDS_EN, + 'de' => $T2H_WORDS_DE, + 'nl' => $T2H_WORDS_NL, + 'es' => $T2H_WORDS_ES, + 'no' => $T2H_WORDS_NO, + 'pt' => $T2H_WORDS_PT +}; + +@MONTH_NAMES_EN = +( + 'January', 'February', 'March', 'April', 'May', + 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', 'October', + 'November', 'December' +); + +@MONTH_NAMES_DE = +( + 'Januar', 'Februar', 'März', 'April', 'Mai', + 'Juni', 'Juli', 'August', 'September', 'Oktober', + 'November', 'Dezember' +); + +@MONTH_NAMES_NL = +( + 'Januari', 'Februari', 'Maart', 'April', 'Mei', + 'Juni', 'Juli', 'Augustus', 'September', 'Oktober', + 'November', 'December' +); + +@MONTH_NAMES_ES = +( + 'enero', 'febrero', 'marzo', 'abril', 'mayo', + 'junio', 'julio', 'agosto', 'septiembre', 'octubre', + 'noviembre', 'diciembre' +); + +@MONTH_NAMES_NO = +( + + 'januar', 'februar', 'mars', 'april', 'mai', + 'juni', 'juli', 'august', 'september', 'oktober', + 'november', 'desember' +); + +@MONTH_NAMES_PT = +( + 'Janeiro', 'Fevereiro', 'Março', 'Abril', 'Maio', + 'Junho', 'Julho', 'Agosto', 'Setembro', 'Outubro', + 'Novembro', 'Dezembro' +); + + +$MONTH_NAMES = +{ + 'en' => \@MONTH_NAMES_EN, + 'de' => \@MONTH_NAMES_DE, + 'es' => \@MONTH_NAMES_ES, + 'nl' => \@MONTH_NAMES_NL, + 'no' => \@MONTH_NAMES_NO, + 'pt' => \@MONTH_NAMES_PT +}; +######################################################################## +# Control of Page layout: +# You can make changes of the Page layout at two levels: +# 1.) For small changes, it is often enough to change the value of +# some global string/hash/array variables +# 2.) For larger changes, reimplement one of the T2H_DEFAULT_* routines, +# give them another name, and assign them to the respective +# $T2H_ variable. + +# As a general interface, the hashes T2H_HREF, T2H_NAME, T2H_NODE hold +# href, html-name, node-name of +# This -- current section (resp. html page) +# Top -- top page ($T2H_TOP_FILE) +# Contents -- Table of contents +# Overview -- Short table of contents +# Index -- Index page +# About -- page which explain "navigation buttons" +# First -- first node +# Last -- last node +# +# Whether or not the following hash values are set, depends on the context +# (all values are w.r.t. 'This' section) +# Next -- next node of texinfo +# Prev -- previous node of texinfo +# Up -- up node of texinfo +# Forward -- next node in reading order +# Back -- previous node in reading order +# FastForward -- if leave node, up and next, else next node +# FastBackward-- if leave node, up and prev, else prev node +# +# Furthermore, the following global variabels are set: +# $T2H_THISDOC{title} -- title as set by @setttile +# $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle} -- full title as set by @title... +# $T2H_THISDOC{subtitle} -- subtitle as set by @subtitle +# $T2H_THISDOC{author} -- author as set by @author +# +# and pointer to arrays of lines which need to be printed by t2h_print_lines +# $T2H_OVERVIEW -- lines of short table of contents +# $T2H_TOC -- lines of table of contents +# $T2H_TOP -- lines of Top texinfo node +# $T2H_THIS_SECTION -- lines of 'This' section + +# +# There are the following subs which control the layout: +# +$T2H_print_section = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_section; +$T2H_print_Top_header = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_header; +$T2H_print_Top_footer = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_footer; +$T2H_print_Top = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top; +$T2H_print_Toc = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Toc; +$T2H_print_Overview = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Overview; +$T2H_print_Footnotes = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Footnotes; +$T2H_print_About = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_About; +$T2H_print_misc_header = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_header; +$T2H_print_misc_footer = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_footer; +$T2H_print_misc = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc; +$T2H_print_chapter_header = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_header; +$T2H_print_chapter_footer = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_footer; +$T2H_print_page_head = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_head; +$T2H_print_page_foot = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_foot; +$T2H_print_head_navigation = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_head_navigation; +$T2H_print_foot_navigation = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_foot_navigation; +$T2H_button_icon_img = \&T2H_DEFAULT_button_icon_img; +$T2H_print_navigation = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_navigation; +$T2H_about_body = \&T2H_DEFAULT_about_body; +$T2H_print_frame = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_frame; +$T2H_print_toc_frame = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_toc_frame; + +######################################################################## +# Layout for html for every sections +# +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_section +{ + my $fh = shift; + local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS; + &$T2H_print_head_navigation($fh) if $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION; + my $nw = t2h_print_lines($fh); + if ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' && $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION) + { + &$T2H_print_foot_navigation($fh, $nw); + } + else + { + print $fh '
' . "\n"; + } +} + +################################################################### +# Layout of top-page I recommend that you use @ifnothtml, @ifhtml, +# @html within the Top texinfo node to specify content of top-level +# page. +# +# If you enclose everything in @ifnothtml, then title, subtitle, +# author and overview is printed +# T2H_HREF of Next, Prev, Up, Forward, Back are not defined +# if $T2H_SPLIT then Top page is in its own html file +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_header +{ + &$T2H_print_page_head(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; + t2h_print_label(@_); # this needs to be called, otherwise no label set + &$T2H_print_head_navigation(@_); +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_footer +{ + &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(@_); + &$T2H_print_page_foot(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top +{ + my $fh = shift; + + # for redefining navigation buttons use: + # local $T2H_BUTTONS = [...]; + # as it is, 'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About' are printed + local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS; + &$T2H_print_Top_header($fh); + if ($T2H_THIS_SECTION) + { + # if top-level node has content, then print it with extra header + print $fh "

$T2H_NAME{Top}

" + unless ($T2H_HAS_TOP_HEADING); + t2h_print_lines($fh, $T2H_THIS_SECTION) + } + else + { + # top-level node is fully enclosed in @ifnothtml + # print fulltitle, subtitle, author, Overview + print $fh + "
\n

" . + join("

\n

", split(/\n/, $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle})) . + "

\n"; + print $fh "

$T2H_THISDOC{subtitle}

\n" if $T2H_THISDOC{subtitle}; + print $fh "$T2H_THISDOC{author}\n" if $T2H_THISDOC{author}; + print $fh < +
+

+

Overview:

+
+EOT + t2h_print_lines($fh, $T2H_OVERVIEW); + print $fh "
\n"; + } + &$T2H_print_Top_footer($fh); +} + +################################################################### +# Layout of Toc, Overview, and Footnotes pages +# By default, we use "normal" layout +# T2H_HREF of Next, Prev, Up, Forward, Back, etc are not defined +# use: local $T2H_BUTTONS = [...] to redefine navigation buttons +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Toc +{ + return &$T2H_print_misc(@_); +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Overview +{ + return &$T2H_print_misc(@_); +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Footnotes +{ + return &$T2H_print_misc(@_); +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_About +{ + return &$T2H_print_misc(@_); +} + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_header +{ + &$T2H_print_page_head(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; + # this needs to be called, otherwise, no labels are set + t2h_print_label(@_); + &$T2H_print_head_navigation(@_); +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_footer +{ + &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(@_); + &$T2H_print_page_foot(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc +{ + my $fh = shift; + local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS; + &$T2H_print_misc_header($fh); + print $fh "

$T2H_NAME{This}

\n"; + t2h_print_lines($fh); + &$T2H_print_misc_footer($fh); +} + +################################################################### +# chapter_header and chapter_footer are only called if +# T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter' +# chapter_header: after print_page_header, before print_section +# chapter_footer: after print_section of last section, before print_page_footer +# +# If you want to get rid of navigation stuff after each section, +# redefine print_section such that it does not call print_navigation, +# and put print_navigation into print_chapter_header +@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS = + ( + 'FastBack', 'FastForward', ' ', + ' ', ' ', ' ', ' ', + 'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About', + ); + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_header +{ + # nothing to do there, by default + if (! $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION) + { + my $fh = shift; + local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS; + &$T2H_print_navigation($fh); + print $fh "\n
\n"; + } +} + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_footer +{ + local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS; + &$T2H_print_navigation(@_); +} +################################################################### +$T2H_TODAY = &pretty_date; # like "20 September 1993" + +sub pretty_date { + local($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst); + + ($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst) = localtime(time); + $year += ($year < 70) ? 2000 : 1900; + # obachman: Let's do it as the Americans do + return($MONTH_NAMES->{$T2H_LANG}[$mon] . ", " . $mday . " " . $year); +} + + +################################################################### +# Layout of standard header and footer +# + +# Set the default body text, inserted between +###$T2H_BODYTEXT = 'LANG="EN" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" TEXT="#000000" LINK="#0000FF" VLINK="#800080" ALINK="#FF0000"'; +$T2H_BODYTEXT = 'LANG="' . $T2H_LANG . '" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" TEXT="#000000" LINK="#0000FF" VLINK="#800080" ALINK="#FF0000"'; +# text inserted after +$T2H_AFTER_BODY_OPEN = ''; +#text inserted before +$T2H_PRE_BODY_CLOSE = ''; +# this is used in footer +$T2H_ADDRESS = "by $T2H_USER " if $T2H_USER; +$T2H_ADDRESS .= "on $T2H_TODAY"; +# this is added inside after and some META NAME stuff +# can be used for <style> <script>, <meta> tags +$T2H_EXTRA_HEAD = ''; + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_head +{ + my $fh = shift; + my $longtitle = "$T2H_THISDOC{title}: $T2H_NAME{This}"; + print $fh <<EOT; +<HTML> +$T2H_DOCTYPE +<!-- Created on $T2H_TODAY by $THISPROG --> +<!-- +$T2H_AUTHORS +--> +<HEAD> +<TITLE>$longtitle + + + + + + +$T2H_EXTRA_HEAD + + + +$T2H_AFTER_BODY_OPEN +EOT +} + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_foot +{ + my $fh = shift; + print $fh < + +This document was generated +$T2H_ADDRESS +using texi2html +$T2H_PRE_BODY_CLOSE + + +EOT +} + +################################################################### +# Layout of navigation panel + +# if this is set, then a vertical navigation panel is used +$T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION = 0; +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_head_navigation +{ + my $fh = shift; + if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION) + { + print $fh < + + +EOT + } + &$T2H_print_navigation($fh, $T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION); + if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION) + { + print $fh < + +EOT + } + elsif ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section') + { + print $fh "
\n"; + } +} + +# Specifies the minimum page length required before a navigation panel +# is placed at the bottom of a page (the default is that of latex2html) +# T2H_THIS_WORDS_IN_PAGE holds number of words of current page +$T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE = 300; +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_foot_navigation +{ + my $fh = shift; + my $nwords = shift; + if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION) + { + print $fh < + + +EOT + } + print $fh "
\n"; + &$T2H_print_navigation($fh) if ($nwords >= $T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE) +} + +###################################################################### +# navigation panel +# +# specify in this array which "buttons" should appear in which order +# in the navigation panel for sections; use ' ' for empty buttons (space) +@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS = + ( + 'Back', 'Forward', ' ', 'FastBack', 'Up', 'FastForward', + ' ', ' ', ' ', ' ', + 'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About', + ); + +# buttons for misc stuff +@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS = ('Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About'); + +# insert here name of icon images for buttons +# Icons are used, if $T2H_ICONS and resp. value are set +%T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS = + ( + 'Top', '', + 'Contents', '', + 'Overview', '', + 'Index', '', + 'Back', '', + 'FastBack', '', + 'Prev', '', + 'Up', '', + 'Next', '', + 'Forward', '', + 'FastForward', '', + 'About' , '', + 'First', '', + 'Last', '', + ' ', '' + ); + +# insert here name of icon images for these, if button is inactive +%T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS = + ( + 'Top', '', + 'Contents', '', + 'Overview', '', + 'Index', '', + 'Back', '', + 'FastBack', '', + 'Prev', '', + 'Up', '', + 'Next', '', + 'Forward', '', + 'FastForward', '', + 'About', '', + 'First', '', + 'Last', '', + ); + +# how to create IMG tag +sub T2H_DEFAULT_button_icon_img +{ + my $button = shift; + my $icon = shift; + my $name = shift; + return qq{$button: $name}; +} + +# Names of text as alternative for icons +%T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT = + ( + 'Top', 'Top', + 'Contents', 'Contents', + 'Overview', 'Overview', + 'Index', 'Index', + ' ', '   ', + 'Back', ' < ', + 'FastBack', ' << ', + 'Prev', 'Prev', + 'Up', ' Up ', + 'Next', 'Next', + 'Forward', ' > ', + 'FastForward', ' >> ', + 'About', ' ? ', + 'First', ' |< ', + 'Last', ' >| ' + ); + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_navigation +{ + my $fh = shift; + my $vertical = shift; + my $spacing = 1; + print $fh "\n"; + + print $fh "" unless $vertical; + for $button (@$T2H_BUTTONS) + { + print $fh qq{\n} if $vertical; + print $fh qq{\n"; + print $fh "\n" if $vertical; + } + print $fh "" unless $vertical; + print $fh "
}; + + if (ref($button) eq 'CODE') + { + &$button($fh, $vertical); + } + elsif ($button eq ' ') + { # handle space button + print $fh + $T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{' '} ? + &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{' '}) : + $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{' '}; + next; + } + elsif ($T2H_HREF{$button}) + { # button is active + print $fh + $T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button} ? # use icon ? + t2h_anchor('', $T2H_HREF{$button}, # yes + &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, + $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button}, + $T2H_NAME{$button})) + : # use text + "[" . + t2h_anchor('', $T2H_HREF{$button}, $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button}) . + "]"; + } + else + { # button is passive + print $fh + $T2H_ICONS && $T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS{$button} ? + &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, + $T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS{$button}, + $T2H_NAME{$button}) : + + "[" . $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button} . "]"; + } + print $fh "
\n"; +} + +###################################################################### +# Frames: this is from "Richard Y. Kim" +# Should be improved to be more conforming to other _print* functions + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_frame +{ + my $fh = shift; + print $fh < +$T2H_THISDOC{title} + + + + + +EOT +} + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_toc_frame +{ + my $fh = shift; + &$T2H_print_page_head($fh); + print $fh <Content +EOT + print $fh map {s/HREF=/target=\"main\" HREF=/; $_;} @stoc_lines; + print $fh "\n"; +} + +###################################################################### +# About page +# + +# T2H_PRE_ABOUT might be a function +$T2H_PRE_ABOUT = <texi2html +

+EOT +$T2H_AFTER_ABOUT = ''; + +sub T2H_DEFAULT_about_body +{ + my $about; + if (ref($T2H_PRE_ABOUT) eq 'CODE') + { + $about = &$T2H_PRE_ABOUT(); + } + else + { + $about = $T2H_PRE_ABOUT; + } + $about .= <

+ + + + + + + +EOT + + for $button (@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS) + { + next if $button eq ' ' || ref($button) eq 'CODE'; + $about .= < + + + + +EOT + } + + $about .= < +

+where the Example assumes that the current position +is at Subsubsection One-Two-Three of a document of +the following structure: +
    +
  • 1. Section One
  • +
      +
    • 1.1 Subsection One-One
    • +
        +
      • ...
      • +
      +
    • 1.2 Subsection One-Two
    • +
        +
      • 1.2.1 Subsubsection One-Two-One +
      • 1.2.2 Subsubsection One-Two-Two +
      • 1.2.3 Subsubsection One-Two-Three     +<== Current Position +
      • 1.2.4 Subsubsection One-Two-Four +
      +
    • 1.3 Subsection One-Three
    • +
        +
      • ...
      • +
      +
    • 1.4 Subsection One-Four
    • +
    +
+$T2H_AFTER_ABOUT +EOT + return $about; +} + + +%T2H_BUTTONS_GOTO = + ( + 'Top', 'cover (top) of document', + 'Contents', 'table of contents', + 'Overview', 'short table of contents', + 'Index', 'concept index', + 'Back', 'previous section in reading order', + 'FastBack', 'previous or up-and-previous section ', + 'Prev', 'previous section same level', + 'Up', 'up section', + 'Next', 'next section same level', + 'Forward', 'next section in reading order', + 'FastForward', 'next or up-and-next section', + 'About' , 'this page', + 'First', 'first section in reading order', + 'Last', 'last section in reading order', + ); + +%T2H_BUTTONS_EXAMPLE = +( + 'Top', '   ', + 'Contents', '   ', + 'Overview', '   ', + 'Index', '   ', + 'Back', '1.2.2', + 'FastBack', '1.1', + 'Prev', '1.2.2', + 'Up', '1.2', + 'Next', '1.2.4', + 'Forward', '1.2.4', + 'FastForward', '1.3', + 'About', '   ', + 'First', '1.', + 'Last', '1.2.4', +); + + +###################################################################### +# from here on, its l2h init stuff +# + +## initialization for latex2html as for Singular manual generation +## obachman 3/99 + +# +# Options controlling Titles, File-Names, Tracing and Sectioning +# +$TITLE = ''; + +$SHORTEXTN = 0; + +$LONG_TITLES = 0; + +$DESTDIR = ''; # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument + +$NO_SUBDIR = 0;# should be overwritten by cmd-line argument + +$PREFIX = ''; # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument + +$AUTO_PREFIX = 0; # this is needed, so that prefix settings are used + +$AUTO_LINK = 0; + +$SPLIT = 0; + +$MAX_LINK_DEPTH = 0; + +$TMP = ''; # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument + +$DEBUG = 0; + +$VERBOSE = 1; + +# +# Options controlling Extensions and Special Features +# +$HTML_VERSION = "3.2"; + +$TEXDEFS = 1; # we absolutely need that + +$EXTERNAL_FILE = ''; + +$SCALABLE_FONTS = 1; + +$NO_SIMPLE_MATH = 1; + +$LOCAL_ICONS = 1; + +$SHORT_INDEX = 0; + +$NO_FOOTNODE = 1; + +$ADDRESS = ''; + +$INFO = ''; + +# +# Switches controlling Image Generation +# +$ASCII_MODE = 0; + +$NOLATEX = 0; + +$EXTERNAL_IMAGES = 0; + +$PS_IMAGES = 0; + +$NO_IMAGES = 0; + +$IMAGES_ONLY = 0; + +$REUSE = 2; + +$ANTI_ALIAS = 1; + +$ANTI_ALIAS_TEXT = 1; + +# +#Switches controlling Navigation Panels +# +$NO_NAVIGATION = 1; +$ADDRESS = ''; +$INFO = 0; # 0 = do not make a "About this document..." section + +# +#Switches for Linking to other documents +# +# actuall -- we don't care + +$MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = 0; # Stop making separate files at this depth + +$MAX_LINK_DEPTH = 0; # Stop showing child nodes at this depth + +$NOLATEX = 0; # 1 = do not pass unknown environments to Latex + +$EXTERNAL_IMAGES = 0; # 1 = leave the images outside the document + +$ASCII_MODE = 0; # 1 = do not use any icons or internal images + +# 1 = use links to external postscript images rather than inlined bitmap +# images. +$PS_IMAGES = 0; +$SHOW_SECTION_NUMBERS = 0; + +### Other global variables ############################################### +$CHILDLINE = ""; + +# This is the line width measured in pixels and it is used to right justify +# equations and equation arrays; +$LINE_WIDTH = 500; + +# Used in conjunction with AUTO_NAVIGATION +$WORDS_IN_PAGE = 300; + +# Affects ONLY the way accents are processed +$default_language = 'english'; + +# The value of this variable determines how many words to use in each +# title that is added to the navigation panel (see below) +# +$WORDS_IN_NAVIGATION_PANEL_TITLES = 0; + +# This number will determine the size of the equations, special characters, +# and anything which will be converted into an inlined image +# *except* "image generating environments" such as "figure", "table" +# or "minipage". +# Effective values are those greater than 0. +# Sensible values are between 0.1 - 4. +$MATH_SCALE_FACTOR = 1.5; + +# This number will determine the size of +# image generating environments such as "figure", "table" or "minipage". +# Effective values are those greater than 0. +# Sensible values are between 0.1 - 4. +$FIGURE_SCALE_FACTOR = 1.6; + + +# If both of the following two variables are set then the "Up" button +# of the navigation panel in the first node/page of a converted document +# will point to $EXTERNAL_UP_LINK. $EXTERNAL_UP_TITLE should be set +# to some text which describes this external link. +$EXTERNAL_UP_LINK = ""; +$EXTERNAL_UP_TITLE = ""; + +# If this is set then the resulting HTML will look marginally better if viewed +# with Netscape. +$NETSCAPE_HTML = 1; + +# Valid paper sizes are "letter", "legal", "a4","a3","a2" and "a0" +# Paper sizes has no effect other than in the time it takes to create inlined +# images and in whether large images can be created at all ie +# - larger paper sizes *MAY* help with large image problems +# - smaller paper sizes are quicker to handle +$PAPERSIZE = "a4"; + +# Replace "english" with another language in order to tell LaTeX2HTML that you +# want some generated section titles (eg "Table of Contents" or "References") +# to appear in a different language. Currently only "english" and "french" +# is supported but it is very easy to add your own. See the example in the +# file "latex2html.config" +$TITLES_LANGUAGE = "english"; + +1; # This must be the last non-comment line + +# End File texi2html.init +###################################################################### + + +require "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" + if ($0 =~ /\.pl$/ && + -e "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" && -r "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init"); + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Initialization # +# Pasted content of File $(srcdir)/MySimple.pm: Command-line processing # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +# leave this within comments, and keep the require statement +# This way, you can directly run texi2html.pl, if $ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init +# exists. + +# +package Getopt::MySimple; + +# Name: +# Getopt::MySimple. +# +# Documentation: +# POD-style (incomplete) documentation is in file MySimple.pod +# +# Tabs: +# 4 spaces || die. +# +# Author: +# Ron Savage rpsavage@ozemail.com.au. +# 1.00 19-Aug-97 Initial version. +# 1.10 13-Oct-97 Add arrays of switches (eg '=s@'). +# 1.20 3-Dec-97 Add 'Help' on a per-switch basis. +# 1.30 11-Dec-97 Change 'Help' to 'verbose'. Make all hash keys lowercase. +# 1.40 10-Nov-98 Change width of help report. Restructure tests. +# 1-Jul-00 Modifications for Texi2html + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Locally modified by obachman (Display type instead of env, order by cmp) +# $Id: MySimple.pm,v 1.1 2000/07/03 08:44:13 obachman Exp $ + +# use strict; +# no strict 'refs'; + +use vars qw(@EXPORT @EXPORT_OK @ISA); +use vars qw($fieldWidth $opt $VERSION); + +use Exporter(); +use Getopt::Long; + +@ISA = qw(Exporter); +@EXPORT = qw(); +@EXPORT_OK = qw($opt); # An alias for $self -> {'opt'}. + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +$fieldWidth = 20; +$VERSION = '1.41'; + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +sub byOrder +{ + my($self) = @_; + + return uc($a) cmp (uc($b)); +} + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +sub dumpOptions +{ + my($self) = @_; + + print 'Option', ' ' x ($fieldWidth - length('Option') ), "Value\n"; + + for (sort byOrder keys(%{$self -> {'opt'} }) ) + { + print "-$_", ' ' x ($fieldWidth - (1 + length) ), "${$self->{'opt'} }{$_}\n"; + } + + print "\n"; + +} # End of dumpOptions. + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Return: +# 0 -> Error. +# 1 -> Ok. + +sub getOptions +{ + push(@_, 0) if ($#_ == 2); # Default for $ignoreCase is 0. + push(@_, 1) if ($#_ == 3); # Default for $helpThenExit is 1. + + my($self, $default, $helpText, $versionText, + $helpThenExit, $versionThenExit, $ignoreCase) = @_; + + $helpThenExit = 1 unless (defined($helpThenExit)); + $versionThenExit = 1 unless (defined($versionThenExit)); + $ignoreCase = 0 unless (defined($ignoreCase)); + + $self -> {'default'} = $default; + $self -> {'helpText'} = $helpText; + $self -> {'versionText'} = $versionText; + $Getopt::Long::ignorecase = $ignoreCase; + + unless (defined($self -> {'default'}{'help'})) + { + $self -> {'default'}{'help'} = + { + type => ':i', + default => '', + linkage => sub {$self->helpOptions($_[1]); exit (0) if $helpThenExit;}, + verbose => "print help and exit" + }; + } + + unless (defined($self -> {'default'}{'version'})) + { + $self -> {'default'}{'version'} = + { + type => '', + default => '', + linkage => sub {print $self->{'versionText'}; exit (0) if versionTheExit;}, + verbose => "print version and exit" + }; + } + + for (keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) ) + { + my $type = ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'type'}; + push(@{$self -> {'type'} }, "$_$type"); + $self->{'opt'}->{$_} = ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'} + if ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'}; + } + + my($result) = &GetOptions($self -> {'opt'}, @{$self -> {'type'} }); + + return $result unless $result; + + for (keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) ) + { + if (! defined(${$self -> {'opt'} }{$_})) #{ + { + ${$self -> {'opt'} }{$_} = ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'default'}; + } + } + + $result; +} # End of getOptions. + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +sub helpOptions +{ + my($self) = shift; + my($noHelp) = shift; + $noHelp = 0 unless $noHelp; + my($optwidth, $typewidth, $defaultwidth, $maxlinewidth, $valind, $valwidth) + = (10, 5, 9, 78, 4, 11); + + print "$self->{'helpText'}" if ($self -> {'helpText'}); + + print ' Option', ' ' x ($optwidth - length('Option') -1 ), + 'Type', ' ' x ($typewidth - length('Type') + 1), + 'Default', ' ' x ($defaultwidth - length('Default') ), + "Description\n"; + + for (sort byOrder keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) ) + { + my($line, $help, $option, $val); + $option = $_; + next if ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'noHelp'} && ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'noHelp'} > $noHelp; + $line = " -$_ " . ' ' x ($optwidth - (2 + length) ) . + "${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'type'} ". + ' ' x ($typewidth - (1+length(${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'type'}) )); + + $val = ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'}; + if ($val) + { + if (ref($val) eq 'SCALAR') + { + $val = $$val; + } + else + { + $val = ''; + } + } + else + { + $val = ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'default'}; + } + $line .= "$val "; + $line .= ' ' x ($optwidth + $typewidth + $defaultwidth + 1 - length($line)); + + if (defined(${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'}) && + ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'} ne '') + { + $help = "${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'}"; + } + else + { + $help = ' '; + } + if ((length("$line") + length($help)) < $maxlinewidth) + { + print $line , $help, "\n"; + } + else + { + print $line, "\n", ' ' x $valind, $help, "\n"; + } + for $val (sort byOrder keys(%{${$self->{'default'}}{$option}{'values'}})) + { + print ' ' x ($valind + 2); + print $val, ' ', ' ' x ($valwidth - length($val) - 2); + print ${$self->{'default'}}{$option}{'values'}{$val}, "\n"; + } + } + + print <| ! no argument: variable is set to 1 on -foo (or, to 0 on -nofoo) + =s | :s mandatory (or, optional) string argument + =i | :i mandatory (or, optional) integer argument +EOT +} # End of helpOptions. + +#------------------------------------------------------------------- + +sub new +{ + my($class) = @_; + my($self) = {}; + $self -> {'default'} = {}; + $self -> {'helpText'} = ''; + $self -> {'opt'} = {}; + $opt = $self -> {'opt'}; # An alias for $self -> {'opt'}. + $self -> {'type'} = (); + + return bless $self, $class; + +} # End of new. + +# -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +1; + +# End MySimple.pm + +require "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/MySimple.pm" + if ($0 =~ /\.pl$/ && + -e "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" && -r "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init"); + +package main; + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Constants # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +$DEBUG_TOC = 1; +$DEBUG_INDEX = 2; +$DEBUG_BIB = 4; +$DEBUG_GLOSS = 8; +$DEBUG_DEF = 16; +$DEBUG_HTML = 32; +$DEBUG_USER = 64; +$DEBUG_L2H = 128; + + +$BIBRE = '\[[\w\/-]+\]'; # RE for a bibliography reference +$FILERE = '[\/\w.+-]+'; # RE for a file name +$VARRE = '[^\s\{\}]+'; # RE for a variable name +$NODERE = '[^,:]+'; # RE for a node name +$NODESRE = '[^:]+'; # RE for a list of node names + +$ERROR = "***"; # prefix for errors +$WARN = "**"; # prefix for warnings + + # program home page +$PROTECTTAG = "_ThisIsProtected_"; # tag to recognize protected sections + +$CHAPTEREND = "\n"; # to know where a chpater ends +$SECTIONEND = "\n"; # to know where section ends +$TOPEND = "\n"; # to know where top ends + + + +# +# pre-defined indices +# +$index_properties = +{ + 'c' => { name => 'cp'}, + 'f' => { name => 'fn', code => 1}, + 'v' => { name => 'vr', code => 1}, + 'k' => { name => 'ky', code => 1}, + 'p' => { name => 'pg', code => 1}, + 't' => { name => 'tp', code => 1} +}; + + +%predefined_index = ( + 'cp', 'c', + 'fn', 'f', + 'vr', 'v', + 'ky', 'k', + 'pg', 'p', + 'tp', 't', + ); + +# +# valid indices +# +%valid_index = ( + 'c', 1, + 'f', 1, + 'v', 1, + 'k', 1, + 'p', 1, + 't', 1, + ); + +# +# texinfo section names to level +# +%sec2level = ( + 'top', 0, + 'chapter', 1, + 'unnumbered', 1, + 'majorheading', 1, + 'chapheading', 1, + 'appendix', 1, + 'section', 2, + 'unnumberedsec', 2, + 'heading', 2, + 'appendixsec', 2, + 'appendixsection', 2, + 'subsection', 3, + 'unnumberedsubsec', 3, + 'subheading', 3, + 'appendixsubsec', 3, + 'subsubsection', 4, + 'unnumberedsubsubsec', 4, + 'subsubheading', 4, + 'appendixsubsubsec', 4, + ); + +# +# accent map, TeX command to ISO name +# +%accent_map = ( + '"', 'uml', + '~', 'tilde', + '^', 'circ', + '`', 'grave', + '\'', 'acute', + ); + +# +# texinfo "simple things" (@foo) to HTML ones +# +%simple_map = ( + # cf. makeinfo.c + "*", "
", # HTML+ + " ", " ", + "\t", " ", + "-", "­", # soft hyphen + "\n", "\n", + "|", "", + 'tab', '<\/TD>
Button Name Go to From 1.2.3 go to
+EOT + $about .= + ($T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button} ? + &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button}) : + " [" . $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button} . "] "); + $about .= < + +$button + +$T2H_BUTTONS_GOTO{$button} + +$T2H_BUTTONS_EXAMPLE{$button} +
', + # spacing commands + ":", "", + "!", "!", + "?", "?", + ".", ".", + "-", "", + ); + +# +# texinfo "things" (@foo{}) to HTML ones +# +%things_map = ( + 'TeX', 'TeX', + 'br', '

', # paragraph break + 'bullet', '*', + 'copyright', '(C)', + 'dots', '...<\/small>', + 'enddots', '....<\/small>', + 'equiv', '==', + 'error', 'error-->', + 'expansion', '==>', + 'minus', '-', + 'point', '-!-', + 'print', '-|', + 'result', '=>', + 'today', $T2H_TODAY, + 'aa', 'å', + 'AA', 'Å', + 'ae', 'æ', + 'oe', 'œ', + 'AE', 'Æ', + 'OE', 'Œ', + 'o', 'ø', + 'O', 'Ø', + 'ss', 'ß', + 'l', '\/l', + 'L', '\/L', + 'exclamdown', '¡', + 'questiondown', '¿', + 'pounds', '£' + ); + +# +# texinfo styles (@foo{bar}) to HTML ones +# +%style_map = ( + 'acronym', '&do_acronym', + 'asis', '', + 'b', 'B', + 'cite', 'CITE', + 'code', 'CODE', + 'command', 'CODE', + 'ctrl', '&do_ctrl', # special case + 'dfn', 'EM', # DFN tag is illegal in the standard + 'dmn', '', # useless + 'email', '&do_email', # insert a clickable email address + 'emph', 'EM', + 'env', 'CODE', + 'file', '"TT', # will put quotes, cf. &apply_style + 'i', 'I', + 'kbd', 'KBD', + 'key', 'KBD', + 'math', '&do_math', + 'option', '"SAMP', # will put quotes, cf. &apply_style + 'r', '', # unsupported + 'samp', '"SAMP', # will put quotes, cf. &apply_style + 'sc', '&do_sc', # special case + 'strong', 'STRONG', + 't', 'TT', + 'titlefont', '', # useless + 'uref', '&do_uref', # insert a clickable URL + 'url', '&do_url', # insert a clickable URL + 'var', 'VAR', + 'w', '', # unsupported + 'H', '&do_accent', + 'dotaccent', '&do_accent', + 'ringaccent','&do_accent', + 'tieaccent', '&do_accent', + 'u','&do_accent', + 'ubaraccent','&do_accent', + 'udotaccent','&do_accent', + 'v', '&do_accent', + ',', '&do_accent', + 'dotless', '&do_accent' + ); + +# +# texinfo format (@foo/@end foo) to HTML ones +# +%format_map = ( + 'quotation', 'BLOCKQUOTE', + # lists + 'itemize', 'UL', + 'enumerate', 'OL', + # poorly supported + 'flushleft', 'PRE', + 'flushright', 'PRE', + ); + +# +# an eval of these $complex_format_map->{what}->[0] yields beginning +# an eval of these $complex_format_map->{what}->[1] yieleds end +$complex_format_map = +{ + example => + [ + q{"

$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL
"},








    +  q{'
'} + ], + smallexample => + [ + q{"$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL
"},








    +  q{'
'} + ], + display => + [ + q{"$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL
'},








    +  q{'
'} + ], + smalldisplay => + [ + q{"$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL
'},








    +  q{'
'} + ] +}; + +$complex_format_map->{lisp} = $complex_format_map->{example}; +$complex_format_map->{smalllisp} = $complex_format_map->{smallexample}; +$complex_format_map->{format} = $complex_format_map->{display}; +$complex_format_map->{smallformat} = $complex_format_map->{smalldisplay}; + +# +# texinfo definition shortcuts to real ones +# +%def_map = ( + # basic commands + 'deffn', 0, + 'defvr', 0, + 'deftypefn', 0, + 'deftypevr', 0, + 'defcv', 0, + 'defop', 0, + 'deftp', 0, + # basic x commands + 'deffnx', 0, + 'defvrx', 0, + 'deftypefnx', 0, + 'deftypevrx', 0, + 'defcvx', 0, + 'defopx', 0, + 'deftpx', 0, + # shortcuts + 'defun', 'deffn Function', + 'defmac', 'deffn Macro', + 'defspec', 'deffn {Special Form}', + 'defvar', 'defvr Variable', + 'defopt', 'defvr {User Option}', + 'deftypefun', 'deftypefn Function', + 'deftypevar', 'deftypevr Variable', + 'defivar', 'defcv {Instance Variable}', + 'deftypeivar', 'defcv {Instance Variable}', # NEW: FIXME + 'defmethod', 'defop Method', + 'deftypemethod', 'defop Method', # NEW:FIXME + # x shortcuts + 'defunx', 'deffnx Function', + 'defmacx', 'deffnx Macro', + 'defspecx', 'deffnx {Special Form}', + 'defvarx', 'defvrx Variable', + 'defoptx', 'defvrx {User Option}', + 'deftypefunx', 'deftypefnx Function', + 'deftypevarx', 'deftypevrx Variable', + 'defivarx', 'defcvx {Instance Variable}', + 'defmethodx', 'defopx Method', + ); + +# +# things to skip +# +%to_skip = ( + # comments + 'c', 1, + 'comment', 1, + 'ifnotinfo', 1, + 'ifnottex', 1, + 'ifhtml', 1, + 'end ifhtml', 1, + 'end ifnotinfo', 1, + 'end ifnottex', 1, + # useless + 'detailmenu', 1, + 'direntry', 1, + 'contents', 1, + 'shortcontents', 1, + 'summarycontents', 1, + 'footnotestyle', 1, + 'end ifclear', 1, + 'end ifset', 1, + 'titlepage', 1, + 'end titlepage', 1, + # unsupported commands (formatting) + 'afourpaper', 1, + 'cropmarks', 1, + 'finalout', 1, + 'headings', 1, + 'sp', 1, + 'need', 1, + 'page', 1, + 'setchapternewpage', 1, + 'everyheading', 1, + 'everyfooting', 1, + 'evenheading', 1, + 'evenfooting', 1, + 'oddheading', 1, + 'oddfooting', 1, + 'smallbook', 1, + 'vskip', 1, + 'filbreak', 1, + 'paragraphindent', 1, + # unsupported formats + 'cartouche', 1, + 'end cartouche', 1, + 'group', 1, + 'end group', 1, + ); + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Argument parsing, initialisation # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +# +# flush stdout and stderr after every write +# +select(STDERR); +$| = 1; +select(STDOUT); +$| = 1; + + +%value = (); # hold texinfo variables, see also -D +$use_bibliography = 1; +$use_acc = 1; + +# +# called on -init-file +sub LoadInitFile +{ + my $init_file = shift; + # second argument is value of options + $init_file = shift; + if (-f $init_file) + { + print "# reading initialization file from $init_file\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + require($init_file); + } + else + { + print "$ERROR Error: can't read init file $int_file\n"; + $init_file = ''; + } +} + +# +# called on -lang +sub SetDocumentLanguage +{ + my $lang = shift; + if (! exists($T2H_WORDS->{$lang})) + { + warn "$ERROR: Language specs for '$lang' do not exists. Reverting to '" . + ($T2H_LANG ? T2H_LANG : "en") . "'\n"; + } + else + { + print "# using '$lang' as document language\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + $T2H_LANG = $lang; + } +} + +## +## obsolete cmd line options +## +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {'no-section_navigation'} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION = 0;}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use -nosec_nav', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {use_acc} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$use_acc, + verbose => 'obsolete', + noHelp => 2 +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {expandinfo} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_EXPAND = 'info';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use "-expand info" instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {expandtex} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_EXPAND = 'tex';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use "-expand tex" instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {monolithic} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_SPLIT = '';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split no" instead', + noHelp => 2 +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {split_node} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub{$main::T2H_SPLIT = 'section';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split section" instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {split_chapter} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub{$main::T2H_SPLIT = 'chapter';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split chapter" instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {no_verbose} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_VERBOSE = 0;}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use -noverbose instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {output_file} = +{ + type => '=s', + linkage => sub {$main::T2H_OUT = @_[1]; $T2H_SPLIT = '';}, + verbose => 'obsolete, use -out_file instead', + noHelp => 2 +}; + +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {section_navigation} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION, + verbose => 'obsolete, use -sec_nav instead', + noHelp => 2, +}; + +$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {verbose} = +{ + type => '!', + linkage => \$T2H_VERBOSE, + verbose => 'obsolete, use -Verbose instead', + noHelp => 2 +}; + +# read initialzation from $sysconfdir/texi2htmlrc or $HOME/.texi2htmlrc +my $home = $ENV{HOME}; +defined($home) or $home = ''; +foreach $i ('/usr/local/etc/texi2htmlrc', "$home/.texi2htmlrc") { + if (-f $i) { + print "# reading initialization file from $i\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + require($i); + } +} + + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# parse command-line options +# # +#---############################################################################ +$T2H_USAGE_TEXT = <getOptions($T2H_OPTIONS, $T2H_USAGE_TEXT, "$THISVERSION\n")) +{ + print $Configure_failed if $Configure_failed; + die $T2H_FAILURE_TEXT; +} + +if (@ARGV > 1) +{ + eval {Getopt::Long::Configure("no_pass_through");}; + if (! $options->getOptions($T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS, $T2H_USAGE_TEXT, "$THISVERSION\n")) + { + print $Configure_failed if $Configure_failed; + die $T2H_FAILURE_TEXT; + } +} + +if ($T2H_CHECK) { + die "Need file to check\n$T2H_FAILURE_TEXT" unless @ARGV > 0; + ✓ + exit; +} + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# evaluation of cmd line options +# # +#---############################################################################ + +if ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'info') +{ + $to_skip{'ifinfo'} = 1; + $to_skip{'end ifinfo'} = 1; +} +elsif ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex') +{ + $to_skip{'iftex'} = 1; + $to_skip{'end iftex'} = 1; + +} + +$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = '' if $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK eq 'xbm'; + +# +# file name buisness +# +die "Need exactly one file to translate\n$T2H_FAILURE_TEXT" unless @ARGV == 1; +$docu = shift(@ARGV); +if ($docu =~ /.*\//) { + chop($docu_dir = $&); + $docu_name = $'; +} else { + $docu_dir = '.'; + $docu_name = $docu; +} +unshift(@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS, $docu_dir); +$docu_name =~ s/\.te?x(i|info)?$//; # basename of the document +$docu_name = $T2H_PREFIX if ($T2H_PREFIX); + +# subdir +if ($T2H_SUBDIR && ! $T2H_OUT) +{ + $T2H_SUBDIR =~ s|/*$||; + unless (-d "$T2H_SUBDIR" && -w "$T2H_SUBDIR") + { + if ( mkdir($T2H_SUBDIR, oct(755))) + { + print "# created directory $T2H_SUBDIR\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR can't create directory $T2H_SUBDIR. Put results into current directory\n"; + $T2H_SUBDIR = ''; + } + } +} + +if ($T2H_SUBDIR && ! $T2H_OUT) +{ + $docu_rdir = "$T2H_SUBDIR/"; + print "# putting result files into directory $docu_rdir\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); +} +else +{ + if ($T2H_OUT && $T2H_OUT =~ m|(.*)/|) + { + $docu_rdir = "$1/"; + print "# putting result files into directory $docu_rdir\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + } + else + { + print "# putting result files into current directory \n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + $docu_rdir = ''; + } +} + +# extension +if ($T2H_SHORTEXTN) +{ + $docu_ext = "htm"; +} +else +{ + $docu_ext = "html"; +} +if ($T2H_TOP_FILE =~ /\..*$/) +{ + $T2H_TOP_FILE = $`.".$docu_ext"; +} + +# result files +if (! $T2H_OUT && ($T2H_SPLIT =~ /section/i || $T2H_SPLIT =~ /node/i)) +{ + $T2H_SPLIT = 'section'; +} +elsif (! $T2H_OUT && $T2H_SPLIT =~ /chapter/i) +{ + $T2H_SPLIT = 'chapter' +} +else +{ + undef $T2H_SPLIT; +} + +$docu_doc = "$docu_name.$docu_ext"; # document's contents +$docu_doc_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_doc"; +if ($T2H_SPLIT) +{ + $docu_toc = $T2H_TOC_FILE || "${docu_name}_toc.$docu_ext"; # document's table of contents + $docu_stoc = "${docu_name}_ovr.$docu_ext"; # document's short toc + $docu_foot = "${docu_name}_fot.$docu_ext"; # document's footnotes + $docu_about = "${docu_name}_abt.$docu_ext"; # about this document + $docu_top = $T2H_TOP_FILE || $docu_doc; +} +else +{ + if ($T2H_OUT) + { + $docu_doc = $T2H_OUT; + $docu_doc =~ s|.*/||; + } + $docu_toc = $docu_foot = $docu_stoc = $docu_about = $docu_top = $docu_doc; +} + +$docu_toc_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_toc"; +$docu_stoc_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_stoc"; +$docu_foot_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_foot"; +$docu_about_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_about"; +$docu_top_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_top"; + +$docu_frame_file = "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_frame.$docu_ext"; +$docu_toc_frame_file = "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_toc_frame.$docu_ext"; + +# +# variables +# +$value{'html'} = 1; # predefine html (the output format) +$value{'texi2html'} = $THISVERSION; # predefine texi2html (the translator) +# _foo: internal to track @foo +foreach ('_author', '_title', '_subtitle', + '_settitle', '_setfilename', '_shorttitle') { + $value{$_} = ''; # prevent -w warnings +} +%node2sec = (); # node to section name +%sec2node = (); # section to node name +%sec2number = (); # section to number +%number2sec = (); # number to section +%idx2node = (); # index keys to node +%node2href = (); # node to HREF +%node2next = (); # node to next +%node2prev = (); # node to prev +%node2up = (); # node to up +%bib2href = (); # bibliography reference to HREF +%gloss2href = (); # glossary term to HREF +@sections = (); # list of sections +%tag2pro = (); # protected sections + +# +# initial indexes +# +$bib_num = 0; +$foot_num = 0; +$gloss_num = 0; +$idx_num = 0; +$sec_num = 0; +$doc_num = 0; +$html_num = 0; + +# +# can I use ISO8879 characters? (HTML+) +# +if ($T2H_USE_ISO) { + $things_map{'bullet'} = "•"; + $things_map{'copyright'} = "©"; + $things_map{'dots'} = "…"; + $things_map{'equiv'} = "≡"; + $things_map{'expansion'} = "→"; + $things_map{'point'} = "∗"; + $things_map{'result'} = "⇒"; +} + +# +# read texi2html extensions (if any) +# +$extensions = 'texi2html.ext'; # extensions in working directory +if (-f $extensions) { + print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + require($extensions); +} +($progdir = $0) =~ s/[^\/]+$//; +if ($progdir && ($progdir ne './')) { + $extensions = "${progdir}texi2html.ext"; # extensions in texi2html directory + if (-f $extensions) { + print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + require($extensions); + } +} + + +print "# reading from $docu\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +######################################################################### +# +# latex2html stuff +# +# latex2html conversions consist of three stages: +# 1) ToLatex: Put "latex" code into a latex file +# 2) ToHtml: Use latex2html to generate corresponding html code and images +# 3) FromHtml: Extract generated code and images from latex2html run +# + +########################## +# default settings +# + +# defaults for files and names + +sub l2h_Init +{ + local($root) = @_; + + return 0 unless ($root); + + $l2h_name = "${root}_l2h"; + + $l2h_latex_file = "$docu_rdir${l2h_name}.tex"; + $l2h_cache_file = "${docu_rdir}l2h_cache.pm"; + $T2H_L2H_L2H = "latex2html" unless ($T2H_L2H_L2H); + + # destination dir -- generated images are put there, should be the same + # as dir of enclosing html document -- + $l2h_html_file = "$docu_rdir${l2h_name}.html"; + $l2h_prefix = "${l2h_name}_"; + return 1; +} + + +########################## +# +# First stage: Generation of Latex file +# Initialize with: l2h_InitToLatex +# Add content with: l2h_ToLatex($text) --> HTML placeholder comment +# Finish with: l2h_FinishToLatex +# + +$l2h_latex_preample = <$l2h_latex_file")) + { + warn "$ERROR Error l2h: Can't open latex file '$latex_file' for writing\n"; + return 0; + } + print "# l2h: use ${l2h_latex_file} as latex file\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + print L2H_LATEX $l2h_latex_preample; + } + # open database for caching + l2h_InitCache(); + $l2h_latex_count = 0; + $l2h_to_latex_count = 0; + $l2h_cached_count = 0; + return 1; +} + +# print text (1st arg) into latex file (if not already there), return +# HTML commentary which can be later on replaced by the latex2html +# generated text +sub l2h_ToLatex +{ + my($text) = @_; + my($count); + + $l2h_to_latex_count++; + $text =~ s/(\s*)$//; + + # try whether we can cache it + my $cached_text = l2h_FromCache($text); + if ($cached_text) + { + $l2h_cached_count++; + return $cached_text; + } + + # try whether we have text already on things to do + unless ($count = $l2h_to_latex{$text}) + { + $count = $l2h_latex_count; + $l2h_latex_count++; + $l2h_to_latex{$text} = $count; + $l2h_to_latex[$count] = $text; + unless ($T2H_L2H_SKIP) + { + print L2H_LATEX "\\begin{rawhtml}\n"; + print L2H_LATEX "\n"; + print L2H_LATEX "\\end{rawhtml}\n"; + + print L2H_LATEX "$text\n"; + + print L2H_LATEX "\\begin{rawhtml}\n"; + print L2H_LATEX "\n"; + print L2H_LATEX "\\end{rawhtml}\n"; + } + } + return ""; +} + +# print closing into latex file and close it +sub l2h_FinishToLatex +{ + local ($reused); + + $reused = $l2h_to_latex_count - $l2h_latex_count - $l2h_cached_count; + unless ($T2H_L2H_SKIP) + { + print L2H_LATEX $l2h_latex_closing; + close(L2H_LATEX); + } + print "# l2h: finished to latex ($l2h_cached_count cached, $reused reused, $l2h_latex_count contents)\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + unless ($l2h_latex_count) + { + l2h_Finish(); + return 0; + } + return 1; +} + +################################### +# Second stage: Use latex2html to generate corresponding html code and images +# +# l2h_ToHtml([$l2h_latex_file, [$l2h_html_dir]]): +# Call latex2html on $l2h_latex_file +# Put images (prefixed with $l2h_name."_") and html file(s) in $l2h_html_dir +# Return 1, on success +# 0, otherwise +# +sub l2h_ToHtml +{ + local($call, $ext, $root, $dotbug); + + if ($T2H_L2H_SKIP) + { + print "# l2h: skipping latex2html run\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + return 1; + } + + # Check for dot in directory where dvips will work + if ($T2H_L2H_TMP) + { + if ($T2H_L2H_TMP =~ /\./) + { + warn "$ERROR Warning l2h: l2h_tmp dir contains a dot. Use /tmp, instead\n"; + $dotbug = 1; + } + } + else + { + if (&getcwd =~ /\./) + { + warn "$ERROR Warning l2h: current dir contains a dot. Use /tmp as l2h_tmp dir \n"; + $dotbug = 1; + } + } + # fix it, if necessary and hope that it works + $T2H_L2H_TMP = "/tmp" if ($dotbug); + + $call = $T2H_L2H_L2H; + # use init file, if specified + $call = $call . " -init_file " . $init_file if ($init_file && -f $init_file); + # set output dir + $call .= ($docu_rdir ? " -dir $docu_rdir" : " -no_subdir"); + # use l2h_tmp, if specified + $call = $call . " -tmp $T2H_L2H_TMP" if ($T2H_L2H_TMP); + # options we want to be sure of + $call = $call ." -address 0 -info 0 -split 0 -no_navigation -no_auto_link"; + $call = $call ." -prefix ${l2h_prefix} $l2h_latex_file"; + + print "# l2h: executing '$call'\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + if (system($call)) + { + warn "l2h ***Error: '${call}' did not succeed\n"; + return 0; + } + else + { + print "# l2h: latex2html finished successfully\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + return 1; + } +} + +# this is directly pasted over from latex2html +sub getcwd { + local($_) = `pwd`; + + die "'pwd' failed (out of memory?)\n" + unless length; + chop; + $_; +} + + +########################## +# Third stage: Extract generated contents from latex2html run +# Initialize with: l2h_InitFromHtml +# open $l2h_html_file for reading +# reads in contents into array indexed by numbers +# return 1, on success -- 0, otherwise +# Extract Html code with: l2h_FromHtml($text) +# replaces in $text all previosuly inserted comments by generated html code +# returns (possibly changed) $text +# Finish with: l2h_FinishFromHtml +# closes $l2h_html_dir/$l2h_name.".$docu_ext" + +sub l2h_InitFromHtml +{ + local($h_line, $h_content, $count, %l2h_img); + + if (! open(L2H_HTML, "<${l2h_html_file}")) + { + print "$ERROR Error l2h: Can't open ${l2h_html_file} for reading\n"; + return 0; + } + print "# l2h: use ${l2h_html_file} as html file\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + + $l2h_html_count = 0; + + while ($h_line = ) + { + if ($h_line =~ /^/) + { + $count = $1; + $h_content = ""; + while ($h_line = ) + { + if ($h_line =~ /^/) + { + chomp $h_content; + chomp $h_content; + $l2h_html_count++; + $h_content = l2h_ToCache($count, $h_content); + $l2h_from_html[$count] = $h_content; + $h_content = ''; + last; + } + $h_content = $h_content.$h_line; + } + if ($hcontent) + { + print "$ERROR Warning l2h: l2h_end $l2h_name $count not found\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + close(L2H_HTML); + return 0; + } + } + } + print "# l2h: Got $l2h_html_count of $l2h_latex_count html contents\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + + close(L2H_HTML); + return 1; +} + +sub l2h_FromHtml +{ + local($text) = @_; + local($done, $to_do, $count); + + $to_do = $text; + + while ($to_do =~ /([^\000]*)([^\000]*)/) + { + $to_do = $1; + $count = $2; + $done = $3.$done; + + $done = "".$done + if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H); + + $done = &l2h_ExtractFromHtml($count) . $done; + + $done = "".$done + if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H); + } + return $to_do.$done; +} + + +sub l2h_ExtractFromHtml +{ + local($count) = @_; + + return $l2h_from_html[$count] if ($l2h_from_html[$count]); + + if ($count >= 0 && $count < $l2h_latex_count) + { + # now we are in trouble + local($l_l2h, $_); + + $l2h_extract_error++; + print "$ERROR l2h: can't extract content $count from html\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE); + # try simple (ordinary) substition (without l2h) + $l_l2h = $T2H_L2H; + $T2H_L2H = 0; + $_ = $l2h_to_latex{$count}; + $_ = &substitute_style($_); + &unprotect_texi; + $_ = "" . $_ + if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H); + $T2H_L2H = $l_l2h; + return $_; + } + else + { + # now we have been incorrectly called + $l2h_range_error++; + print "$ERROR l2h: Request of $count content which is out of valide range [0,$l2h_latex_count)\n"; + return "" + if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H); + return ""; + } +} + +sub l2h_FinishFromHtml +{ + if ($T2H_VERBOSE) + { + if ($l2h_extract_error + $l2h_range_error) + { + print "# l2h: finished from html ($l2h_extract_error extract and $l2h_range_error errors)\n"; + } + else + { + print "# l2h: finished from html (no errors)\n"; + } + } +} + +sub l2h_Finish +{ + l2h_StoreCache(); + if ($T2H_L2H_CLEAN) + { + print "# l2h: removing temporary files generated by l2h extension\n" + if $T2H_VERBOSE; + while (<"$docu_rdir$l2h_name"*>) + { + unlink $_; + } + } + print "# l2h: Finished\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + return 1; +} + +############################## +# stuff for l2h caching +# + +# I tried doing this with a dbm data base, but it did not store all +# keys/values. Hence, I did as latex2html does it +sub l2h_InitCache +{ + if (-r "$l2h_cache_file") + { + my $rdo = do "$l2h_cache_file"; + warn("$ERROR l2h Error: could not load $docu_rdir$l2h_cache_file: $@\n") + unless ($rdo); + } +} + +sub l2h_StoreCache +{ + return unless $l2h_latex_count; + + my ($key, $value); + open(FH, ">$l2h_cache_file") || return warn"$ERROR l2h Error: could not open $docu_rdir$l2h_cache_file for writing: $!\n"; + + + while (($key, $value) = each %l2h_cache) + { + # escape stuff + $key =~ s|/|\\/|g; + $key =~ s|\\\\/|\\/|g; + # weird, a \ at the end of the key results in an error + # maybe this also broke the dbm database stuff + $key =~ s|\\$|\\\\|; + $value =~ s/\|/\\\|/g; + $value =~ s/\\\\\|/\\\|/g; + $value =~ s|\\\\|\\\\\\\\|g; + print FH "\n\$l2h_cache_key = q/$key/;\n"; + print FH "\$l2h_cache{\$l2h_cache_key} = q|$value|;\n"; + } + print FH "1;"; + close(FH); +} + +# return cached html, if it exists for text, and if all pictures +# are there, as well +sub l2h_FromCache +{ + my $text = shift; + my $cached = $l2h_cache{$text}; + if ($cached) + { + while ($cached =~ m/SRC="(.*?)"/g) + { + unless (-e "$docu_rdir$1") + { + return undef; + } + } + return $cached; + } + return undef; +} + +# insert generated html into cache, move away images, +# return transformed html +$maximage = 1; +sub l2h_ToCache +{ + my $count = shift; + my $content = shift; + my @images = ($content =~ /SRC="(.*?)"/g); + my ($src, $dest); + + for $src (@images) + { + $dest = $l2h_img{$src}; + unless ($dest) + { + my $ext; + if ($src =~ /.*\.(.*)$/ && $1 ne $docu_ext) + { + $ext = $1; + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR: L2h image $src has invalid extension\n"; + next; + } + while (-e "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_$maximage.$ext") { $maximage++;} + $dest = "${docu_name}_$maximage.$ext"; + system("cp -f $docu_rdir$src $docu_rdir$dest"); + $l2h_img{$src} = $dest; + unlink "$docu_rdir$src" unless ($DEBUG & DEBUG_L2H); + } + $content =~ s/$src/$dest/g; + } + $l2h_cache{$l2h_to_latex[$count]} = $content; + return $content; +} + + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Pass 1: read source, handle command, variable, simple substitution # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +@lines = (); # whole document +@toc_lines = (); # table of contents +@stoc_lines = (); # table of contents +$curlevel = 0; # current level in TOC +$node = ''; # current node name +$node_next = ''; # current node next name +$node_prev = ''; # current node prev name +$node_up = ''; # current node up name +$in_table = 0; # am I inside a table +$table_type = ''; # type of table ('', 'f', 'v', 'multi') +@tables = (); # nested table support +$in_bibliography = 0; # am I inside a bibliography +$in_glossary = 0; # am I inside a glossary +$in_top = 0; # am I inside the top node +$has_top = 0; # did I see a top node? +$has_top_command = 0; # did I see @top for automatic pointers? +$in_pre = 0; # am I inside a preformatted section +$in_list = 0; # am I inside a list +$in_html = 0; # am I inside an HTML section +$first_line = 1; # is it the first line +$dont_html = 0; # don't protect HTML on this line +$deferred_ref = ''; # deferred reference for indexes +@html_stack = (); # HTML elements stack +$html_element = ''; # current HTML element +&html_reset; +%macros = (); # macros + +# init l2h +$T2H_L2H = &l2h_Init($docu_name) if ($T2H_L2H); +$T2H_L2H = &l2h_InitToLatex if ($T2H_L2H); + +# build code for simple substitutions +# the maps used (%simple_map and %things_map) MUST be aware of this +# watch out for regexps, / and escaped characters! +$subst_code = ''; +foreach (keys(%simple_map)) { + ($re = $_) =~ s/(\W)/\\$1/g; # protect regexp chars + $subst_code .= "s/\\\@$re/$simple_map{$_}/g;\n"; +} +foreach (keys(%things_map)) { + $subst_code .= "s/\\\@$_\\{\\}/$things_map{$_}/g;\n"; +} +if ($use_acc) { + # accentuated characters + foreach (keys(%accent_map)) { + if ($_ eq "`") { + $subst_code .= "s/$;3"; + } elsif ($_ eq "'") { + $subst_code .= "s/$;4"; + } else { + $subst_code .= "s/\\\@\\$_"; + } + $subst_code .= "([a-z])/&\${1}$accent_map{$_};/gi;\n"; + } +} +eval("sub simple_substitutions { $subst_code }"); + +&init_input; +INPUT_LINE: while ($_ = &next_line) { + # + # remove \input on the first lines only + # + if ($first_line) { + next if /^\\input/; + $first_line = 0; + } + # non-@ substitutions cf. texinfmt.el + # + # parse texinfo tags + # + $tag = ''; + $end_tag = ''; + if (/^\s*\@end\s+(\w+)\b/) { + $end_tag = $1; + } elsif (/^\s*\@(\w+)\b/) { + $tag = $1; + } + # + # handle @html / @end html + # + if ($in_html) { + if ($end_tag eq 'html') { + $in_html = 0; + } else { + $tag2pro{$in_html} .= $_; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'html') { + $in_html = $PROTECTTAG . ++$html_num; + push(@lines, $in_html); + next; + } + + # + # try to remove inlined comments + # syntax from tex-mode.el comment-start-skip + # + s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment | |\{|$).*/$1/; + +# Sometimes I use @c right at the end of a line ( to suppress the line feed ) +# s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment)?$/$1/; +# s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment)? .*/$1/; +# s/(.*)\@c{.*?}(.*)/$1$2/; +# s/(.*)\@comment{.*?}(.*)/$1$2/; +# s/^(.*)\@c /$1/; +# s/^(.*)\@comment /$1/; + + ############################################################# + # value substitution before macro expansion, so that + # it works in macro arguments + s/\@value{($VARRE)}/$value{$1}/eg; + + ############################################################# + # macro substitution + while (/\@(\w+)/g) + { + if (exists($macros->{$1})) + { + my $before = $`; + my $name = $1; + my $after = $'; + my @args; + my $args; + if ($after =~ /^\s*{(.*?[^\\])}(.*)/) + { + $args = $1; + $after = $2; + } + elsif (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} == 1) + { + $args = $after; + $args =~ s/^\s*//; + $args =~ s/\s*$//; + $after = ''; + } + $args =~ s|\\\\|\\|g; + $args =~ s|\\{|{|g; + $args =~ s|\\}|}|g; + if (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} > 1) + { + $args =~ s/(^|[^\\]),/$1$;/g ; + $args =~ s|\\,|,|g; + @args = split(/$;\s*/, $args) if (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} > 1); + } + else + { + $args =~ s|\\,|,|g; + @args = ($args); + } + my $macrobody = $macros->{$name}->{Body}; + for ($i=0; $i<=$#args; $i++) + { + $macrobody =~ s|\\$macros->{$name}->{Args}->[$i]\\|$args[$i]|g; + } + $macrobody =~ s|\\\\|\\|g; + $_ = $before . $macrobody . $after; + unshift @input_spool, map {$_ = $_."\n"} split(/\n/, $_); + next INPUT_LINE; + } + } # + + + # + # try to skip the line + # + if ($end_tag) { + $in_titlepage = 0 if $end_tag eq 'titlepage'; + next if $to_skip{"end $end_tag"}; + } elsif ($tag) { + $in_titlepage = 1 if $tag eq 'titlepage'; + next if $to_skip{$tag}; + last if $tag eq 'bye'; + } + if ($in_top) { + # parsing the top node + if ($tag eq 'node' || + ($sec2level{$tag} && $tag !~ /unnumbered/ && $tag !~ /heading/)) + { + # no more in top + $in_top = 0; + push(@lines, $TOPEND); + } + } + unless ($in_pre) { + s/``/\"/g; + s/''/\"/g; + s/([\w ])---([\w ])/$1--$2/g; + } + # + # analyze the tag + # + if ($tag) { + # skip lines + &skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'ignore'; + &skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'ifnothtml'; + if ($tag eq 'ifinfo') + { + &skip_until($tag), next unless $T2H_EXPAND eq 'info'; + } + if ($tag eq 'iftex') + { + &skip_until($tag), next unless $T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex'; + } + if ($tag eq 'tex') + { + # add to latex2html file + if ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex' && $T2H_L2H && ! $in_pre) + { + # add space to the end -- tex(i2dvi) does this, as well + push(@lines, &l2h_ToLatex(&string_until($tag) . " ")); + } + else + { + &skip_until($tag); + } + next; + } + if ($tag eq 'titlepage') + { + next; + } + # handle special tables + if ($tag =~ /^(|f|v|multi)table$/) { + $table_type = $1; + $tag = 'table'; + } + # special cases + if ($tag eq 'top' || ($tag eq 'node' && /^\@node\s+top\s*,/i)) { + $in_top = 1; + $has_top = 1; + $has_top_command = 1 if $tag eq 'top'; + @lines = (); # ignore all lines before top (title page garbage) + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'node') { + if ($in_top) + { + $in_top = 0; + push(@lines, $TOPEND); + } + warn "$ERROR Bad node line: $_" unless $_ =~ /^\@node\s$NODESRE$/o; + # request of "Richard Y. Kim" + s/^\@node\s+//; + $_ = &protect_html($_); # if node contains '&' for instance + ($node, $node_next, $node_prev, $node_up) = split(/,/); + &normalise_node($node); + &normalise_node($node_next); + &normalise_node($node_prev); + &normalise_node($node_up); + $node =~ /\"/ ? + push @lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__) : + push @lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__); + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'include') { + if (/^\@include\s+($FILERE)\s*$/o) { + $file = LocateIncludeFile($1); + if ($file && -e $file) { + &open($file); + print "# including $file\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + } else { + warn "$ERROR Can't find $1, skipping"; + } + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad include line: $_"; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'ifclear') { + if (/^\@ifclear\s+($VARRE)\s*$/o) { + next unless defined($value{$1}); + &skip_until($tag); + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad ifclear line: $_"; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'ifset') { + if (/^\@ifset\s+($VARRE)\s*$/o) { + next if defined($value{$1}); + &skip_until($tag); + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad ifset line: $_"; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'menu') { + unless ($T2H_SHOW_MENU) { + &skip_until($tag); + next; + } + &html_push_if($tag); + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + } elsif ($format_map{$tag}) { + $in_pre = 1 if $format_map{$tag} eq 'PRE'; + &html_push_if($format_map{$tag}); + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + $in_list++ if $format_map{$tag} eq 'UL' || $format_map{$tag} eq 'OL' ; +# push(@lines, &debug("
\n", __LINE__)) +# if $tag =~ /example/i; + # sunshine@sunshineco.com:
bla
looks better than + #
\nbla
(at least on NeXTstep browser + push(@lines, &debug("<$format_map{$tag}>" . + ($in_pre ? '' : "\n"), __LINE__)); + next; + } + elsif (exists $complex_format_map->{$tag}) + { + my $start = eval $complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0]; + if ($@) + { + print "$ERROR: eval of complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0] $complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0]: $@"; + $start = '
'








    +	  }








    +	  $in_pre = 1 if $start =~ /
\n", __LINE__));








    +		    &html_push_if('TABLE');








    +		} else {








    +		    push(@lines, &debug("
\n", __LINE__)); + &html_push_if('DL'); + } + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad table line: $_"; + } + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'synindex' || $tag eq 'syncodeindex') + { + if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w+)\s+(\w+)\s*$/) + { + my $from = $1; + my $to = $2; + my $prefix_from = IndexName2Prefix($from); + my $prefix_to = IndexName2Prefix($to); + + warn("$ERROR unknown from index name $from ind syn*index line: $_"), next + unless $prefix_from; + warn("$ERROR unknown to index name $to ind syn*index line: $_"), next + unless $prefix_to; + + if ($tag eq 'syncodeindex') + { + $index_properties->{$prefix_to}->{'from_code'}->{$prefix_from} = 1; + } + else + { + $index_properties->{$prefix_to}->{'from'}->{$prefix_from} = 1; + } + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR Bad syn*index line: $_"; + } + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'defindex' || $tag eq 'defcodeindex') + { + if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w+)\s*$/) + { + my $name = $1; + $index_properties->{$name}->{name} = $name; + $index_properties->{$name}->{code} = 1 if $tag eq 'defcodeindex'; + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR Bad defindex line: $_"; + } + next; + } + elsif (/^\@printindex/) + { + push (@lines, "$_"); + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'sp') { + push(@lines, &debug("

\n", __LINE__)); + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'center') { + push(@lines, &debug("

\n", __LINE__)); + s/\@center//; + } elsif ($tag eq 'setref') { + &protect_html; # if setref contains '&' for instance + if (/^\@$tag\s*{($NODERE)}\s*$/) { + $setref = $1; + $setref =~ s/\s+/ /g; # normalize + $setref =~ s/ $//; + $node2sec{$setref} = $name; + $sec2node{$name} = $setref; + $node2href{$setref} = "$docu_doc#$docid"; + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad setref line: $_"; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'lowersections') { + local ($sec, $level); + while (($sec, $level) = each %sec2level) { + $sec2level{$sec} = $level + 1; + } + next; + } elsif ($tag eq 'raisesections') { + local ($sec, $level); + while (($sec, $level) = each %sec2level) { + $sec2level{$sec} = $level - 1; + } + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'macro' || $tag eq 'rmacro') + { + if (/^\@$tag\s*(\w+)\s*(.*)/) + { + my $name = $1; + my @args; + @args = split(/\s*,\s*/ , $1) + if ($2 =~ /^\s*{(.*)}\s*/); + + $macros->{$name}->{Args} = \@args; + $macros->{$name}->{Body} = ''; + while (($_ = &next_line) && $_ !~ /\@end $tag/) + { + $macros->{$name}->{Body} .= $_; + } + die "ERROR: No closing '\@end $tag' found for macro definition of '$name'\n" + unless (/\@end $tag/); + chomp $macros->{$name}->{Body}; + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR: Bad macro defintion $_" + } + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'unmacro') + { + delete $macros->{$1} if (/^\@unmacro\s*(\w+)/); + next; + } + elsif ($tag eq 'documentlanguage') + { + SetDocumentLanguage($1) if (!$T2H_LANG && /documentlanguage\s*(\w+)/); + } + elsif (defined($def_map{$tag})) { + if ($def_map{$tag}) { + s/^\@$tag\s+//; + $tag = $def_map{$tag}; + $_ = "\@$tag $_"; + $tag =~ s/\s.*//; + } + } elsif (defined($user_sub{$tag})) { + s/^\@$tag\s+//; + $sub = $user_sub{$tag}; + print "# user $tag = $sub, arg: $_" if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_USER; + if (defined(&$sub)) { + chop($_); + &$sub($_); + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad user sub for $tag: $sub\n"; + } + next; + } + if (defined($def_map{$tag})) { + s/^\@$tag\s+//; + if ($tag =~ /x$/) { + # extra definition line + $tag = $`; + $is_extra = 1; + } else { + $is_extra = 0; + } + while (/\{([^\{\}]*)\}/) { + # this is a {} construct + ($before, $contents, $after) = ($`, $1, $'); + # protect spaces + $contents =~ s/\s+/$;9/g; + # restore $_ protecting {} + $_ = "$before$;7$contents$;8$after"; + } + @args = split(/\s+/, &protect_html($_)); + foreach (@args) { + s/$;9/ /g; # unprotect spaces + s/$;7/\{/g; # ... { + s/$;8/\}/g; # ... } + } + $type = shift(@args); + $type =~ s/^\{(.*)\}$/$1/; + print "# def ($tag): {$type} ", join(', ', @args), "\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_DEF; + $type .= ':'; # it's nicer like this + my $name = shift(@args); + $name =~ s/^\{(.*)\}$/$1/; + if ($is_extra) { + $_ = &debug("
", __LINE__); + } else { + $_ = &debug("
\n
", __LINE__); + } + if ($tag eq 'deffn' || $tag eq 'defvr' || $tag eq 'deftp') { + $_ .= "$type $name"; + $_ .= " @args" if @args; + } elsif ($tag eq 'deftypefn' || $tag eq 'deftypevr' + || $tag eq 'defcv' || $tag eq 'defop') { + $ftype = $name; + $name = shift(@args); + $name =~ s/^\{(.*)\}$/$1/; + $_ .= "$type $ftype $name"; + $_ .= " @args" if @args; + } else { + warn "$ERROR Unknown definition type: $tag\n"; + $_ .= "$type $name"; + $_ .= " @args" if @args; + } + $_ .= &debug("\n
", __LINE__); + $name = &unprotect_html($name); + if ($tag eq 'deffn' || $tag eq 'deftypefn') { + EnterIndexEntry('f', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); +# unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name\n"); + } elsif ($tag eq 'defop') { + EnterIndexEntry('f', "$name on $ftype", $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); +# unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name on $ftype\n"); + } elsif ($tag eq 'defvr' || $tag eq 'deftypevr' || $tag eq 'defcv') { + EnterIndexEntry('v', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); +# unshift(@input_spool, "\@vindex $name\n"); + } else { + EnterIndexEntry('t', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); +# unshift(@input_spool, "\@tindex $name\n"); + } + $dont_html = 1; + } + } elsif ($end_tag) { + if ($format_map{$end_tag}) { + $in_pre = 0 if $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'PRE'; + $in_list-- if $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'UL' || $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'OL' ; + &html_pop_if('P'); + &html_pop_if('LI'); + &html_pop_if(); + push(@lines, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + } + elsif (exists $complex_format_map->{$end_tag}) + { + my $end = eval $complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[1]; + if ($@) + { + print "$ERROR: eval of complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[1] $complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[0]: $@"; + $end = '
' + } + $in_pre = 0 if $end =~ m|
|; + push(@lines, html_debug($end, __LINE__)); + } elsif ($end_tag =~ /^(|f|v|multi)table$/) { + unless (@tables) { + warn "$ERROR \@end $end_tag without \@*table\n"; + next; + } + &html_pop_if('P'); + ($table_type, $in_table) = split($;, shift(@tables)); + unless ($1 eq $table_type) { + warn "$ERROR \@end $end_tag without matching \@$end_tag\n"; + next; + } + if ($table_type eq "multi") { + push(@lines, "
\n"); + &html_pop_if('TR'); + } else { + push(@lines, "\n"); + &html_pop_if('DD'); + } + &html_pop_if(); + if (@tables) { + ($table_type, $in_table) = split($;, $tables[0]); + } else { + $in_table = 0; + } + } elsif (defined($def_map{$end_tag})) { + push(@lines, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + } elsif ($end_tag eq 'menu') { + &html_pop_if(); + push(@lines, $_); # must keep it for pass 2 + } + next; + } + ############################################################# + # anchor insertion + while (/\@anchor\s*\{(.*?)\}/) + { + $_ = $`.$'; + my $anchor = $1; + $anchor = &normalise_node($anchor); + push @lines, &html_debug("\n"); + $node2href{$anchor} = "$docu_doc#$anchor"; + next INPUT_LINE if $_ =~ /^\s*$/; + } + + ############################################################# + # index entry generation, after value substitutions + if (/^\@(\w+?)index\s+/) + { + EnterIndexEntry($1, $', $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); + next; + } + # + # protect texi and HTML things + &protect_texi; + $_ = &protect_html($_) unless $dont_html; + $dont_html = 0; + # substitution (unsupported things) + s/^\@exdent\s+//g; + s/\@noindent\s+//g; + s/\@refill\s+//g; + # other substitutions + &simple_substitutions; + s/\@footnote\{/\@footnote$docu_doc\{/g; # mark footnotes, cf. pass 4 + # + # analyze the tag again + # + if ($tag) { + if (defined($sec2level{$tag}) && $sec2level{$tag} > 0) { + if (/^\@$tag\s+(.+)$/) { + $name = $1; + $name = &normalise_node($name); + $level = $sec2level{$tag}; + # check for index + $first_index_chapter = $name + if ($level == 1 && !$first_index_chapter && + $name =~ /index/i); + if ($in_top && /heading/){ + $T2H_HAS_TOP_HEADING = 1; + $_ = &debug("$name\n", __LINE__); + &html_push_if('body'); + print "# top heading, section $name, level $level\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_TOC; + } + else + { + unless (/^\@\w*heading/) + { + unless (/^\@unnumbered/) + { + my $number = &update_sec_num($tag, $level); + $name = $number. ' ' . $name if $T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS; + $sec2number{$name} = $number; + $number2sec{$number} = $name; + } + if (defined($toplevel)) + { + push @lines, ($level==$toplevel ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND); + } + else + { + # first time we see a "section" + unless ($level == 1) + { + warn "$WARN The first section found is not of level 1: $_"; + } + $toplevel = $level; + } + push(@sections, $name); + next_doc() if ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' || + $T2H_SPLIT && $level == $toplevel); + } + $sec_num++; + $docid = "SEC$sec_num"; + $tocid = (/^\@\w*heading/ ? undef : "TOC$sec_num"); + # check biblio and glossary + $in_bibliography = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*bibliography$/i); + $in_glossary = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*glossary$/i); + # check node + if ($node) + { + warn "$ERROR Duplicate node found: $node\n" + if ($node2sec{$node}); + } + else + { + $name .= ' ' while ($node2sec{$name}); + $node = $name; + } + $name .= ' ' while ($sec2node{$name}); + $section = $name; + $node2sec{$node} = $name; + $sec2node{$name} = $node; + $node2href{$node} = "$docu_doc#$docid"; + $node2next{$node} = $node_next; + $node2prev{$node} = $node_prev; + $node2up{$node} = $node_up; + print "# node $node, section $name, level $level\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_TOC; + + $node = ''; + $node_next = ''; + $node_prev = ''; + $node_next = ''; + if ($tocid) + { + # update TOC + while ($level > $curlevel) { + $curlevel++; + push(@toc_lines, "
    \n"); + } + while ($level < $curlevel) { + $curlevel--; + push(@toc_lines, "
\n"); + } + $_ = &t2h_anchor($tocid, "$docu_doc#$docid", $name, 1); + $_ = &substitute_style($_); + push(@stoc_lines, "$_
\n") if ($level == 1); + if ($T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS) + { + push(@toc_lines, $_ . "
\n") + } + else + { + push(@toc_lines, "
  • " . $_ ."
  • "); + } + } + else + { + push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", + __LINE__)); + } + # update DOC + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + &html_reset; + $_ = " $name \n\n"; + $_ = &debug($_, __LINE__); + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + } + # update DOC + foreach $line (split(/\n+/, $_)) { + push(@lines, "$line\n"); + } + next; + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad section line: $_"; + } + } else { + # track variables + $value{$1} = Unprotect_texi($2), next if /^\@set\s+($VARRE)\s+(.*)$/o; + delete $value{$1}, next if /^\@clear\s+($VARRE)\s*$/o; + # store things + $value{'_shorttitle'} = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@shorttitle\s+(.*)$/; + $value{'_setfilename'} = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@setfilename\s+(.*)$/; + $value{'_settitle'} = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@settitle\s+(.*)$/; + $value{'_author'} .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@author\s+(.*)$/; + $value{'_subtitle'} .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@subtitle\s+(.*)$/; + $value{'_title'} .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@title\s+(.*)$/; + + # list item + if (/^\s*\@itemx?\s+/) { + $what = $'; + $what =~ s/\s+$//; + if ($in_bibliography && $use_bibliography) { + if ($what =~ /^$BIBRE$/o) { + $id = 'BIB' . ++$bib_num; + $bib2href{$what} = "$docu_doc#$id"; + print "# found bibliography for '$what' id $id\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_BIB; + $what = &t2h_anchor($id, '', $what); + } + } elsif ($in_glossary && $T2H_USE_GLOSSARY) { + $id = 'GLOSS' . ++$gloss_num; + $entry = $what; + $entry =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/ unless $entry =~ /^[A-Z\s]+$/; + $gloss2href{$entry} = "$docu_doc#$id"; + print "# found glossary for '$entry' id $id\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_GLOSS; + $what = &t2h_anchor($id, '', $what); + } + elsif ($in_table && ($table_type eq 'f' || $table_type eq 'v')) + { + EnterIndexEntry($table_type, $what, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines); + } + &html_pop_if('P'); + if ($html_element eq 'DL' || $html_element eq 'DD') { + if ($things_map{$in_table} && !$what) { + # special case to allow @table @bullet for instance + push(@lines, &debug("
    $things_map{$in_table}\n", __LINE__)); + } else { + push(@lines, &debug("
    \@$in_table\{$what\}\n", __LINE__)); + } + push(@lines, "
    "); + &html_push('DD') unless $html_element eq 'DD'; + if ($table_type) { # add also an index + unshift(@input_spool, "\@${table_type}index $what\n"); + } + } elsif ($html_element eq 'TABLE') { + push(@lines, &debug("$what\n", __LINE__)); + &html_push('TR'); + } elsif ($html_element eq 'TR') { + push(@lines, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + push(@lines, &debug("$what\n", __LINE__)); + } else { + push(@lines, &debug("
  • $what\n", __LINE__)); + &html_push('LI') unless $html_element eq 'LI'; + } + push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__)); + if ($deferred_ref) { + push(@lines, &debug("$deferred_ref\n", __LINE__)); + $deferred_ref = ''; + } + next; + } elsif (/^\@tab\s+(.*)$/) { + push(@lines, "$1\n"); + next; + } + } + } + # paragraph separator + if ($_ eq "\n" && ! $in_pre) { + next if $#lines >= 0 && $lines[$#lines] eq "\n"; + if ($html_element eq 'P') { + push (@lines, &debug("

    \n", __LINE__)); + } +# else +# { +# push(@lines, "

    \n"); +# $_ = &debug("

    \n", __LINE__); +# } + elsif ($html_element eq 'body' || $html_element eq 'BLOCKQUOTE' || $html_element eq 'DD' || $html_element eq 'LI') + { + &html_push('P'); + push(@lines, &debug("

    \n", __LINE__)); + } + } + # otherwise + push(@lines, $_) unless $in_titlepage; + push(@lines, &debug("

  • \n", __LINE__)) if ($tag eq 'center'); +} + +# finish TOC +$level = 0; +while ($level < $curlevel) { + $curlevel--; + push(@toc_lines, "\n"); +} + +print "# end of pass 1\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +SetDocumentLanguage('en') unless ($T2H_LANG); +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Stuff related to Index generation # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +sub EnterIndexEntry +{ + my $prefix = shift; + my $key = shift; + my $docu_doc = shift; + my $section = shift; + my $lines = shift; + local $_; + + warn "$ERROR Undefined index command: $_", next + unless (exists ($index_properties->{$prefix})); + $key =~ s/\s+$//; + $_ = $key; + &protect_texi; + $key = $_; + $_ = &protect_html($_); + my $html_key = substitute_style($_); + my $id; + $key = remove_style($key); + $key = remove_things($key); + $_ = $key; + &unprotect_texi; + $key = $_; + while (exists $index->{$prefix}->{$key}) {$key .= ' '}; + if ($lines->[$#lines] =~ /^$/) + { + $id = $1; + } + else + { + $id = 'IDX' . ++$idx_num; + push(@$lines, &t2h_anchor($id, '', $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK, !$in_pre)); + } + $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{html_key} = $html_key; + $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{section} = $section; + $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{href} = "$docu_doc#$id"; + print "# found ${prefix}index for '$key' with id $id\n" + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_INDEX; +} + +sub IndexName2Prefix +{ + my $name = shift; + my $prefix; + + for $prefix (keys %$index_properties) + { + return $prefix if ($index_properties->{$prefix}->{name} eq $name); + } + return undef; +} + +sub GetIndexEntries +{ + my $normal = shift; + my $code = shift; + my ($entries, $prefix, $key) = ({}); + + for $prefix (keys %$normal) + { + for $key (keys %{$index->{$prefix}}) + { + $entries->{$key} = {%{$index->{$prefix}->{$key}}}; + } + } + + if (defined($code)) + { + for $prefix (keys %$code) + { + unless (exists $normal->{$keys}) + { + for $key (keys %{$index->{$prefix}}) + { + $entries->{$key} = {%{$index->{$prefix}->{$key}}}; + $entries->{$key}->{html_key} = "$entries->{$key}->{html_key}"; + } + } + } + } + return $entries; +} + +sub byAlpha +{ + if ($a =~ /^[A-Za-z]/) + { + if ($b =~ /^[A-Za-z]/) + { + return lc($a) cmp lc($b); + } + else + { + return 1; + } + } + elsif ($b =~ /^[A-Za-z]/) + { + return -1; + } + else + { + return lc($a) cmp lc($b); + } +} + +sub GetIndexPages +{ + my $entries = shift; + my (@Letters, $key); + my ($EntriesByLetter, $Pages, $page) = ({}, [], {}); + my @keys = sort byAlpha keys %$entries; + + for $key (@keys) + { + push @{$EntriesByLetter->{uc(substr($key,0, 1))}} , $entries->{$key}; + } + @Letters = sort byAlpha keys %$EntriesByLetter; + + $T2H_SPLIT_INDEX = 0 unless ($T2H_SPLIT); + + unless ($T2H_SPLIT_INDEX) + { + $page->{First} = $Letters[0]; + $page->{Last} = $Letters[$#Letters]; + $page->{Letters} = \@Letters; + $page->{EntriesByLetter} = $EntriesByLetter; + push @$Pages, $page; + return $Pages; + } + + if ($T2H_SPLIT_INDEX =~ /^\d+$/) + { + my $i = 0; + my ($prev_letter, $letter); + $page->{First} = $Letters[0]; + for $letter (@Letters) + { + if ($i > $T2H_SPLIT_INDEX) + { + $page->{Last} = $prev_letter; + push @$Pages, {%$page}; + $page->{Letters} = []; + $page->{EntriesByLetter} = {}; + $page->{First} = $letter; + $i=0; + } + push @{$page->{Letters}}, $letter; + $page->{EntriesByLetter}->{$letter} = [@{$EntriesByLetter->{$letter}}]; + $i += scalar(@{$EntriesByLetter->{$letter}}); + $prev_letter = $letter; + } + $page->{Last} = $Letters[$#Letters]; + push @$Pages, {%$page}; + } + return $Pages; +} + +sub GetIndexSummary +{ + my $first_page = shift; + my $Pages = shift; + my $name = shift; + my ($page, $letter, $summary, $i, $l1, $l2, $l); + + $i = 0; + $summary = '
    Jump to:   '; + + for $page ($first_page, @$Pages) + { + for $letter (@{$page->{Letters}}) + { + $l = t2h_anchor('', "$page->{href}#${name}_$letter", "$letter", + 0, 'style="text-decoration:none"') . "\n   \n"; + + if ($letter =~ /^[A-Za-z]/) + { + $l2 .= $l; + } + else + { + $l1 .= $l; + } + } + } + $summary .= $l1 . "
    \n" if ($l1); + $summary .= $l2 . '

    '; + return $summary; +} + +sub PrintIndexPage +{ + my $lines = shift; + my $summary = shift; + my $page = shift; + my $name = shift; + + push @$lines, $summary; + + push @$lines , <

    + + + +EOT + + for $letter (@{$page->{Letters}}) + { + push @$lines, "\n"; + for $entry (@{$page->{EntriesByLetter}->{$letter}}) + { + push @$lines, + "\n"; + } + push @$lines, "\n"; + } + push @$lines, "
    Index Entry Section

    $letter
    " . + t2h_anchor('', $entry->{href}, $entry->{html_key}) . + "" . + t2h_anchor('', sec_href($entry->{section}), clean_name($entry->{section})) . + "

    "; + push @$lines, $summary; +} + +sub PrintIndex +{ + my $lines = shift; + my $name = shift; + my $section = shift; + $section = 'Top' unless $section; + my $prefix = IndexName2Prefix($name); + + warn ("$ERROR printindex: bad index name: $name"), return + unless $prefix; + + if ($index_properties->{$prefix}->{code}) + { + $index_properties->{$prefix}->{from_code}->{$prefix} = 1; + } + else + { + $index_properties->{$prefix}->{from}->{$prefix}= 1; + } + + my $Entries = GetIndexEntries($index_properties->{$prefix}->{from}, + $index_properties->{$prefix}->{from_code}); + return unless %$Entries; + + if ($T2H_IDX_SUMMARY) + { + my $key; + open(FHIDX, ">$docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx") + || die "Can't open > $docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx for writing: $!\n"; + print "# writing $name index summary in $docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + + for $key (sort keys %$Entries) + { + print FHIDX "$key\t$Entries->{$key}->{href}\n"; + } + } + + my $Pages = GetIndexPages($Entries); + my $page; + my $first_page = shift @$Pages; + my $sec_name = $section; + # remove section number + $sec_name =~ s/.*? // if $sec_name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)\./; + + ($first_page->{href} = sec_href($section)) =~ s/\#.*$//; + # Update tree structure of document + if (@$Pages) + { + my $sec; + my @after; + + while (@sections && $sections[$#sections] ne $section) + { + unshift @after, pop @sections; + } + + for $page (@$Pages) + { + my $node = ($page->{First} ne $page->{Last} ? + "$sec_name: $page->{First} -- $page->{Last}" : + "$sec_name: $page->{First}"); + push @sections, $node; + $node2sec{$node} = $node; + $sec2node{$node} = $node; + $node2up{$node} = $section; + $page->{href} = next_doc(); + $page->{name} = $node; + $node2href{$node} = $page->{href}; + if ($prev_node) + { + $node2next{$prev_node} = $node; + $node2prev{$node} = $prev_node; + } + $prev_node = $node; + } + push @sections, @after; + } + + my $summary = GetIndexSummary($first_page, $Pages, $name); + PrintIndexPage($lines, $summary, $first_page, $name); + for $page (@$Pages) + { + push @$lines, ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter' ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND); + push @$lines, "

    $page->{name}

    \n"; + PrintIndexPage($lines, $summary, $page, $name); + } +} + + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Pass 2/3: handle style, menu, index, cross-reference # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +@lines2 = (); # whole document (2nd pass) +@lines3 = (); # whole document (3rd pass) +$in_menu = 0; # am I inside a menu + +while (@lines) { + $_ = shift(@lines); + # + # special case (protected sections) + # + if (/^$PROTECTTAG/o) { + push(@lines2, $_); + next; + } + # + # menu + # + if (/^\@menu\b/) + { + $in_menu = 1; + $in_menu_listing = 1; + push(@lines2, &debug("
    \n", __LINE__)); + next; + } + if (/^\@end\s+menu\b/) + { + if ($in_menu_listing) + { + push(@lines2, &debug("
    \n", __LINE__)); + } + else + { + push(@lines2, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + } + $in_menu = 0; + $in_menu_listing = 0; + next; + } + if ($in_menu) + { + my ($node, $name, $descr); + if (/^\*\s+($NODERE)::/o) + { + $node = $1; + $descr = $'; + } + elsif (/^\*\s+(.+):\s+([^\t,\.\n]+)[\t,\.\n]/) + { + $name = $1; + $node = $2; + $descr = $'; + } + elsif (/^\*/) + { + warn "$ERROR Bad menu line: $_"; + } + else + { + if ($in_menu_listing) + { + $in_menu_listing = 0; + push(@lines2, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + } + # should be like verbatim -- preseve spaces, etc + s/ /\ /g; + $_ .= "
    \n"; + push(@lines2, $_); + } + if ($node) + { + if (! $in_menu_listing) + { + $in_menu_listing = 1; + push(@lines2, &debug("\n", __LINE__)); + } + # look for continuation + while ($lines[0] =~ /^\s+\w+/) + { + $descr .= shift(@lines); + } + &menu_entry($node, $name, $descr); + } + next; + } + # + # printindex + # + PrintIndex(\@lines2, $2, $1), next + if (/^\@printindex\s+(\w+)/); + # + # simple style substitutions + # + $_ = &substitute_style($_); + # + # xref + # + while (/\@(x|px|info|)ref{([^{}]+)(}?)/) { + # note: Texinfo may accept other characters + ($type, $nodes, $full) = ($1, $2, $3); + ($before, $after) = ($`, $'); + if (! $full && $after) { + warn "$ERROR Bad xref (no ending } on line): $_"; + $_ = "$before$;0${type}ref\{$nodes$after"; + next; # while xref + } + if ($type eq 'x') { + $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'See'} "; + } elsif ($type eq 'px') { + $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'see'} "; + } elsif ($type eq 'info') { + $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'See'} Info"; + } else { + $type = ''; + } + unless ($full) { + $next = shift(@lines); + $next = &substitute_style($next); + chop($nodes); # remove final newline + if ($next =~ /\}/) { # split on 2 lines + $nodes .= " $`"; + $after = $'; + } else { + $nodes .= " $next"; + $next = shift(@lines); + $next = &substitute_style($next); + chop($nodes); + if ($next =~ /\}/) { # split on 3 lines + $nodes .= " $`"; + $after = $'; + } else { + warn "$ERROR Bad xref (no ending }): $_"; + $_ = "$before$;0xref\{$nodes$after"; + unshift(@lines, $next); + next; # while xref + } + } + } + $nodes =~ s/\s+/ /g; # remove useless spaces + @args = split(/\s*,\s*/, $nodes); + $node = $args[0]; # the node is always the first arg + $node = &normalise_node($node); + $sec = $args[2] || $args[1] || $node2sec{$node}; + $href = $node2href{$node}; + if (@args == 5) { # reference to another manual + $sec = $args[2] || $node; + $man = $args[4] || $args[3]; + $_ = "${before}${type}$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'section'} `$sec' in \@cite{$man}$after"; + } elsif ($type =~ /Info/) { # inforef + warn "$ERROR Wrong number of arguments: $_" unless @args == 3; + ($nn, $_, $in) = @args; + $_ = "${before}${type} file `$in', node `$nn'$after"; + } elsif ($sec && $href && ! $T2H_SHORT_REF) { + $_ = "${before}${type}"; + $_ .= "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'section'} " if ${type}; + $_ .= &t2h_anchor('', $href, $sec) . $after; + } + elsif ($href) + { + $_ = "${before}${type} " . + &t2h_anchor('', $href, $args[2] || $args[1] || $node) . + $after; + } + else { + warn "$ERROR Undefined node ($node): $_"; + $_ = "$before$;0xref{$nodes}$after"; + } + } + + # replace images + s[\@image\s*{(.+?)}] + { + my @args = split (/\s*,\s*/, $1); + my $base = $args[0]; + my $image = + LocateIncludeFile("$base.png") || + LocateIncludeFile("$base.jpg") || + LocateIncludeFile("$base.gif"); + warn "$ERROR no image file for $base: $_" unless ($image && -e $image); + "\"$base\""; + ($T2H_CENTER_IMAGE ? + "
    \"$base\"
    " : + "\"$base\""); + }eg; + + # + # try to guess bibliography references or glossary terms + # + unless (/^/) { + $done .= $pre . &t2h_anchor('', $href, $what); + } else { + $done .= "$pre$what"; + } + $_ = $post; + } + $_ = $done . $_; + } + if ($T2H_USE_GLOSSARY) { + $done = ''; + while (/\b\w+\b/) { + ($pre, $what, $post) = ($`, $&, $'); + $entry = $what; + $entry =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/ unless $entry =~ /^[A-Z\s]+$/; + $href = $gloss2href{$entry}; + if (defined($href) && $post !~ /^[^<]*<\/A>/) { + $done .= $pre . &t2h_anchor('', $href, $what); + } else { + $done .= "$pre$what"; + } + $_ = $post; + } + $_ = $done . $_; + } + } + # otherwise + push(@lines2, $_); +} +print "# end of pass 2\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +# +# split style substitutions +# +while (@lines2) { + $_ = shift(@lines2); + # + # special case (protected sections) + # + if (/^$PROTECTTAG/o) { + push(@lines3, $_); + next; + } + # + # split style substitutions + # + $old = ''; + while ($old ne $_) { + $old = $_; + if (/\@(\w+)\{/) { + ($before, $style, $after) = ($`, $1, $'); + if (defined($style_map{$style})) { + $_ = $after; + $text = ''; + $after = ''; + $failed = 1; + while (@lines2) { + if (/\}/) { + $text .= $`; + $after = $'; + $failed = 0; + last; + } else { + $text .= $_; + $_ = shift(@lines2); + } + } + if ($failed) { + die "* Bad syntax (\@$style) after: $before\n"; + } else { + $text = &apply_style($style, $text); + $_ = "$before$text$after"; + } + } + } + } + # otherwise + push(@lines3, $_); +} +print "# end of pass 3\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Pass 4: foot notes, final cleanup # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +@foot_lines = (); # footnotes +@doc_lines = (); # final document +$end_of_para = 0; # true if last line is

    + +while (@lines3) { + $_ = shift(@lines3); + # + # special case (protected sections) + # + if (/^$PROTECTTAG/o) { + push(@doc_lines, $_); + $end_of_para = 0; + next; + } + # + # footnotes + # + while (/\@footnote([^\{\s]+)\{/) { + ($before, $d, $after) = ($`, $1, $'); + $_ = $after; + $text = ''; + $after = ''; + $failed = 1; + while (@lines3) { + if (/\}/) { + $text .= $`; + $after = $'; + $failed = 0; + last; + } else { + $text .= $_; + $_ = shift(@lines3); + } + } + if ($failed) { + die "* Bad syntax (\@footnote) after: $before\n"; + } else { + $foot_num++; + $docid = "DOCF$foot_num"; + $footid = "FOOT$foot_num"; + $foot = "($foot_num)"; + push(@foot_lines, "

    " . &t2h_anchor($footid, "$d#$docid", $foot) . "

    \n"); + $text = "

    $text" unless $text =~ /^\s*

    /; + push(@foot_lines, "$text\n"); + $_ = $before . &t2h_anchor($docid, "$docu_foot#$footid", $foot) . $after; + } + } + # + # remove unnecessary

    + # + if (/^\s*

    \s*$/) { + next if $end_of_para++; + } else { + $end_of_para = 0; + } + # otherwise + push(@doc_lines, $_); +} + +print "# end of pass 4\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Pass 5: print things # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +$T2H_L2H = &l2h_FinishToLatex if ($T2H_L2H); +$T2H_L2H = &l2h_ToHtml if ($T2H_L2H); +$T2H_L2H = &l2h_InitFromHtml if ($T2H_L2H); + +# fix node2up, node2prev, node2next, if desired +if ($has_top_command) +{ + for $section (keys %sec2number) + { + $node = $sec2node{$section}; + $node2up{$node} = Sec2UpNode($section) unless $node2up{$node}; + $node2prev{$node} = Sec2PrevNode($section) unless $node2prev{$node}; + $node2next{$node} = Sec2NextNode($section) unless $node2next{$node}; + } +} + +# prepare %T2H_THISDOC +$T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle} = $value{'_title'} || $value{'_settitle'} || "Untitled Document"; +$T2H_THISDOC{title} = $value{'_settitle'} || $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle}; +$T2H_THISDOC{author} = $value{'_author'}; +$T2H_THISDOC{subtitle} = $value{'_subtitle'}; +$T2H_THISDOC{shorttitle} = $value{'_shorttitle'}; +for $key (keys %T2H_THISDOC) +{ + $_ = &substitute_style($T2H_THISDOC{$key}); + &unprotect_texi; + s/\s*$//; + $T2H_THISDOC{$key} = $_; +} + +# if no sections, then simply print document as is +unless (@sections) +{ + print "# Writing content into $docu_top_file \n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + open(FILE, "> $docu_top_file") + || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_top_file for writing: $!\n"; + + &$T2H_print_page_head(\*FILE); + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@doc_lines; + t2h_print_lines(\*FILE); + &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(\*FILE); + &$T2H_print_page_foot(\*FILE); + close(FILE); + goto Finish; +} + +# initialize $T2H_HREF, $T2H_NAME +%T2H_HREF = + ( + 'First' , sec_href($sections[0]), + 'Last', sec_href($sections[$#sections]), + 'About', $docu_about. '#SEC_About', + ); + +# prepare TOC, OVERVIEW, TOP +$T2H_TOC = \@toc_lines; +$T2H_OVERVIEW = \@stoc_lines; +if ($has_top) +{ + while (1) + { + $_ = shift @doc_lines; + last if /$TOPEND/; + push @$T2H_TOP, $_; + } + $T2H_HREF{'Top'} = $docu_top . '#SEC_Top'; +} +else +{ + $T2H_HREF{'Top'} = $T2H_HREF{First}; +} + +$node2href{Top} = $T2H_HREF{Top}; +$T2H_HREF{Contents} = $docu_toc.'#SEC_Contents' if @toc_lines; +$T2H_HREF{Overview} = $docu_stoc.'#SEC_OVERVIEW' if @stoc_lines; + +# settle on index +if ($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER) +{ + $T2H_HREF{Index} = $node2href{normalise_node($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER)}; + warn "$ERROR T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER '$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER' not found\n" + unless $T2H_HREF{Index}; +} +if (! $T2H_HREF{Index} && $first_index_chapter) +{ + $T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER = $first_index_chapter; + $T2H_HREF{Index} = $node2href{$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER}; +} + +print "# Using '" . clean_name($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER) . "' as index page\n" + if ($T2H_VERBOSE && $T2H_HREF{Index}); + +%T2H_NAME = + ( + 'First', clean_name($sec2node{$sections[0]}), + 'Last', clean_name($sec2node{$sections[$#sections]}), + 'About', $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'About_Title'}, + 'Contents', $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'ToC_Title'}, + 'Overview', $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'Overview_Title'}, + 'Index' , clean_name($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER), + 'Top', clean_name($T2H_TOP_HEADING || $T2H_THISDOC{'title'} || $T2H_THISDOC{'shorttitle'}), + ); + +############################################################################# +# print frame and frame toc file +# +if ( $T2H_FRAMES ) +{ + open(FILE, "> $docu_frame_file") + || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_frame_file for writing: $!\n"; + print "# Creating frame in $docu_frame_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + &$T2H_print_frame(\*FILE); + close(FILE); + + open(FILE, "> $docu_toc_frame_file") + || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_toc_frame_file for writing: $!\n"; + print "# Creating toc frame in $docu_frame_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + &$T2H_print_toc_frame(\*FILE); + close(FILE); +} + + +############################################################################# +# print Top +# +open(FILE, "> $docu_top_file") + || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_top_file for writing: $!\n"; +&$T2H_print_page_head(\*FILE) unless ($T2H_SPLIT); + +if ($has_top) +{ + print "# Creating Top in $docu_top_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = $T2H_TOP; + $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Top}; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Top}; + &$T2H_print_Top(\*FILE); +} + +close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT; + +############################################################################# +# Print sections +# +$T2H_NODE{Forward} = $sec2node{$sections[0]}; +$T2H_NAME{Forward} = &clean_name($sec2node{$sections[0]}); +$T2H_HREF{Forward} = sec_href($sections[0]); +$T2H_NODE{This} = 'Top'; +$T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Top}; +$T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Top}; +if ($T2H_SPLIT) +{ + print "# writing " . scalar(@sections) . + " sections in $docu_rdir$docu_name"."_[1..$doc_num]" + if $T2H_VERBOSE; + $previous = ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter' ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND); + undef $FH; + $doc_num = 0; +} +else +{ + print "# writing " . scalar(@sections) . " sections in $docu_top_file ..." + if $T2H_VERBOSE; + $FH = \*FILE; + $previous = ''; +} + +$counter = 0; +# loop through sections +while ($section = shift(@sections)) +{ + if ($T2H_SPLIT && ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' || $previous eq $CHAPTEREND)) + { + if ($FH) + { + #close previous page + &$T2H_print_chapter_footer($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter'; + &$T2H_print_page_foot($FH); + close($FH); + undef $FH; + } + } + $T2H_NAME{Back} = $T2H_NAME{This}; + $T2H_HREF{Back} = $T2H_HREF{This}; + $T2H_NODE{Back} = $T2H_NODE{This}; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Forward}; + $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Forward}; + $T2H_NODE{This} = $T2H_NODE{Forward}; + if ($sections[0]) + { + $T2H_NODE{Forward} = $sec2node{$sections[0]}; + $T2H_NAME{Forward} = &clean_name($T2H_NODE{Forward}); + $T2H_HREF{Forward} = sec_href($sections[0]); + } + else + { + undef $T2H_HREF{Forward}, $T2H_NODE{Forward}, $T2H_NAME{Forward}; + } + + $node = $node2up{$T2H_NODE{This}}; + $T2H_HREF{Up} = $node2href{$node}; + if ($T2H_HREF{Up} eq $T2H_HREF{This} || ! $T2H_HREF{Up}) + { + $T2H_NAME{Up} = $T2H_NAME{Top}; + $T2H_HREF{Up} = $T2H_HREF{Top}; + $T2H_NODE{Up} = 'Up'; + } + else + { + $T2H_NAME{Up} = &clean_name($node); + $T2H_NODE{Up} = $node; + } + + $node = $T2H_NODE{This}; + $node = $node2prev{$node}; + $T2H_NAME{Prev} = &clean_name($node); + $T2H_HREF{Prev} = $node2href{$node}; + $T2H_NODE{Prev} = $node; + + $node = $T2H_NODE{This}; + if ($node2up{$node} && $node2up{$node} ne 'Top'&& + ($node2prev{$node} eq $T2H_NODE{Back} || ! $node2prev{$node})) + { + $node = $node2up{$node}; + while ($node && $node ne $node2up{$node} && ! $node2prev{$node}) + { + $node = $node2up{$node}; + } + $node = $node2prev{$node} + unless $node2up{$node} eq 'Top' || ! $node2up{$node}; + } + else + { + $node = $node2prev{$node}; + } + $T2H_NAME{FastBack} = &clean_name($node); + $T2H_HREF{FastBack} = $node2href{$node}; + $T2H_NODE{FastBack} = $node; + + $node = $T2H_NODE{This}; + $node = $node2next{$node}; + $T2H_NAME{Next} = &clean_name($node); + $T2H_HREF{Next} = $node2href{$node}; + $T2H_NODE{Next} = $node; + + $node = $T2H_NODE{This}; + if ($node2up{$node} && $node2up{$node} ne 'Top'&& + ($node2next{$node} eq $T2H_NODE{Forward} || ! $node2next{$node})) + { + $node = $node2up{$node}; + while ($node && $node ne $node2up{$node} && ! $node2next{$node}) + { + $node = $node2up{$node}; + } + } + $node = $node2next{$node}; + $T2H_NAME{FastForward} = &clean_name($node); + $T2H_HREF{FastForward} = $node2href{$node}; + $T2H_NODE{FastForward} = $node; + + if (! defined($FH)) + { + my $file = $T2H_HREF{This}; + $file =~ s/\#.*$//; + open(FILE, "> $docu_rdir$file") || + die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_rdir$file for writing: $!\n"; + $FH = \*FILE; + &$T2H_print_page_head($FH); + t2h_print_label($FH); + &$T2H_print_chapter_header($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter'; + } + else + { + t2h_print_label($FH); + } + + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = []; + while (@doc_lines) { + $_ = shift(@doc_lines); + last if ($_ eq $SECTIONEND || $_ eq $CHAPTEREND); + push(@$T2H_THIS_SECTION, $_); + } + $previous = $_; + &$T2H_print_section($FH); + + if ($T2H_VERBOSE) + { + $counter++; + print "." if $counter =~ /00$/; + } +} +if ($T2H_SPLIT) +{ + &$T2H_print_chapter_footer($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter'; + &$T2H_print_page_foot($FH); + close($FH); +} +print "\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +############################################################################# +# Print ToC, Overview, Footnotes +# +undef $T2H_HREF{Prev}; +undef $T2H_HREF{Next}; +undef $T2H_HREF{Back}; +undef $T2H_HREF{Forward}; +undef $T2H_HREF{Up}; + +if (@foot_lines) +{ + print "# writing Footnotes in $docu_foot_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + open (FILE, "> $docu_foot_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_foot_file for writing: $!\n" + if $T2H_SPLIT; + $T2H_HREF{This} = $docu_foot; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'Footnotes_Title'}; + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@foot_lines; + &$T2H_print_Footnotes(\*FILE); + close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} + +if (@toc_lines) +{ + print "# writing Toc in $docu_toc_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + open (FILE, "> $docu_toc_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_toc_file for writing: $!\n" + if $T2H_SPLIT; + $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Contents}; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Contents}; + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@toc_lines; + &$T2H_print_Toc(\*FILE); + close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} + +if (@stoc_lines) +{ + print "# writing Overview in $docu_stoc_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + open (FILE, "> $docu_stoc_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_stoc_file for writing: $!\n" + if $T2H_SPLIT; + + $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Overview}; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Overview}; + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@stoc_lines; + unshift @$T2H_THIS_SECTION, "

    \n"; + push @$T2H_THIS_SECTION, "\n
    \n"; + &$T2H_print_Overview(\*FILE); + close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} + +if ($about_body = &$T2H_about_body()) +{ + print "# writing About in $docu_about_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + open (FILE, "> $docu_about_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_about_file for writing: $!\n" + if $T2H_SPLIT; + + $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{About}; + $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{About}; + $T2H_THIS_SECTION = [$about_body]; + &$T2H_print_About(\*FILE); + close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT; +} + +unless ($T2H_SPLIT) +{ + &$T2H_print_page_foot(\*FILE); + close (FILE); +} + +Finish: +&l2h_FinishFromHtml if ($T2H_L2H); +&l2h_Finish if($T2H_L2H); +print "# that's all folks\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + +exit(0); + +#+++############################################################################ +# # +# Low level functions # +# # +#---############################################################################ + +sub LocateIncludeFile +{ + my $file = shift; + my $dir; + + return $file if (-e $file && -r $file); + foreach $dir (@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS) + { + return "$dir/$file" if (-e "$dir/$file" && -r "$dir/$file"); + } + return undef; +} + +sub clean_name +{ + local ($_); + $_ = &remove_style($_[0]); + &unprotect_texi; + return $_; +} + +sub update_sec_num { + local($name, $level) = @_; + my $ret; + + $level--; # here we start at 0 + if ($name =~ /^appendix/ || defined(@appendix_sec_num)) { + # appendix style + if (defined(@appendix_sec_num)) { + &incr_sec_num($level, @appendix_sec_num); + } else { + @appendix_sec_num = ('A', 0, 0, 0); + } + $ret = join('.', @appendix_sec_num[0..$level]); + } else { + # normal style + if (defined(@normal_sec_num)) + { + &incr_sec_num($level, @normal_sec_num); + } + else + { + @normal_sec_num = (1, 0, 0, 0); + } + $ret = join('.', @normal_sec_num[0..$level]); + } + + $ret .= "." if $level == 0; + return $ret; +} + +sub incr_sec_num { + local($level, $l); + $level = shift(@_); + $_[$level]++; + foreach $l ($level+1 .. 3) { + $_[$l] = 0; + } +} + +sub Sec2UpNode +{ + my $sec = shift; + my $num = $sec2number{$sec}; + + return '' unless $num; + return 'Top' unless $num =~ /\.\d+/; + $num =~ s/\.[^\.]*$//; + $num = $num . '.' unless $num =~ /\./; + return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num}}; +} + +sub Sec2PrevNode +{ + my $sec = shift; + my $num = $sec2number{$sec}; + my ($i, $post); + + if ($num =~ /(\w+)(\.$|$)/) + { + $num = $`; + $i = $1; + $post = $2; + if ($i eq 'A') + { + $i = $normal_sec_num[0]; + } + elsif ($i ne '1') + { + # unfortunately, -- operator is not magical + $i = chr(ord($i) + 1); + } + else + { + return ''; + } + return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num . $i . $post}} + } + return ''; +} + +sub Sec2NextNode +{ + my $sec = shift; + my $num = $sec2number{$sec}; + my $i; + + if ($num =~ /(\w+)(\.$|$)/) + { + $num = $`; + $i = $1; + $post = $2; + if ($post eq '.' && $i eq $normal_sec_num[0]) + { + $i = 'A'; + } + else + { + $i++; + } + return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num . $i . $post}} + } + return ''; +} + +sub check { + local($_, %seen, %context, $before, $match, $after); + + while (<>) { + if (/\@(\*|\.|\:|\@|\{|\})/) { + $seen{$&}++; + $context{$&} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + $_ = "$`XX$'"; + redo; + } + if (/\@(\w+)/) { + ($before, $match, $after) = ($`, $&, $'); + if ($before =~ /\b[\w-]+$/ && $after =~ /^[\w-.]*\b/) { # e-mail address + $seen{'e-mail address'}++; + $context{'e-mail address'} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + } else { + $seen{$match}++; + $context{$match} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE; + } + $match =~ s/^\@/X/; + $_ = "$before$match$after"; + redo; + } + } + + foreach (sort(keys(%seen))) { + if ($T2H_VERBOSE) { + print "$_\n"; + print $context{$_}; + } else { + print "$_ ($seen{$_})\n"; + } + } +} + +sub open { + local($name) = @_; + + ++$fh_name; + if (open($fh_name, $name)) { + unshift(@fhs, $fh_name); + } else { + warn "$ERROR Can't read file $name: $!\n"; + } +} + +sub init_input { + @fhs = (); # hold the file handles to read + @input_spool = (); # spooled lines to read + $fh_name = 'FH000'; + &open($docu); +} + +sub next_line { + local($fh, $line); + + if (@input_spool) { + $line = shift(@input_spool); + return($line); + } + while (@fhs) { + $fh = $fhs[0]; + $line = <$fh>; + return($line) if $line; + close($fh); + shift(@fhs); + } + return(undef); +} + +# used in pass 1, use &next_line +sub skip_until { + local($tag) = @_; + local($_); + + while ($_ = &next_line) { + return if /^\@end\s+$tag\s*$/; + } + die "* Failed to find '$tag' after: " . $lines[$#lines]; +} + +# used in pass 1 for l2h use &next_line +sub string_until { + local($tag) = @_; + local($_, $string); + + while ($_ = &next_line) { + return $string if /^\@end\s+$tag\s*$/; +# $_ =~ s/hbox/mbox/g; + $string = $string.$_; + } + die "* Failed to find '$tag' after: " . $lines[$#lines]; +} + +# +# HTML stacking to have a better HTML output +# + +sub html_reset { + @html_stack = ('html'); + $html_element = 'body'; +} + +sub html_push { + local($what) = @_; + push(@html_stack, $html_element); + $html_element = $what; +} + +sub html_push_if { + local($what) = @_; + push(@html_stack, $html_element) + if ($html_element && $html_element ne 'P'); + $html_element = $what; +} + +sub html_pop { + $html_element = pop(@html_stack); +} + +sub html_pop_if { + local($elt); + + if (@_) { + foreach $elt (@_) { + if ($elt eq $html_element) { + $html_element = pop(@html_stack) if @html_stack; + last; + } + } + } else { + $html_element = pop(@html_stack) if @html_stack; + } +} + +sub html_debug { + local($what, $line) = @_; + if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_HTML) + { + $what = "\n" unless $what; + return("$what") + } + return($what); +} + +# to debug the output... +sub debug { + local($what, $line) = @_; + return("$what") + if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_HTML; + return($what); +} + +sub SimpleTexi2Html +{ + local $_ = $_[0]; + &protect_texi; + &protect_html; + $_ = substitute_style($_); + $_[0] = $_; +} + +sub normalise_node { + local $_ = $_[0]; + s/\s+/ /g; + s/ $//; + s/^ //; + &protect_texi; + &protect_html; + $_ = substitute_style($_); + $_[0] = $_; +} + +sub menu_entry +{ + my ($node, $name, $descr) = @_; + my ($href, $entry); + + &normalise_node($node); + $href = $node2href{$node}; + if ($href) + { + $descr =~ s/^\s+//; + $descr =~ s/\s*$//; + $descr = SimpleTexi2Html($descr); + if ($T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS && !$T2H_NODE_NAME_IN_MENU && $node2sec{$node}) + { + $entry = $node2sec{$node}; + $name = ''; + } + else + { + &normalise_node($name); + $entry = ($name && ($name ne $node || ! $T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY) + ? "$name : $node" : $node); + } + + if ($T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY && $descr) + { + my $clean_entry = $entry; + $clean_entry =~ s/^.*? // if ($clean_entry =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)\.[\d\.]* /); + $clean_entry =~ s/[^\w]//g; + my $clean_descr = $descr; + $clean_descr =~ s/[^\w]//g; + $descr = '' if ($clean_entry eq $clean_descr) + } + push(@lines2,&debug('
    \n", __LINE__)); + } + elsif ($node =~ /^\(.*\)\w+/) + { + push(@lines2,&debug('\n", __LINE__)) + } + else + { + warn "$ERROR Undefined node of menu_entry ($node): $_"; + } +} + +sub do_ctrl { "^$_[0]" } + +sub do_email { + local($addr, $text) = split(/,\s*/, $_[0]); + + $text = $addr unless $text; + &t2h_anchor('', "mailto:$addr", $text); +} + +sub do_sc +{ + # l2h does this much better + return &l2h_ToLatex("{\\sc ".&unprotect_html($_[0])."}") if ($T2H_L2H); + return "\U$_[0]\E"; +} + +sub do_math +{ + return &l2h_ToLatex("\$".&unprotect_html($_[0])."\$") if ($T2H_L2H); + return "".$text.""; +} + +sub do_uref { + local($url, $text, $only_text) = split(/,\s*/, $_[0]); + + $text = $only_text if $only_text; + $text = $url unless $text; + &t2h_anchor('', $url, $text); +} + +sub do_url { &t2h_anchor('', $_[0], $_[0]) } + +sub do_acronym +{ + return '' . $_[0] . ''; +} + +sub do_accent +{ + return "&$_[0]acute;" if $_[1] eq 'H'; + return "$_[0]." if $_[1] eq 'dotaccent'; + return "$_[0]*" if $_[1] eq 'ringaccent'; + return "$_[0]".'[' if $_[1] eq 'tieaccent'; + return "$_[0]".'(' if $_[1] eq 'u'; + return "$_[0]_" if $_[1] eq 'ubaraccent'; + return ".$_[0]" if $_[1] eq 'udotaccent'; + return "$_[0]<" if $_[1] eq 'v'; + return "&$_[0]cedil;" if $_[1] eq ','; + return "$_[0]" if $_[1] eq 'dotless'; + return undef; +} + +sub apply_style { + local($texi_style, $text) = @_; + local($style); + + $style = $style_map{$texi_style}; + if (defined($style)) { # known style + if ($style =~ /^\"/) { # add quotes + $style = $'; + $text = "\`$text\'"; + } + if ($style =~ /^\&/) { # custom + $style = $'; + $text = &$style($text, $texi_style); + } elsif ($style) { # good style + $text = "<$style>$text"; + } else { # no style + } + } else { # unknown style + $text = undef; + } + return($text); +} + +# remove Texinfo styles +sub remove_style { + local($_) = @_; + 1 while(s/\@\w+{([^\{\}]+)}/$1/g); + return($_); +} + +sub remove_things +{ + local ($_) = @_; + s|\@(\w+)\{\}|$1|g; + return $_; +} + +sub substitute_style { + local($_) = @_; + local($changed, $done, $style, $text); + + &simple_substitutions; + $changed = 1; + while ($changed) { + $changed = 0; + $done = ''; + while (/\@(\w+){([^\{\}]+)}/ || /\@(,){([^\{\}]+)}/) { + $text = &apply_style($1, $2); + if ($text) { + $_ = "$`$text$'"; + $changed = 1; + } else { + $done .= "$`\@$1"; + $_ = "{$2}$'"; + } + } + $_ = $done . $_; + } + return($_); +} + +sub t2h_anchor { + local($name, $href, $text, $newline, $extra_attribs) = @_; + local($result); + + $result = " + $what =~ s/\&/\&\#38;/g; + $what =~ s/\/\&\#62;/g; + # restore anything in quotes + # this fixes my problem where I had: + # < IMG SRC="leftarrow.gif" ALT="<--" > but what if I wanted < in my ALT text ?? + # maybe byte stuffing or some other technique should be used. + $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#60;(.*)\"/"$1<$2"/g; + $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#62;(.*)\"/"$1>$2"/g; + $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#38;(.*)\"/"$1&$2"/g; + # but recognize some HTML things + $what =~ s/\&\#60;\/A\&\#62;/<\/A>/g; # + $what =~ s/\&\#60;A ([^\&]+)\&\#62;//g; # + $what =~ s/\&\#60;IMG ([^\&]+)\&\#62;//g; # + return($what); +} + +sub unprotect_texi { + s/$;0/\@/go; + s/$;1/\{/go; + s/$;2/\}/go; + s/$;3/\`/go; + s/$;4/\'/go; +} + +sub Unprotect_texi +{ + local $_ = shift; + &unprotect_texi; + return($_); +} + +sub unprotect_html { + local($what) = @_; + $what =~ s/\&\#38;/\&/g; + $what =~ s/\&\#60;/\/g; + return($what); +} + +sub t2h_print_label +{ + my $fh = shift; + my $href = shift || $T2H_HREF{This}; + $href =~ s/.*#(.*)$/$1/; + print $fh qq{\n}; +} + +############################################################################## + + # These next few lines are legal in both Perl and nroff. + +.00 ; # finish .ig + +'di \" finish diversion--previous line must be blank +.nr nl 0-1 \" fake up transition to first page again +.nr % 0 \" start at page 1 +'; __END__ ############# From here on it's a standard manual page ############ +.so /usr/local/man/man1/texi2html.1
    texi2html Property changes : Added: svn:executable ## -0,0 +1 ## +* \ No newline at end of property Index: hsuser.texi =================================================================== --- hsuser.texi (nonexistent) +++ hsuser.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,457 @@ +@ignore +This file documents the user interface to the GNU History library. + +Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual +provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on +all copies. + +Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission notice +identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this +paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +GNU Copyright statement is available to the distributee, and provided that +the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a +permission notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. +@end ignore + +@node Using History Interactively +@chapter Using History Interactively + +@ifclear BashFeatures +@defcodeindex bt +@end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +This chapter describes how to use the @sc{gnu} History Library +interactively, from a user's standpoint. +It should be considered a user's guide. +For information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in other programs, +see the @sc{gnu} Readline Library Manual. +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +This chapter describes how to use the @sc{gnu} History Library interactively, +from a user's standpoint. It should be considered a user's guide. For +information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in your own programs, +@pxref{Programming with GNU History}. +@end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +@menu +* Bash History Facilities:: How Bash lets you manipulate your command + history. +* Bash History Builtins:: The Bash builtin commands that manipulate + the command history. +* History Interaction:: What it feels like using History as a user. +@end menu +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +@menu +* History Interaction:: What it feels like using History as a user. +@end menu +@end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +@node Bash History Facilities +@section Bash History Facilities +@cindex command history +@cindex history list + +When the @option{-o history} option to the @code{set} builtin +is enabled (@pxref{The Set Builtin}), +the shell provides access to the @dfn{command history}, +the list of commands previously typed. +The value of the @env{HISTSIZE} shell variable is used as the +number of commands to save in a history list. +The text of the last @env{$HISTSIZE} +commands (default 500) is saved. +The shell stores each command in the history list prior to +parameter and variable expansion +but after history expansion is performed, subject to the +values of the shell variables +@env{HISTIGNORE} and @env{HISTCONTROL}. + +When the shell starts up, the history is initialized from the +file named by the @env{HISTFILE} variable (default @file{~/.bash_history}). +The file named by the value of @env{HISTFILE} is truncated, if +necessary, to contain no more than the number of lines specified by +the value of the @env{HISTFILESIZE} variable. +When an interactive shell exits, the last +@env{$HISTSIZE} lines are copied from the history list to the file +named by @env{$HISTFILE}. +If the @code{histappend} shell option is set (@pxref{Bash Builtins}), +the lines are appended to the history file, +otherwise the history file is overwritten. +If @env{HISTFILE} +is unset, or if the history file is unwritable, the history is +not saved. After saving the history, the history file is truncated +to contain no more than @env{$HISTFILESIZE} +lines. If @env{HISTFILESIZE} is not set, no truncation is performed. + +If the @env{HISTTIMEFORMAT} is set, the time stamp information +associated with each history entry is written to the history file. + +The builtin command @code{fc} may be used to list or edit and re-execute +a portion of the history list. +The @code{history} builtin may be used to display or modify the history +list and manipulate the history file. +When using command-line editing, search commands +are available in each editing mode that provide access to the +history list (@pxref{Commands For History}). + +The shell allows control over which commands are saved on the history +list. The @env{HISTCONTROL} and @env{HISTIGNORE} +variables may be set to cause the shell to save only a subset of the +commands entered. +The @code{cmdhist} +shell option, if enabled, causes the shell to attempt to save each +line of a multi-line command in the same history entry, adding +semicolons where necessary to preserve syntactic correctness. +The @code{lithist} +shell option causes the shell to save the command with embedded newlines +instead of semicolons. +The @code{shopt} builtin is used to set these options. +@xref{Bash Builtins}, for a description of @code{shopt}. + +@node Bash History Builtins +@section Bash History Builtins +@cindex history builtins + +Bash provides two builtin commands which manipulate the +history list and history file. + +@table @code + +@item fc +@btindex fc +@example +@code{fc [-e @var{ename}] [-nlr] [@var{first}] [@var{last}]} +@code{fc -s [@var{pat}=@var{rep}] [@var{command}]} +@end example + +Fix Command. In the first form, a range of commands from @var{first} to +@var{last} is selected from the history list. Both @var{first} and +@var{last} may be specified as a string (to locate the most recent +command beginning with that string) or as a number (an index into the +history list, where a negative number is used as an offset from the +current command number). If @var{last} is not specified it is set to +@var{first}. If @var{first} is not specified it is set to the previous +command for editing and @minus{}16 for listing. If the @option{-l} flag is +given, the commands are listed on standard output. The @option{-n} flag +suppresses the command numbers when listing. The @option{-r} flag +reverses the order of the listing. Otherwise, the editor given by +@var{ename} is invoked on a file containing those commands. If +@var{ename} is not given, the value of the following variable expansion +is used: @code{$@{FCEDIT:-$@{EDITOR:-vi@}@}}. This says to use the +value of the @env{FCEDIT} variable if set, or the value of the +@env{EDITOR} variable if that is set, or @code{vi} if neither is set. +When editing is complete, the edited commands are echoed and executed. + +In the second form, @var{command} is re-executed after each instance +of @var{pat} in the selected command is replaced by @var{rep}. + +A useful alias to use with the @code{fc} command is @code{r='fc -s'}, so +that typing @samp{r cc} runs the last command beginning with @code{cc} +and typing @samp{r} re-executes the last command (@pxref{Aliases}). + +@item history +@btindex history +@example +history [@var{n}] +history -c +history -d @var{offset} +history [-anrw] [@var{filename}] +history -ps @var{arg} +@end example + +With no options, display the history list with line numbers. +Lines prefixed with a @samp{*} have been modified. +An argument of @var{n} lists only the last @var{n} lines. +If the shell variable @env{HISTTIMEFORMAT} is set and not null, +it is used as a format string for @var{strftime} to display +the time stamp associated with each displayed history entry. +No intervening blank is printed between the formatted time stamp +and the history line. + +Options, if supplied, have the following meanings: + +@table @code +@item -c +Clear the history list. This may be combined +with the other options to replace the history list completely. + +@item -d @var{offset} +Delete the history entry at position @var{offset}. +@var{offset} should be specified as it appears when the history is +displayed. + +@item -a +Append the new +history lines (history lines entered since the beginning of the +current Bash session) to the history file. + +@item -n +Append the history lines not already read from the history file +to the current history list. These are lines appended to the history +file since the beginning of the current Bash session. + +@item -r +Read the current history file and append its contents to +the history list. + +@item -w +Write out the current history to the history file. + +@item -p +Perform history substitution on the @var{arg}s and display the result +on the standard output, without storing the results in the history list. + +@item -s +The @var{arg}s are added to the end of +the history list as a single entry. + +@end table + +When any of the @option{-w}, @option{-r}, @option{-a}, or @option{-n} options is +used, if @var{filename} +is given, then it is used as the history file. If not, then +the value of the @env{HISTFILE} variable is used. + +@end table +@end ifset + +@node History Interaction +@section History Expansion +@cindex history expansion + +The History library provides a history expansion feature that is similar +to the history expansion provided by @code{csh}. This section +describes the syntax used to manipulate the history information. + +History expansions introduce words from the history list into +the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the +arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or +fix errors in previous commands quickly. + +History expansion takes place in two parts. The first is to determine +which line from the history list should be used during substitution. +The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into the +current one. The line selected from the history is called the +@dfn{event}, and the portions of that line that are acted upon are +called @dfn{words}. Various @dfn{modifiers} are available to manipulate +the selected words. The line is broken into words in the same fashion +that Bash does, so that several words +surrounded by quotes are considered one word. +History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the +history expansion character, which is @samp{!} by default. +@ifset BashFeatures +Only @samp{\} and @samp{'} may be used to escape the history expansion +character. +@end ifset + +@ifset BashFeatures +Several shell options settable with the @code{shopt} +builtin (@pxref{Bash Builtins}) may be used to tailor +the behavior of history expansion. If the +@code{histverify} shell option is enabled, and Readline +is being used, history substitutions are not immediately passed to +the shell parser. +Instead, the expanded line is reloaded into the Readline +editing buffer for further modification. +If Readline is being used, and the @code{histreedit} +shell option is enabled, a failed history expansion will be +reloaded into the Readline editing buffer for correction. +The @option{-p} option to the @code{history} builtin command +may be used to see what a history expansion will do before using it. +The @option{-s} option to the @code{history} builtin may be used to +add commands to the end of the history list without actually executing +them, so that they are available for subsequent recall. +This is most useful in conjunction with Readline. + +The shell allows control of the various characters used by the +history expansion mechanism with the @code{histchars} variable. +@end ifset + +@menu +* Event Designators:: How to specify which history line to use. +* Word Designators:: Specifying which words are of interest. +* Modifiers:: Modifying the results of substitution. +@end menu + +@node Event Designators +@subsection Event Designators +@cindex event designators + +An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the +history list. +@cindex history events + +@table @asis + +@item @code{!} +@ifset BashFeatures +Start a history substitution, except when followed by a space, tab, +the end of the line, @samp{=} or @samp{(} (when the +@code{extglob} shell option is enabled using the @code{shopt} builtin). +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +Start a history substitution, except when followed by a space, tab, +the end of the line, or @samp{=}. +@end ifclear + +@item @code{!@var{n}} +Refer to command line @var{n}. + +@item @code{!-@var{n}} +Refer to the command @var{n} lines back. + +@item @code{!!} +Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for @samp{!-1}. + +@item @code{!@var{string}} +Refer to the most recent command starting with @var{string}. + +@item @code{!?@var{string}[?]} +Refer to the most recent command containing @var{string}. The trailing +@samp{?} may be omitted if the @var{string} is followed immediately by +a newline. + +@item @code{^@var{string1}^@var{string2}^} +Quick Substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing @var{string1} +with @var{string2}. Equivalent to +@code{!!:s/@var{string1}/@var{string2}/}. + +@item @code{!#} +The entire command line typed so far. + +@end table + +@node Word Designators +@subsection Word Designators + +Word designators are used to select desired words from the event. +A @samp{:} separates the event specification from the word designator. It +may be omitted if the word designator begins with a @samp{^}, @samp{$}, +@samp{*}, @samp{-}, or @samp{%}. Words are numbered from the beginning +of the line, with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero). Words are +inserted into the current line separated by single spaces. + +@need 0.75 +For example, + +@table @code +@item !! +designates the preceding command. When you type this, the preceding +command is repeated in toto. + +@item !!:$ +designates the last argument of the preceding command. This may be +shortened to @code{!$}. + +@item !fi:2 +designates the second argument of the most recent command starting with +the letters @code{fi}. +@end table + +@need 0.75 +Here are the word designators: + +@table @code + +@item 0 (zero) +The @code{0}th word. For many applications, this is the command word. + +@item @var{n} +The @var{n}th word. + +@item ^ +The first argument; that is, word 1. + +@item $ +The last argument. + +@item % +The word matched by the most recent @samp{?@var{string}?} search. + +@item @var{x}-@var{y} +A range of words; @samp{-@var{y}} abbreviates @samp{0-@var{y}}. + +@item * +All of the words, except the @code{0}th. This is a synonym for @samp{1-$}. +It is not an error to use @samp{*} if there is just one word in the event; +the empty string is returned in that case. + +@item @var{x}* +Abbreviates @samp{@var{x}-$} + +@item @var{x}- +Abbreviates @samp{@var{x}-$} like @samp{@var{x}*}, but omits the last word. + +@end table + +If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the +previous command is used as the event. + +@node Modifiers +@subsection Modifiers + +After the optional word designator, you can add a sequence of one or more +of the following modifiers, each preceded by a @samp{:}. + +@table @code + +@item h +Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving only the head. + +@item t +Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. + +@item r +Remove a trailing suffix of the form @samp{.@var{suffix}}, leaving +the basename. + +@item e +Remove all but the trailing suffix. + +@item p +Print the new command but do not execute it. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@item q +Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions. + +@item x +Quote the substituted words as with @samp{q}, +but break into words at spaces, tabs, and newlines. +@end ifset + +@item s/@var{old}/@var{new}/ +Substitute @var{new} for the first occurrence of @var{old} in the +event line. Any delimiter may be used in place of @samp{/}. +The delimiter may be quoted in @var{old} and @var{new} +with a single backslash. If @samp{&} appears in @var{new}, +it is replaced by @var{old}. A single backslash will quote +the @samp{&}. The final delimiter is optional if it is the last +character on the input line. + +@item & +Repeat the previous substitution. + +@item g +@itemx a +Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. Used in +conjunction with @samp{s}, as in @code{gs/@var{old}/@var{new}/}, +or with @samp{&}. + +@item G +Apply the following @samp{s} modifier once to each word in the event. + +@end table
    hsuser.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: rlman.texi =================================================================== --- rlman.texi (nonexistent) +++ rlman.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- +@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setfilename readline.info +@settitle GNU Readline Library +@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@synindex vr fn +@setchapternewpage odd + +@include version.texi + +@copying +This manual describes the GNU Readline Library +(version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), a library which aids in the +consistency of user interface across discrete programs which provide +a command line interface. + +Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + +@quotation +Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document +under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or +any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no +Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual,'' +and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is +included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License.'' + +(a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify +this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free +Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' +@end quotation +@end copying + +@dircategory Libraries +@direntry +* Readline: (readline). The GNU readline library API. +@end direntry + +@titlepage +@title GNU Readline Library +@subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @code{Readline Library} Version @value{VERSION}. +@subtitle @value{UPDATED-MONTH} +@author Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University +@author Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation + +@page +@vskip 0pt plus 1filll +@insertcopying + +@sp 1 +Published by the Free Software Foundation @* +59 Temple Place, Suite 330, @* +Boston, MA 02111-1307 @* +USA @* + +@end titlepage + +@contents + +@ifnottex +@node Top +@top GNU Readline Library + +This document describes the GNU Readline Library, a utility which aids +in the consistency of user interface across discrete programs which +provide a command line interface. + +@menu +* Command Line Editing:: GNU Readline User's Manual. +* Programming with GNU Readline:: GNU Readline Programmer's Manual. +* Copying This Manual:: Copying this manual. +* Concept Index:: Index of concepts described in this manual. +* Function and Variable Index:: Index of externally visible functions + and variables. +@end menu +@end ifnottex + +@include rluser.texi +@include rltech.texi + +@node Copying This Manual +@appendix Copying This Manual + +@menu +* GNU Free Documentation License:: License for copying this manual. +@end menu + +@include fdl.texi + +@node Concept Index +@unnumbered Concept Index +@printindex cp + +@node Function and Variable Index +@unnumbered Function and Variable Index +@printindex fn + +@bye
    rlman.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: ChangeLog.gdb =================================================================== --- ChangeLog.gdb (nonexistent) +++ ChangeLog.gdb (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +2006-04-24 Daniel Jacobowitz + + Imported readline 5.1, and upstream patches 001-004. + +2003-09-14 Andrew Cagney + + * history.0: Delete generated file. + +2002-02-24 Elena Zannoni + + * ChangeLog.gdb: Renamed from ChangeLog. + +2002-01-20 Eli Zaretskii + + * rluser.texinfo (Sample Init File): Prevent overfull hboxes. + From Brian Youmans <3diff@gnu.org>. + +2000-07-09 Elena Zannoni + + * Removed generated files rluserman.{dvi, info, html, ps}. + +2000-07-07 Elena Zannoni + + * Import of readline 4.1. + + Regenerated inc-hist.texinfo as copy of hsuser.texinfo, for + inclusion in the gdb manual. + + New file: rluserman.texinfo + +Tue Apr 18 15:43:52 2000 Andrew Cagney + + * readline.0: Delete. Generated by Makefile, deleted by distclean + rule. + +Tue Mar 28 16:06:22 2000 Andrew Cagney + + * inc-hist.texinfo, rluser.texinfo: Revert change Fri Mar 24 + 18:04:32 2000 Andrew Cagney . + Unconditionally provide @chapter and @node. + +Fri Mar 24 18:04:32 2000 Andrew Cagney + + * inc-hist.texinfo: When GDBN omit the chapter/node. + * rluser.texinfo (Command Line Editing): Ditto. + +1999-08-10 Elena Zannoni + + * hsuser.texinfo (Bash History Builtins): Comment out btindex + commands. + + * inc-hist.texinfo: New file. Same as hsuser.texinfo, but w/o + cross reference to GNU History Manual. + +Tue Dec 22 10:07:58 1998 Elena Zannoni + + * hsuser.texinfo (Bash History Builtins): comment out btindex + commands. + + * Import of Readline 2.2.1. + + New files: readline.0, readline.3, texi2dvi, texi2html. + +1998-12-17 Felix Lee + + * inc-hist.texi: @node line "Using History" was wrong. + +Thu Jul 9 17:03:26 1998 Edith Epstein + + * inc-hist.texi: one line change. + +Wed Sep 20 12:57:29 1995 Ian Lance Taylor + + * Makefile.in (maintainer-clean): New synonym for realclean. + +Tue Feb 2 11:40:04 1993 Roland H. Pesch (pesch@fowanton.cygnus.com) + + * Makefile.in: configurable (and useable) Makefile template + * Makefile: removed, replaced with configurable Makefile.in + * texindex.c texinfo.tex: remove, replacing w/refs to tools + elsewhere in distribution tree + * configure.in: pro forma configure stub + * ChangeLog: new file Index: Makefile.in =================================================================== --- Makefile.in (nonexistent) +++ Makefile.in (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,255 @@ +# This makefile for Readline library documentation is in -*- text -*- mode. +# Emacs likes it that way. + +# Copyright (C) 1996-2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. + +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. + +topdir = @top_srcdir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +VPATH = .:@srcdir@ + +prefix = @prefix@ + +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ + +infodir = @infodir@ + +mandir = @mandir@ +manpfx = man + +man1ext = .1 +man1dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)1 +man3ext = .3 +man3dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)3 + +# set this to a value to have the HTML documentation installed +htmldir = + +# Support an alternate destination root directory for package building +DESTDIR = + +SHELL = @MAKE_SHELL@ +RM = rm -f + +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ + +BUILD_DIR = @BUILD_DIR@ +TEXINPUTDIR = $(srcdir) + +MAKEINFO = LANGUAGE= makeinfo +TEXI2DVI = $(srcdir)/texi2dvi +TEXI2HTML = $(srcdir)/texi2html +QUIETPS = #set this to -q to shut up dvips +PAPERSIZE = letter +PSDPI = 600 +DVIPS = dvips -D ${PSDPI} $(QUIETPS) -t ${PAPERSIZE} -o $@ # tricky + +# These tools might not be available; they're not required +DVIPDF = dvipdfm -o $@ -p ${PAPERSIZE} +PSPDF = gs -sPAPERSIZE=${PAPERSIZE} -sDEVICE=pdfwrite -dNOPAUSE -dBATCH -sOutputFile=$@ + +RLSRC = $(srcdir)/rlman.texi $(srcdir)/rluser.texi \ + $(srcdir)/rltech.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi \ + $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi +HISTSRC = $(srcdir)/history.texi $(srcdir)/hsuser.texi \ + $(srcdir)/hstech.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi + +# This should be a program that converts troff to an ascii-readable format +NROFF = groff -Tascii + +# This should be a program that converts troff to postscript +GROFF = groff + +DVIOBJ = readline.dvi history.dvi rluserman.dvi +INFOOBJ = readline.info history.info rluserman.info +PSOBJ = readline.ps history.ps rluserman.ps readline_3.ps history_3.ps +HTMLOBJ = readline.html history.html rluserman.html +TEXTOBJ = readline.0 history.0 +PDFOBJ = readline.pdf history.pdf rluserman.pdf + +INTERMEDIATE_OBJ = rlman.dvi + +DIST_DOCS = $(DVIOBJ) $(PSOBJ) $(HTMLOBJ) $(INFOOBJ) $(TEXTOBJ) + +.SUFFIXES: .0 .3 .ps .txt .dvi .html .pdf + +.3.0: + $(RM) $@ + -${NROFF} -man $< > $@ + +.ps.pdf: + $(RM) $@ + -${PSPDF} $< + +.dvi.pdf: + $(RM) $@ + -${DVIPDF} $< + +all: info dvi html ps text +nodvi: info html text + +info: $(INFOOBJ) +dvi: $(DVIOBJ) +ps: $(PSOBJ) +html: $(HTMLOBJ) +text: $(TEXTOBJ) +pdf: $(PDFOBJ) + +readline.dvi: $(RLSRC) + TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/rlman.texi + mv rlman.dvi readline.dvi + +readline.info: $(RLSRC) + $(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/rlman.texi + +rluserman.dvi: $(RLSRC) + TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi + +rluserman.info: $(RLSRC) + $(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi + +history.dvi: ${HISTSRC} + TEXINPUTS=.:$(TEXINPUTDIR):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/history.texi + +history.info: ${HISTSRC} + $(MAKEINFO) --no-split -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) -o $@ $(srcdir)/history.texi + +readline.ps: readline.dvi + $(RM) $@ + $(DVIPS) readline.dvi + +rluserman.ps: rluserman.dvi + $(RM) $@ + $(DVIPS) rluserman.dvi + +history.ps: history.dvi + $(RM) $@ + $(DVIPS) history.dvi + +# +# This leaves readline.html and rlman.html -- rlman.html is for www.gnu.org +# +readline.html: ${RLSRC} + $(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rlman.texi + sed -e 's:rlman.html:readline.html:g' rlman.html > readline.html + $(RM) rlman.html + +rluserman.html: ${RLSRC} + $(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rluserman.texi + +history.html: ${HISTSRC} + $(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/history.texi + +readline.0: readline.3 + +readline_3.ps: readline.3 + ${RM} $@ + ${GROFF} -man < $(srcdir)/readline.3 > $@ + +history.0: history.3 + +history_3.ps: history.3 + ${RM} $@ + ${GROFF} -man < $(srcdir)/history.3 > $@ + +readline.pdf: readline.dvi +history.pdf: history.dvi +rluserman.pdf: rluserman.dvi + +clean: + $(RM) *.aux *.bak *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg *.toc *.tp *.vr *.cps \ + *.pgs *.bt *.bts *.rw *.rws *.fns *.kys *.tps *.vrs *.o \ + core *.core + +mostlyclean: clean + +distclean: clean maybe-clean + $(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ) + $(RM) Makefile + +maybe-clean: + -if test "X$(topdir)" != "X$(BUILD_DIR)"; then \ + $(RM) $(DIST_DOCS); \ + fi + +maintainer-clean: clean + $(RM) $(DIST_DOCS) + $(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ) + $(RM) $(PDFOBJ) + $(RM) Makefile + +installdirs: $(topdir)/support/mkdirs + -$(SHELL) $(topdir)/support/mkdirs $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir) + -if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \ + $(SHELL) $(topdir)/support/mkdirs $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir) ; \ + fi + +install: installdirs + if test -f readline.info; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} readline.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info; \ + fi + if test -f rluserman.info; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} rluserman.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/rluserman.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info; \ + fi + if test -f history.info; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} history.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info; \ + fi + -if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \ + $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info ; \ + install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \ + $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info ; \ + install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \ + $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info ; \ + else true; fi + -${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.3 $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/readline$(man3ext) + -${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.3 $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/history$(man3ext) + -if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \ + if test -f readline.html; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} readline.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html; \ + fi ; \ + if test -f history.html; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} history.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html; \ + fi ; \ + if test -f rluserman.html; then \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} rluserman.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html; \ + else \ + ${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/rluserman.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html; \ + fi ; \ + fi + +uninstall: + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/readline$(man3ext) + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/history$(man3ext) + -if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \ + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html ; \ + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html ; \ + $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html ; \ + fi Index: readline.3 =================================================================== --- readline.3 (nonexistent) +++ readline.3 (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,1300 @@ +.\" +.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to +.\" +.\" Chet Ramey +.\" Information Network Services +.\" Case Western Reserve University +.\" chet@ins.CWRU.Edu +.\" +.\" Last Change: Tue Sep 13 12:07:26 EDT 2005 +.\" +.TH READLINE 3 "2005 Sep 13" "GNU Readline 5.1-beta1" +.\" +.\" File Name macro. This used to be `.PN', for Path Name, +.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much. +.\" +.de FN +\fI\|\\$1\|\fP +.. +.SH NAME +readline \- get a line from a user with editing +.SH SYNOPSIS +.LP +.nf +.ft B +#include +#include +#include +.ft +.fi +.LP +.nf +\fIchar *\fP +.br +\fBreadline\fP (\fIconst char *prompt\fP); +.fi +.SH COPYRIGHT +.if n Readline is Copyright (C) 1989\-2004 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc. +.if t Readline is Copyright \(co 1989\-2004 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc. +.SH DESCRIPTION +.LP +.B readline +will read a line from the terminal +and return it, using +.B prompt +as a prompt. If +.B prompt +is \fBNULL\fP or the empty string, no prompt is issued. +The line returned is allocated with +.IR malloc (3); +the caller must free it when finished. The line returned +has the final newline removed, so only the text of the line +remains. +.LP +.B readline +offers editing capabilities while the user is entering the +line. +By default, the line editing commands +are similar to those of emacs. +A vi\-style line editing interface is also available. +.LP +This manual page describes only the most basic use of \fBreadline\fP. +Much more functionality is available; see +\fIThe GNU Readline Library\fP and \fIThe GNU History Library\fP +for additional information. +.SH RETURN VALUE +.LP +.B readline +returns the text of the line read. A blank line +returns the empty string. If +.B EOF +is encountered while reading a line, and the line is empty, +.B NULL +is returned. If an +.B EOF +is read with a non\-empty line, it is +treated as a newline. +.SH NOTATION +.LP +An emacs-style notation is used to denote +keystrokes. Control keys are denoted by C\-\fIkey\fR, e.g., C\-n +means Control\-N. Similarly, +.I meta +keys are denoted by M\-\fIkey\fR, so M\-x means Meta\-X. (On keyboards +without a +.I meta +key, M\-\fIx\fP means ESC \fIx\fP, i.e., press the Escape key +then the +.I x +key. This makes ESC the \fImeta prefix\fP. +The combination M\-C\-\fIx\fP means ESC\-Control\-\fIx\fP, +or press the Escape key +then hold the Control key while pressing the +.I x +key.) +.PP +Readline commands may be given numeric +.IR arguments , +which normally act as a repeat count. Sometimes, however, it is the +sign of the argument that is significant. Passing a negative argument +to a command that acts in the forward direction (e.g., \fBkill\-line\fP) +causes that command to act in a backward direction. Commands whose +behavior with arguments deviates from this are noted. +.PP +When a command is described as \fIkilling\fP text, the text +deleted is saved for possible future retrieval +(\fIyanking\fP). The killed text is saved in a +\fIkill ring\fP. Consecutive kills cause the text to be +accumulated into one unit, which can be yanked all at once. +Commands which do not kill text separate the chunks of text +on the kill ring. +.SH INITIALIZATION FILE +.LP +Readline is customized by putting commands in an initialization +file (the \fIinputrc\fP file). +The name of this file is taken from the value of the +.B INPUTRC +environment variable. If that variable is unset, the default is +.IR ~/.inputrc . +When a program which uses the readline library starts up, the +init file is read, and the key bindings and variables are set. +There are only a few basic constructs allowed in the +readline init file. Blank lines are ignored. +Lines beginning with a \fB#\fP are comments. +Lines beginning with a \fB$\fP indicate conditional constructs. +Other lines denote key bindings and variable settings. +Each program using this library may add its own commands +and bindings. +.PP +For example, placing +.RS +.PP +M\-Control\-u: universal\-argument +.RE +or +.RS +C\-Meta\-u: universal\-argument +.RE +.sp +into the +.I inputrc +would make M\-C\-u execute the readline command +.IR universal\-argument . +.PP +The following symbolic character names are recognized while +processing key bindings: +.IR DEL , +.IR ESC , +.IR ESCAPE , +.IR LFD , +.IR NEWLINE , +.IR RET , +.IR RETURN , +.IR RUBOUT , +.IR SPACE , +.IR SPC , +and +.IR TAB . +.PP +In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound +to a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a \fImacro\fP). +.PP +.SS Key Bindings +.PP +The syntax for controlling key bindings in the +.I inputrc +file is simple. All that is required is the name of the +command or the text of a macro and a key sequence to which +it should be bound. The name may be specified in one of two ways: +as a symbolic key name, possibly with \fIMeta\-\fP or \fIControl\-\fP +prefixes, or as a key sequence. +.PP +When using the form \fBkeyname\fP:\^\fIfunction-name\fP or \fImacro\fP, +.I keyname +is the name of a key spelled out in English. For example: +.sp +.RS +Control\-u: universal\-argument +.br +Meta\-Rubout: backward\-kill\-word +.br +Control\-o: "> output" +.RE +.LP +In the above example, +.I C\-u +is bound to the function +.BR universal\-argument , +.I M-DEL +is bound to the function +.BR backward\-kill\-word , +and +.I C\-o +is bound to run the macro +expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text +.if t \f(CW> output\fP +.if n ``> output'' +into the line). +.PP +In the second form, \fB"keyseq"\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP, +.B keyseq +differs from +.B keyname +above in that strings denoting +an entire key sequence may be specified by placing the sequence +within double quotes. Some GNU Emacs style key escapes can be +used, as in the following example, but the symbolic character names +are not recognized. +.sp +.RS +"\eC\-u": universal\-argument +.br +"\eC\-x\eC\-r": re\-read\-init\-file +.br +"\ee[11~": "Function Key 1" +.RE +.PP +In this example, +.I C-u +is again bound to the function +.BR universal\-argument . +.I "C-x C-r" +is bound to the function +.BR re\-read\-init\-file , +and +.I "ESC [ 1 1 ~" +is bound to insert the text +.if t \f(CWFunction Key 1\fP. +.if n ``Function Key 1''. +.PP +The full set of GNU Emacs style escape sequences available when specifying +key sequences is +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \eC\- +control prefix +.TP +.B \eM\- +meta prefix +.TP +.B \ee +an escape character +.TP +.B \e\e +backslash +.TP +.B \e" +literal ", a double quote +.TP +.B \e' +literal ', a single quote +.RE +.PD +.PP +In addition to the GNU Emacs style escape sequences, a second +set of backslash escapes is available: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \ea +alert (bell) +.TP +.B \eb +backspace +.TP +.B \ed +delete +.TP +.B \ef +form feed +.TP +.B \en +newline +.TP +.B \er +carriage return +.TP +.B \et +horizontal tab +.TP +.B \ev +vertical tab +.TP +.B \e\fInnn\fP +the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP +(one to three digits) +.TP +.B \ex\fIHH\fP +the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP +(one or two hex digits) +.RE +.PD +.PP +When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes should +be used to indicate a macro definition. Unquoted text +is assumed to be a function name. +In the macro body, the backslash escapes described above are expanded. +Backslash will quote any other character in the macro text, +including " and '. +.PP +.B Bash +allows the current readline key bindings to be displayed or modified +with the +.B bind +builtin command. The editing mode may be switched during interactive +use by using the +.B \-o +option to the +.B set +builtin command. Other programs using this library provide +similar mechanisms. The +.I inputrc +file may be edited and re-read if a program does not provide +any other means to incorporate new bindings. +.SS Variables +.PP +Readline has variables that can be used to further customize its +behavior. A variable may be set in the +.I inputrc +file with a statement of the form +.RS +.PP +\fBset\fP \fIvariable\-name\fP \fIvalue\fP +.RE +.PP +Except where noted, readline variables can take the values +.B On +or +.B Off +(without regard to case). +Unrecognized variable names are ignored. +When a variable value is read, empty or null values, "on" (case-insensitive), +and "1" are equivalent to \fBOn\fP. All other values are equivalent to +\fBOff\fP. +The variables and their default values are: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B bell\-style (audible) +Controls what happens when readline wants to ring the terminal bell. +If set to \fBnone\fP, readline never rings the bell. If set to +\fBvisible\fP, readline uses a visible bell if one is available. +If set to \fBaudible\fP, readline attempts to ring the terminal's bell. +.TP +.B bind\-tty\-special\-chars (On) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline attempts to bind the control characters +treated specially by the kernel's terminal driver to their readline +equivalents. +.TP +.B comment\-begin (``#'') +The string that is inserted in \fBvi\fP mode when the +.B insert\-comment +command is executed. +This command is bound to +.B M\-# +in emacs mode and to +.B # +in vi command mode. +.TP +.B completion\-ignore\-case (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline performs filename matching and completion +in a case\-insensitive fashion. +.TP +.B completion\-query\-items (100) +This determines when the user is queried about viewing +the number of possible completions +generated by the \fBpossible\-completions\fP command. +It may be set to any integer value greater than or equal to +zero. If the number of possible completions is greater than +or equal to the value of this variable, the user is asked whether +or not he wishes to view them; otherwise they are simply listed +on the terminal. A negative value causes readline to never ask. +.TP +.B convert\-meta (On) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will convert characters with the +eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence +by stripping the eighth bit and prefixing it with an +escape character (in effect, using escape as the \fImeta prefix\fP). +.TP +.B disable\-completion (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will inhibit word completion. Completion +characters will be inserted into the line as if they had been +mapped to \fBself-insert\fP. +.TP +.B editing\-mode (emacs) +Controls whether readline begins with a set of key bindings similar +to emacs or vi. +.B editing\-mode +can be set to either +.B emacs +or +.BR vi . +.TP +.B enable\-keypad (Off) +When set to \fBOn\fP, readline will try to enable the application +keypad when it is called. Some systems need this to enable the +arrow keys. +.TP +.B expand\-tilde (Off) +If set to \fBon\fP, tilde expansion is performed when readline +attempts word completion. +.TP +.B history\-preserve\-point (Off) +If set to \fBon\fP, the history code attempts to place point at the +same location on each history line retrieved with \fBprevious-history\fP +or \fBnext-history\fP. +.TP +.B horizontal\-scroll\-mode (Off) +When set to \fBOn\fP, makes readline use a single line for display, +scrolling the input horizontally on a single screen line when it +becomes longer than the screen width rather than wrapping to a new line. +.TP +.B input\-meta (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will enable eight-bit input (that is, +it will not clear the eighth bit in the characters it reads), +regardless of what the terminal claims it can support. The name +.B meta\-flag +is a synonym for this variable. +.TP +.B isearch\-terminators (``C\-[ C\-J'') +The string of characters that should terminate an incremental +search without subsequently executing the character as a command. +If this variable has not been given a value, the characters +\fIESC\fP and \fIC\-J\fP will terminate an incremental search. +.TP +.B keymap (emacs) +Set the current readline keymap. The set of legal keymap names is +\fIemacs, emacs-standard, emacs-meta, emacs-ctlx, vi, vi-move, +vi-command\fP, and +.IR vi-insert . +\fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is +equivalent to \fIemacs-standard\fP. The default value is +.IR emacs . +The value of +.B editing\-mode +also affects the default keymap. +.TP +.B mark\-directories (On) +If set to \fBOn\fP, completed directory names have a slash +appended. +.TP +.B mark\-modified\-lines (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, history lines that have been modified are displayed +with a preceding asterisk (\fB*\fP). +.TP +.B mark\-symlinked\-directories (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, completed names which are symbolic links to directories +have a slash appended (subject to the value of +\fBmark\-directories\fP). +.TP +.B match\-hidden\-files (On) +This variable, when set to \fBOn\fP, causes readline to match files whose +names begin with a `.' (hidden files) when performing filename +completion, unless the leading `.' is +supplied by the user in the filename to be completed. +.TP +.B output\-meta (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display characters with the +eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape +sequence. +.TP +.B page\-completions (On) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline uses an internal \fImore\fP-like pager +to display a screenful of possible completions at a time. +.TP +.B print\-completions\-horizontally (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display completions with matches +sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen. +.TP +.B show\-all\-if\-ambiguous (Off) +This alters the default behavior of the completion functions. If +set to +.BR on , +words which have more than one possible completion cause the +matches to be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell. +.TP +.B show\-all\-if\-unmodified (Off) +This alters the default behavior of the completion functions in +a fashion similar to \fBshow\-all\-if\-ambiguous\fP. +If set to +.BR on , +words which have more than one possible completion without any +possible partial completion (the possible completions don't share +a common prefix) cause the matches to be listed immediately instead +of ringing the bell. +.TP +.B visible\-stats (Off) +If set to \fBOn\fP, a character denoting a file's type as reported +by \fIstat\fP(2) is appended to the filename when listing possible +completions. +.PD +.SS Conditional Constructs +.PP +Readline implements a facility similar in spirit to the conditional +compilation features of the C preprocessor which allows key +bindings and variable settings to be performed as the result +of tests. There are four parser directives used. +.IP \fB$if\fP +The +.B $if +construct allows bindings to be made based on the +editing mode, the terminal being used, or the application using +readline. The text of the test extends to the end of the line; +no characters are required to isolate it. +.RS +.IP \fBmode\fP +The \fBmode=\fP form of the \fB$if\fP directive is used to test +whether readline is in emacs or vi mode. +This may be used in conjunction +with the \fBset keymap\fP command, for instance, to set bindings in +the \fIemacs-standard\fP and \fIemacs-ctlx\fP keymaps only if +readline is starting out in emacs mode. +.IP \fBterm\fP +The \fBterm=\fP form may be used to include terminal-specific +key bindings, perhaps to bind the key sequences output by the +terminal's function keys. The word on the right side of the +.B = +is tested against the full name of the terminal and the portion +of the terminal name before the first \fB\-\fP. This allows +.I sun +to match both +.I sun +and +.IR sun\-cmd , +for instance. +.IP \fBapplication\fP +The \fBapplication\fP construct is used to include +application-specific settings. Each program using the readline +library sets the \fIapplication name\fP, and an initialization +file can test for a particular value. +This could be used to bind key sequences to functions useful for +a specific program. For instance, the following command adds a +key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash: +.sp 1 +.RS +.nf +\fB$if\fP Bash +# Quote the current or previous word +"\eC-xq": "\eeb\e"\eef\e"" +\fB$endif\fP +.fi +.RE +.RE +.IP \fB$endif\fP +This command, as seen in the previous example, terminates an +\fB$if\fP command. +.IP \fB$else\fP +Commands in this branch of the \fB$if\fP directive are executed if +the test fails. +.IP \fB$include\fP +This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads commands +and bindings from that file. For example, the following directive +would read \fI/etc/inputrc\fP: +.sp 1 +.RS +.nf +\fB$include\fP \^ \fI/etc/inputrc\fP +.fi +.RE +.SH SEARCHING +.PP +Readline provides commands for searching through the command history +for lines containing a specified string. +There are two search modes: +.I incremental +and +.IR non-incremental . +.PP +Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the +search string. +As each character of the search string is typed, readline displays +the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far. +An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to +find the desired history entry. +To search backward in the history for a particular string, type +\fBC\-r\fP. Typing \fBC\-s\fP searches forward through the history. +The characters present in the value of the \fBisearch-terminators\fP +variable are used to terminate an incremental search. +If that variable has not been assigned a value the \fIEscape\fP and +\fBC\-J\fP characters will terminate an incremental search. +\fBC\-G\fP will abort an incremental search and restore the original +line. +When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the +search string becomes the current line. +.PP +To find other matching entries in the history list, type \fBC\-s\fP or +\fBC\-r\fP as appropriate. +This will search backward or forward in the history for the next +line matching the search string typed so far. +Any other key sequence bound to a readline command will terminate +the search and execute that command. +For instance, a newline will terminate the search and accept +the line, thereby executing the command from the history list. +A movement command will terminate the search, make the last line found +the current line, and begin editing. +.PP +Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting +to search for matching history lines. The search string may be +typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line. +.SH EDITING COMMANDS +.PP +The following is a list of the names of the commands and the default +key sequences to which they are bound. +Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default. +.PP +In the following descriptions, \fIpoint\fP refers to the current cursor +position, and \fImark\fP refers to a cursor position saved by the +\fBset\-mark\fP command. +The text between the point and mark is referred to as the \fIregion\fP. +.SS Commands for Moving +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B beginning\-of\-line (C\-a) +Move to the start of the current line. +.TP +.B end\-of\-line (C\-e) +Move to the end of the line. +.TP +.B forward\-char (C\-f) +Move forward a character. +.TP +.B backward\-char (C\-b) +Move back a character. +.TP +.B forward\-word (M\-f) +Move forward to the end of the next word. Words are composed of +alphanumeric characters (letters and digits). +.TP +.B backward\-word (M\-b) +Move back to the start of the current or previous word. Words are +composed of alphanumeric characters (letters and digits). +.TP +.B clear\-screen (C\-l) +Clear the screen leaving the current line at the top of the screen. +With an argument, refresh the current line without clearing the +screen. +.TP +.B redraw\-current\-line +Refresh the current line. +.PD +.SS Commands for Manipulating the History +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B accept\-line (Newline, Return) +Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is. +If this line is +non-empty, it may be added to the history list for future recall with +\fBadd_history()\fP. +If the line is a modified history line, the history line is restored to its original state. +.TP +.B previous\-history (C\-p) +Fetch the previous command from the history list, moving back in +the list. +.TP +.B next\-history (C\-n) +Fetch the next command from the history list, moving forward in the +list. +.TP +.B beginning\-of\-history (M\-<) +Move to the first line in the history. +.TP +.B end\-of\-history (M\->) +Move to the end of the input history, i.e., the line currently being +entered. +.TP +.B reverse\-search\-history (C\-r) +Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up' through +the history as necessary. This is an incremental search. +.TP +.B forward\-search\-history (C\-s) +Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down' through +the history as necessary. This is an incremental search. +.TP +.B non\-incremental\-reverse\-search\-history (M\-p) +Search backward through the history starting at the current line +using a non-incremental search for a string supplied by the user. +.TP +.B non\-incremental\-forward\-search\-history (M\-n) +Search forward through the history using a non-incremental search +for a string supplied by the user. +.TP +.B history\-search\-forward +Search forward through the history for the string of characters +between the start of the current line and the current cursor +position (the \fIpoint\fP). +This is a non-incremental search. +.TP +.B history\-search\-backward +Search backward through the history for the string of characters +between the start of the current line and the point. +This is a non-incremental search. +.TP +.B yank\-nth\-arg (M\-C\-y) +Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually +the second word on the previous line) at point. +With an argument +.IR n , +insert the \fIn\fPth word from the previous command (the words +in the previous command begin with word 0). A negative argument +inserts the \fIn\fPth word from the end of the previous command. +Once the argument \fIn\fP is computed, the argument is extracted +as if the "!\fIn\fP" history expansion had been specified. +.TP +.B +yank\-last\-arg (M\-.\^, M\-_\^) +Insert the last argument to the previous command (the last word of +the previous history entry). With an argument, +behave exactly like \fByank\-nth\-arg\fP. +Successive calls to \fByank\-last\-arg\fP move back through the history +list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn. +The history expansion facilities are used to extract the last argument, +as if the "!$" history expansion had been specified. +.PD +.SS Commands for Changing Text +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B delete\-char (C\-d) +Delete the character at point. If point is at the +beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and +the last character typed was not bound to \fBdelete\-char\fP, then return +.SM +.BR EOF . +.TP +.B backward\-delete\-char (Rubout) +Delete the character behind the cursor. When given a numeric argument, +save the deleted text on the kill ring. +.TP +.B forward\-backward\-delete\-char +Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the +end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is +deleted. +.TP +.B quoted\-insert (C\-q, C\-v) +Add the next character that you type to the line verbatim. This is +how to insert characters like \fBC\-q\fP, for example. +.TP +.B tab\-insert (M-TAB) +Insert a tab character. +.TP +.B self\-insert (a,\ b,\ A,\ 1,\ !,\ ...) +Insert the character typed. +.TP +.B transpose\-chars (C\-t) +Drag the character before point forward over the character at point, +moving point forward as well. +If point is at the end of the line, then this transposes +the two characters before point. +Negative arguments have no effect. +.TP +.B transpose\-words (M\-t) +Drag the word before point past the word after point, +moving point over that word as well. +If point is at the end of the line, this transposes +the last two words on the line. +.TP +.B upcase\-word (M\-u) +Uppercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +uppercase the previous word, but do not move point. +.TP +.B downcase\-word (M\-l) +Lowercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +lowercase the previous word, but do not move point. +.TP +.B capitalize\-word (M\-c) +Capitalize the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +capitalize the previous word, but do not move point. +.TP +.B overwrite\-mode +Toggle overwrite mode. With an explicit positive numeric argument, +switches to overwrite mode. With an explicit non-positive numeric +argument, switches to insert mode. This command affects only +\fBemacs\fP mode; \fBvi\fP mode does overwrite differently. +Each call to \fIreadline()\fP starts in insert mode. +In overwrite mode, characters bound to \fBself\-insert\fP replace +the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right. +Characters bound to \fBbackward\-delete\-char\fP replace the character +before point with a space. By default, this command is unbound. +.PD +.SS Killing and Yanking +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B kill\-line (C\-k) +Kill the text from point to the end of the line. +.TP +.B backward\-kill\-line (C\-x Rubout) +Kill backward to the beginning of the line. +.TP +.B unix\-line\-discard (C\-u) +Kill backward from point to the beginning of the line. +The killed text is saved on the kill-ring. +.\" There is no real difference between this and backward-kill-line +.TP +.B kill\-whole\-line +Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is. +.TP +.B kill\-word (M\-d) +Kill from point the end of the current word, or if between +words, to the end of the next word. Word boundaries are the same as +those used by \fBforward\-word\fP. +.TP +.B backward\-kill\-word (M\-Rubout) +Kill the word behind point. +Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBbackward\-word\fP. +.TP +.B unix\-word\-rubout (C\-w) +Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary. +The killed text is saved on the kill-ring. +.TP +.B unix\-filename\-rubout +Kill the word behind point, using white space and the slash character +as the word boundaries. +The killed text is saved on the kill-ring. +.TP +.B delete\-horizontal\-space (M\-\e) +Delete all spaces and tabs around point. +.TP +.B kill\-region +Kill the text between the point and \fImark\fP (saved cursor position). +This text is referred to as the \fIregion\fP. +.TP +.B copy\-region\-as\-kill +Copy the text in the region to the kill buffer. +.TP +.B copy\-backward\-word +Copy the word before point to the kill buffer. +The word boundaries are the same as \fBbackward\-word\fP. +.TP +.B copy\-forward\-word +Copy the word following point to the kill buffer. +The word boundaries are the same as \fBforward\-word\fP. +.TP +.B yank (C\-y) +Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point. +.TP +.B yank\-pop (M\-y) +Rotate the kill ring, and yank the new top. Only works following +.B yank +or +.BR yank\-pop . +.PD +.SS Numeric Arguments +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B digit\-argument (M\-0, M\-1, ..., M\-\-) +Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new +argument. M\-\- starts a negative argument. +.TP +.B universal\-argument +This is another way to specify an argument. +If this command is followed by one or more digits, optionally with a +leading minus sign, those digits define the argument. +If the command is followed by digits, executing +.B universal\-argument +again ends the numeric argument, but is otherwise ignored. +As a special case, if this command is immediately followed by a +character that is neither a digit or minus sign, the argument count +for the next command is multiplied by four. +The argument count is initially one, so executing this function the +first time makes the argument count four, a second time makes the +argument count sixteen, and so on. +.PD +.SS Completing +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B complete (TAB) +Attempt to perform completion on the text before point. +The actual completion performed is application-specific. +.BR Bash , +for instance, attempts completion treating the text as a variable +(if the text begins with \fB$\fP), username (if the text begins with +\fB~\fP), hostname (if the text begins with \fB@\fP), or +command (including aliases and functions) in turn. If none +of these produces a match, filename completion is attempted. +.BR Gdb , +on the other hand, +allows completion of program functions and variables, and +only attempts filename completion under certain circumstances. +.TP +.B possible\-completions (M\-?) +List the possible completions of the text before point. +.TP +.B insert\-completions (M\-*) +Insert all completions of the text before point +that would have been generated by +\fBpossible\-completions\fP. +.TP +.B menu\-complete +Similar to \fBcomplete\fP, but replaces the word to be completed +with a single match from the list of possible completions. +Repeated execution of \fBmenu\-complete\fP steps through the list +of possible completions, inserting each match in turn. +At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung +(subject to the setting of \fBbell\-style\fP) +and the original text is restored. +An argument of \fIn\fP moves \fIn\fP positions forward in the list +of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward +through the list. +This command is intended to be bound to \fBTAB\fP, but is unbound +by default. +.TP +.B delete\-char\-or\-list +Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or +end of the line (like \fBdelete-char\fP). +If at the end of the line, behaves identically to +\fBpossible-completions\fP. +.PD +.SS Keyboard Macros +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B start\-kbd\-macro (C\-x (\^) +Begin saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro. +.TP +.B end\-kbd\-macro (C\-x )\^) +Stop saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro +and store the definition. +.TP +.B call\-last\-kbd\-macro (C\-x e) +Re-execute the last keyboard macro defined, by making the characters +in the macro appear as if typed at the keyboard. +.PD +.SS Miscellaneous +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B re\-read\-init\-file (C\-x C\-r) +Read in the contents of the \fIinputrc\fP file, and incorporate +any bindings or variable assignments found there. +.TP +.B abort (C\-g) +Abort the current editing command and +ring the terminal's bell (subject to the setting of +.BR bell\-style ). +.TP +.B do\-uppercase\-version (M\-a, M\-b, M\-\fIx\fP, ...) +If the metafied character \fIx\fP is lowercase, run the command +that is bound to the corresponding uppercase character. +.TP +.B prefix\-meta (ESC) +Metafy the next character typed. +.SM +.B ESC +.B f +is equivalent to +.BR Meta\-f . +.TP +.B undo (C\-_, C\-x C\-u) +Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line. +.TP +.B revert\-line (M\-r) +Undo all changes made to this line. This is like executing the +.B undo +command enough times to return the line to its initial state. +.TP +.B tilde\-expand (M\-&) +Perform tilde expansion on the current word. +.TP +.B set\-mark (C\-@, M\-) +Set the mark to the point. If a +numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position. +.TP +.B exchange\-point\-and\-mark (C\-x C\-x) +Swap the point with the mark. The current cursor position is set to +the saved position, and the old cursor position is saved as the mark. +.TP +.B character\-search (C\-]) +A character is read and point is moved to the next occurrence of that +character. A negative count searches for previous occurrences. +.TP +.B character\-search\-backward (M\-C\-]) +A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence of that +character. A negative count searches for subsequent occurrences. +.TP +.B insert\-comment (M\-#) +Without a numeric argument, the value of the readline +.B comment\-begin +variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line. +If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle: if +the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value +of \fBcomment\-begin\fP, the value is inserted, otherwise +the characters in \fBcomment-begin\fP are deleted from the beginning of +the line. +In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed. +The default value of +.B comment\-begin +makes the current line a shell comment. +If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line +will be executed by the shell. +.TP +.B dump\-functions +Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the +readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an \fIinputrc\fP file. +.TP +.B dump\-variables +Print all of the settable variables and their values to the +readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an \fIinputrc\fP file. +.TP +.B dump\-macros +Print all of the readline key sequences bound to macros and the +strings they output. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an \fIinputrc\fP file. +.TP +.B emacs\-editing\-mode (C\-e) +When in +.B vi +command mode, this causes a switch to +.B emacs +editing mode. +.TP +.B vi\-editing\-mode (M\-C\-j) +When in +.B emacs +editing mode, this causes a switch to +.B vi +editing mode. +.PD +.SH DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS +.LP +The following is a list of the default emacs and vi bindings. +Characters with the eighth bit set are written as M\-, and +are referred to as +.I metafied +characters. +The printable ASCII characters not mentioned in the list of emacs +standard bindings are bound to the +.B self\-insert +function, which just inserts the given character into the input line. +In vi insertion mode, all characters not specifically mentioned are +bound to +.BR self\-insert . +Characters assigned to signal generation by +.IR stty (1) +or the terminal driver, such as C-Z or C-C, +retain that function. +Upper and lower case metafied characters are bound to the same function in +the emacs mode meta keymap. +The remaining characters are unbound, which causes readline +to ring the bell (subject to the setting of the +.B bell\-style +variable). +.SS Emacs Mode +.RS +.6i +.nf +.ta 2.5i +.sp +Emacs Standard bindings +.sp +"C-@" set-mark +"C-A" beginning-of-line +"C-B" backward-char +"C-D" delete-char +"C-E" end-of-line +"C-F" forward-char +"C-G" abort +"C-H" backward-delete-char +"C-I" complete +"C-J" accept-line +"C-K" kill-line +"C-L" clear-screen +"C-M" accept-line +"C-N" next-history +"C-P" previous-history +"C-Q" quoted-insert +"C-R" reverse-search-history +"C-S" forward-search-history +"C-T" transpose-chars +"C-U" unix-line-discard +"C-V" quoted-insert +"C-W" unix-word-rubout +"C-Y" yank +"C-]" character-search +"C-_" undo +"\^ " to "/" self-insert +"0" to "9" self-insert +":" to "~" self-insert +"C-?" backward-delete-char +.PP +Emacs Meta bindings +.sp +"M-C-G" abort +"M-C-H" backward-kill-word +"M-C-I" tab-insert +"M-C-J" vi-editing-mode +"M-C-M" vi-editing-mode +"M-C-R" revert-line +"M-C-Y" yank-nth-arg +"M-C-[" complete +"M-C-]" character-search-backward +"M-space" set-mark +"M-#" insert-comment +"M-&" tilde-expand +"M-*" insert-completions +"M--" digit-argument +"M-." yank-last-arg +"M-0" digit-argument +"M-1" digit-argument +"M-2" digit-argument +"M-3" digit-argument +"M-4" digit-argument +"M-5" digit-argument +"M-6" digit-argument +"M-7" digit-argument +"M-8" digit-argument +"M-9" digit-argument +"M-<" beginning-of-history +"M-=" possible-completions +"M->" end-of-history +"M-?" possible-completions +"M-B" backward-word +"M-C" capitalize-word +"M-D" kill-word +"M-F" forward-word +"M-L" downcase-word +"M-N" non-incremental-forward-search-history +"M-P" non-incremental-reverse-search-history +"M-R" revert-line +"M-T" transpose-words +"M-U" upcase-word +"M-Y" yank-pop +"M-\e" delete-horizontal-space +"M-~" tilde-expand +"M-C-?" backward-kill-word +"M-_" yank-last-arg +.PP +Emacs Control-X bindings +.sp +"C-XC-G" abort +"C-XC-R" re-read-init-file +"C-XC-U" undo +"C-XC-X" exchange-point-and-mark +"C-X(" start-kbd-macro +"C-X)" end-kbd-macro +"C-XE" call-last-kbd-macro +"C-XC-?" backward-kill-line +.sp +.RE +.SS VI Mode bindings +.RS +.6i +.nf +.ta 2.5i +.sp +.PP +VI Insert Mode functions +.sp +"C-D" vi-eof-maybe +"C-H" backward-delete-char +"C-I" complete +"C-J" accept-line +"C-M" accept-line +"C-R" reverse-search-history +"C-S" forward-search-history +"C-T" transpose-chars +"C-U" unix-line-discard +"C-V" quoted-insert +"C-W" unix-word-rubout +"C-Y" yank +"C-[" vi-movement-mode +"C-_" undo +"\^ " to "~" self-insert +"C-?" backward-delete-char +.PP +VI Command Mode functions +.sp +"C-D" vi-eof-maybe +"C-E" emacs-editing-mode +"C-G" abort +"C-H" backward-char +"C-J" accept-line +"C-K" kill-line +"C-L" clear-screen +"C-M" accept-line +"C-N" next-history +"C-P" previous-history +"C-Q" quoted-insert +"C-R" reverse-search-history +"C-S" forward-search-history +"C-T" transpose-chars +"C-U" unix-line-discard +"C-V" quoted-insert +"C-W" unix-word-rubout +"C-Y" yank +"C-_" vi-undo +"\^ " forward-char +"#" insert-comment +"$" end-of-line +"%" vi-match +"&" vi-tilde-expand +"*" vi-complete +"+" next-history +"," vi-char-search +"-" previous-history +"." vi-redo +"/" vi-search +"0" beginning-of-line +"1" to "9" vi-arg-digit +";" vi-char-search +"=" vi-complete +"?" vi-search +"A" vi-append-eol +"B" vi-prev-word +"C" vi-change-to +"D" vi-delete-to +"E" vi-end-word +"F" vi-char-search +"G" vi-fetch-history +"I" vi-insert-beg +"N" vi-search-again +"P" vi-put +"R" vi-replace +"S" vi-subst +"T" vi-char-search +"U" revert-line +"W" vi-next-word +"X" backward-delete-char +"Y" vi-yank-to +"\e" vi-complete +"^" vi-first-print +"_" vi-yank-arg +"`" vi-goto-mark +"a" vi-append-mode +"b" vi-prev-word +"c" vi-change-to +"d" vi-delete-to +"e" vi-end-word +"f" vi-char-search +"h" backward-char +"i" vi-insertion-mode +"j" next-history +"k" prev-history +"l" forward-char +"m" vi-set-mark +"n" vi-search-again +"p" vi-put +"r" vi-change-char +"s" vi-subst +"t" vi-char-search +"u" vi-undo +"w" vi-next-word +"x" vi-delete +"y" vi-yank-to +"|" vi-column +"~" vi-change-case +.RE +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PD 0 +.TP +\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey +.TP +\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey +.TP +\fIbash\fP(1) +.PD +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP +.FN ~/.inputrc +Individual \fBreadline\fP initialization file +.PD +.SH AUTHORS +Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation +.br +bfox@gnu.org +.PP +Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University +.br +chet@ins.CWRU.Edu +.SH BUG REPORTS +If you find a bug in +.B readline, +you should report it. But first, you should +make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest +version of the +.B readline +library that you have. +.PP +Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, mail a +bug report to \fIbug\-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP. +If you have a fix, you are welcome to mail that +as well! Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed +to \fPbug-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet +newsgroup +.BR gnu.bash.bug . +.PP +Comments and bug reports concerning +this manual page should be directed to +.IR chet@ins.CWRU.Edu . +.SH BUGS +.PP +It's too big and too slow. Index: rluser.texi =================================================================== --- rluser.texi (nonexistent) +++ rluser.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,1846 @@ +@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setfilename rluser.info +@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setchapternewpage odd + +@ignore +This file documents the end user interface to the GNU command line +editing features. It is to be an appendix to manuals for programs which +use these features. There is a document entitled "readline.texinfo" +which contains both end-user and programmer documentation for the +GNU Readline Library. + +Copyright (C) 1988-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey. + +Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission notice +identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this +paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual +provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on +all copies. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +GNU Copyright statement is available to the distributee, and provided that +the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a +permission notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. +@end ignore + +@comment If you are including this manual as an appendix, then set the +@comment variable readline-appendix. + +@ifclear BashFeatures +@defcodeindex bt +@end ifclear + +@node Command Line Editing +@chapter Command Line Editing + +This chapter describes the basic features of the @sc{gnu} +command line editing interface. +@ifset BashFeatures +Command line editing is provided by the Readline library, which is +used by several different programs, including Bash. +@end ifset + +@menu +* Introduction and Notation:: Notation used in this text. +* Readline Interaction:: The minimum set of commands for editing a line. +* Readline Init File:: Customizing Readline from a user's view. +* Bindable Readline Commands:: A description of most of the Readline commands + available for binding +* Readline vi Mode:: A short description of how to make Readline + behave like the vi editor. +@ifset BashFeatures +* Programmable Completion:: How to specify the possible completions for + a specific command. +* Programmable Completion Builtins:: Builtin commands to specify how to + complete arguments for a particular command. +@end ifset +@end menu + +@node Introduction and Notation +@section Introduction to Line Editing + +The following paragraphs describe the notation used to represent +keystrokes. + +The text @kbd{C-k} is read as `Control-K' and describes the character +produced when the @key{k} key is pressed while the Control key +is depressed. + +The text @kbd{M-k} is read as `Meta-K' and describes the character +produced when the Meta key (if you have one) is depressed, and the @key{k} +key is pressed. +The Meta key is labeled @key{ALT} on many keyboards. +On keyboards with two keys labeled @key{ALT} (usually to either side of +the space bar), the @key{ALT} on the left side is generally set to +work as a Meta key. +The @key{ALT} key on the right may also be configured to work as a +Meta key or may be configured as some other modifier, such as a +Compose key for typing accented characters. + +If you do not have a Meta or @key{ALT} key, or another key working as +a Meta key, the identical keystroke can be generated by typing @key{ESC} +@emph{first}, and then typing @key{k}. +Either process is known as @dfn{metafying} the @key{k} key. + +The text @kbd{M-C-k} is read as `Meta-Control-k' and describes the +character produced by @dfn{metafying} @kbd{C-k}. + +In addition, several keys have their own names. Specifically, +@key{DEL}, @key{ESC}, @key{LFD}, @key{SPC}, @key{RET}, and @key{TAB} all +stand for themselves when seen in this text, or in an init file +(@pxref{Readline Init File}). +If your keyboard lacks a @key{LFD} key, typing @key{C-j} will +produce the desired character. +The @key{RET} key may be labeled @key{Return} or @key{Enter} on +some keyboards. + +@node Readline Interaction +@section Readline Interaction +@cindex interaction, readline + +Often during an interactive session you type in a long line of text, +only to notice that the first word on the line is misspelled. The +Readline library gives you a set of commands for manipulating the text +as you type it in, allowing you to just fix your typo, and not forcing +you to retype the majority of the line. Using these editing commands, +you move the cursor to the place that needs correction, and delete or +insert the text of the corrections. Then, when you are satisfied with +the line, you simply press @key{RET}. You do not have to be at the +end of the line to press @key{RET}; the entire line is accepted +regardless of the location of the cursor within the line. + +@menu +* Readline Bare Essentials:: The least you need to know about Readline. +* Readline Movement Commands:: Moving about the input line. +* Readline Killing Commands:: How to delete text, and how to get it back! +* Readline Arguments:: Giving numeric arguments to commands. +* Searching:: Searching through previous lines. +@end menu + +@node Readline Bare Essentials +@subsection Readline Bare Essentials +@cindex notation, readline +@cindex command editing +@cindex editing command lines + +In order to enter characters into the line, simply type them. The typed +character appears where the cursor was, and then the cursor moves one +space to the right. If you mistype a character, you can use your +erase character to back up and delete the mistyped character. + +Sometimes you may mistype a character, and +not notice the error until you have typed several other characters. In +that case, you can type @kbd{C-b} to move the cursor to the left, and then +correct your mistake. Afterwards, you can move the cursor to the right +with @kbd{C-f}. + +When you add text in the middle of a line, you will notice that characters +to the right of the cursor are `pushed over' to make room for the text +that you have inserted. Likewise, when you delete text behind the cursor, +characters to the right of the cursor are `pulled back' to fill in the +blank space created by the removal of the text. A list of the bare +essentials for editing the text of an input line follows. + +@table @asis +@item @kbd{C-b} +Move back one character. +@item @kbd{C-f} +Move forward one character. +@item @key{DEL} or @key{Backspace} +Delete the character to the left of the cursor. +@item @kbd{C-d} +Delete the character underneath the cursor. +@item @w{Printing characters} +Insert the character into the line at the cursor. +@item @kbd{C-_} or @kbd{C-x C-u} +Undo the last editing command. You can undo all the way back to an +empty line. +@end table + +@noindent +(Depending on your configuration, the @key{Backspace} key be set to +delete the character to the left of the cursor and the @key{DEL} key set +to delete the character underneath the cursor, like @kbd{C-d}, rather +than the character to the left of the cursor.) + +@node Readline Movement Commands +@subsection Readline Movement Commands + + +The above table describes the most basic keystrokes that you need +in order to do editing of the input line. For your convenience, many +other commands have been added in addition to @kbd{C-b}, @kbd{C-f}, +@kbd{C-d}, and @key{DEL}. Here are some commands for moving more rapidly +about the line. + +@table @kbd +@item C-a +Move to the start of the line. +@item C-e +Move to the end of the line. +@item M-f +Move forward a word, where a word is composed of letters and digits. +@item M-b +Move backward a word. +@item C-l +Clear the screen, reprinting the current line at the top. +@end table + +Notice how @kbd{C-f} moves forward a character, while @kbd{M-f} moves +forward a word. It is a loose convention that control keystrokes +operate on characters while meta keystrokes operate on words. + +@node Readline Killing Commands +@subsection Readline Killing Commands + +@cindex killing text +@cindex yanking text + +@dfn{Killing} text means to delete the text from the line, but to save +it away for later use, usually by @dfn{yanking} (re-inserting) +it back into the line. +(`Cut' and `paste' are more recent jargon for `kill' and `yank'.) + +If the description for a command says that it `kills' text, then you can +be sure that you can get the text back in a different (or the same) +place later. + +When you use a kill command, the text is saved in a @dfn{kill-ring}. +Any number of consecutive kills save all of the killed text together, so +that when you yank it back, you get it all. The kill +ring is not line specific; the text that you killed on a previously +typed line is available to be yanked back later, when you are typing +another line. +@cindex kill ring + +Here is the list of commands for killing text. + +@table @kbd +@item C-k +Kill the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line. + +@item M-d +Kill from the cursor to the end of the current word, or, if between +words, to the end of the next word. +Word boundaries are the same as those used by @kbd{M-f}. + +@item M-@key{DEL} +Kill from the cursor the start of the current word, or, if between +words, to the start of the previous word. +Word boundaries are the same as those used by @kbd{M-b}. + +@item C-w +Kill from the cursor to the previous whitespace. This is different than +@kbd{M-@key{DEL}} because the word boundaries differ. + +@end table + +Here is how to @dfn{yank} the text back into the line. Yanking +means to copy the most-recently-killed text from the kill buffer. + +@table @kbd +@item C-y +Yank the most recently killed text back into the buffer at the cursor. + +@item M-y +Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top. You can only do this if +the prior command is @kbd{C-y} or @kbd{M-y}. +@end table + +@node Readline Arguments +@subsection Readline Arguments + +You can pass numeric arguments to Readline commands. Sometimes the +argument acts as a repeat count, other times it is the @i{sign} of the +argument that is significant. If you pass a negative argument to a +command which normally acts in a forward direction, that command will +act in a backward direction. For example, to kill text back to the +start of the line, you might type @samp{M-- C-k}. + +The general way to pass numeric arguments to a command is to type meta +digits before the command. If the first `digit' typed is a minus +sign (@samp{-}), then the sign of the argument will be negative. Once +you have typed one meta digit to get the argument started, you can type +the remainder of the digits, and then the command. For example, to give +the @kbd{C-d} command an argument of 10, you could type @samp{M-1 0 C-d}, +which will delete the next ten characters on the input line. + +@node Searching +@subsection Searching for Commands in the History + +Readline provides commands for searching through the command history +@ifset BashFeatures +(@pxref{Bash History Facilities}) +@end ifset +for lines containing a specified string. +There are two search modes: @dfn{incremental} and @dfn{non-incremental}. + +Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the +search string. +As each character of the search string is typed, Readline displays +the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far. +An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to +find the desired history entry. +To search backward in the history for a particular string, type +@kbd{C-r}. Typing @kbd{C-s} searches forward through the history. +The characters present in the value of the @code{isearch-terminators} variable +are used to terminate an incremental search. +If that variable has not been assigned a value, the @key{ESC} and +@kbd{C-J} characters will terminate an incremental search. +@kbd{C-g} will abort an incremental search and restore the original line. +When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the +search string becomes the current line. + +To find other matching entries in the history list, type @kbd{C-r} or +@kbd{C-s} as appropriate. +This will search backward or forward in the history for the next +entry matching the search string typed so far. +Any other key sequence bound to a Readline command will terminate +the search and execute that command. +For instance, a @key{RET} will terminate the search and accept +the line, thereby executing the command from the history list. +A movement command will terminate the search, make the last line found +the current line, and begin editing. + +Readline remembers the last incremental search string. If two +@kbd{C-r}s are typed without any intervening characters defining a new +search string, any remembered search string is used. + +Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting +to search for matching history lines. The search string may be +typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line. + +@node Readline Init File +@section Readline Init File +@cindex initialization file, readline + +Although the Readline library comes with a set of Emacs-like +keybindings installed by default, it is possible to use a different set +of keybindings. +Any user can customize programs that use Readline by putting +commands in an @dfn{inputrc} file, conventionally in his home directory. +The name of this +@ifset BashFeatures +file is taken from the value of the shell variable @env{INPUTRC}. If +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +file is taken from the value of the environment variable @env{INPUTRC}. If +@end ifclear +that variable is unset, the default is @file{~/.inputrc}. + +When a program which uses the Readline library starts up, the +init file is read, and the key bindings are set. + +In addition, the @code{C-x C-r} command re-reads this init file, thus +incorporating any changes that you might have made to it. + +@menu +* Readline Init File Syntax:: Syntax for the commands in the inputrc file. + +* Conditional Init Constructs:: Conditional key bindings in the inputrc file. + +* Sample Init File:: An example inputrc file. +@end menu + +@node Readline Init File Syntax +@subsection Readline Init File Syntax + +There are only a few basic constructs allowed in the +Readline init file. Blank lines are ignored. +Lines beginning with a @samp{#} are comments. +Lines beginning with a @samp{$} indicate conditional +constructs (@pxref{Conditional Init Constructs}). Other lines +denote variable settings and key bindings. + +@table @asis +@item Variable Settings +You can modify the run-time behavior of Readline by +altering the values of variables in Readline +using the @code{set} command within the init file. +The syntax is simple: + +@example +set @var{variable} @var{value} +@end example + +@noindent +Here, for example, is how to +change from the default Emacs-like key binding to use +@code{vi} line editing commands: + +@example +set editing-mode vi +@end example + +Variable names and values, where appropriate, are recognized without regard +to case. Unrecognized variable names are ignored. + +Boolean variables (those that can be set to on or off) are set to on if +the value is null or empty, @var{on} (case-insensitive), or 1. Any other +value results in the variable being set to off. + +@ifset BashFeatures +The @w{@code{bind -V}} command lists the current Readline variable names +and values. @xref{Bash Builtins}. +@end ifset + +A great deal of run-time behavior is changeable with the following +variables. + +@cindex variables, readline +@table @code + +@item bell-style +@vindex bell-style +Controls what happens when Readline wants to ring the terminal bell. +If set to @samp{none}, Readline never rings the bell. If set to +@samp{visible}, Readline uses a visible bell if one is available. +If set to @samp{audible} (the default), Readline attempts to ring +the terminal's bell. + +@item bind-tty-special-chars +@vindex bind-tty-special-chars +If set to @samp{on}, Readline attempts to bind the control characters +treated specially by the kernel's terminal driver to their Readline +equivalents. + +@item comment-begin +@vindex comment-begin +The string to insert at the beginning of the line when the +@code{insert-comment} command is executed. The default value +is @code{"#"}. + +@item completion-ignore-case +If set to @samp{on}, Readline performs filename matching and completion +in a case-insensitive fashion. +The default value is @samp{off}. + +@item completion-query-items +@vindex completion-query-items +The number of possible completions that determines when the user is +asked whether the list of possibilities should be displayed. +If the number of possible completions is greater than this value, +Readline will ask the user whether or not he wishes to view +them; otherwise, they are simply listed. +This variable must be set to an integer value greater than or equal to 0. +A negative value means Readline should never ask. +The default limit is @code{100}. + +@item convert-meta +@vindex convert-meta +If set to @samp{on}, Readline will convert characters with the +eighth bit set to an @sc{ascii} key sequence by stripping the eighth +bit and prefixing an @key{ESC} character, converting them to a +meta-prefixed key sequence. The default value is @samp{on}. + +@item disable-completion +@vindex disable-completion +If set to @samp{On}, Readline will inhibit word completion. +Completion characters will be inserted into the line as if they had +been mapped to @code{self-insert}. The default is @samp{off}. + +@item editing-mode +@vindex editing-mode +The @code{editing-mode} variable controls which default set of +key bindings is used. By default, Readline starts up in Emacs editing +mode, where the keystrokes are most similar to Emacs. This variable can be +set to either @samp{emacs} or @samp{vi}. + +@item enable-keypad +@vindex enable-keypad +When set to @samp{on}, Readline will try to enable the application +keypad when it is called. Some systems need this to enable the +arrow keys. The default is @samp{off}. + +@item expand-tilde +@vindex expand-tilde +If set to @samp{on}, tilde expansion is performed when Readline +attempts word completion. The default is @samp{off}. + +@item history-preserve-point +@vindex history-preserve-point +If set to @samp{on}, the history code attempts to place point at the +same location on each history line retrieved with @code{previous-history} +or @code{next-history}. The default is @samp{off}. + +@item horizontal-scroll-mode +@vindex horizontal-scroll-mode +This variable can be set to either @samp{on} or @samp{off}. Setting it +to @samp{on} means that the text of the lines being edited will scroll +horizontally on a single screen line when they are longer than the width +of the screen, instead of wrapping onto a new screen line. By default, +this variable is set to @samp{off}. + +@item input-meta +@vindex input-meta +@vindex meta-flag +If set to @samp{on}, Readline will enable eight-bit input (it +will not clear the eighth bit in the characters it reads), +regardless of what the terminal claims it can support. The +default value is @samp{off}. The name @code{meta-flag} is a +synonym for this variable. + +@item isearch-terminators +@vindex isearch-terminators +The string of characters that should terminate an incremental search without +subsequently executing the character as a command (@pxref{Searching}). +If this variable has not been given a value, the characters @key{ESC} and +@kbd{C-J} will terminate an incremental search. + +@item keymap +@vindex keymap +Sets Readline's idea of the current keymap for key binding commands. +Acceptable @code{keymap} names are +@code{emacs}, +@code{emacs-standard}, +@code{emacs-meta}, +@code{emacs-ctlx}, +@code{vi}, +@code{vi-move}, +@code{vi-command}, and +@code{vi-insert}. +@code{vi} is equivalent to @code{vi-command}; @code{emacs} is +equivalent to @code{emacs-standard}. The default value is @code{emacs}. +The value of the @code{editing-mode} variable also affects the +default keymap. + +@item mark-directories +If set to @samp{on}, completed directory names have a slash +appended. The default is @samp{on}. + +@item mark-modified-lines +@vindex mark-modified-lines +This variable, when set to @samp{on}, causes Readline to display an +asterisk (@samp{*}) at the start of history lines which have been modified. +This variable is @samp{off} by default. + +@item mark-symlinked-directories +@vindex mark-symlinked-directories +If set to @samp{on}, completed names which are symbolic links +to directories have a slash appended (subject to the value of +@code{mark-directories}). +The default is @samp{off}. + +@item match-hidden-files +@vindex match-hidden-files +This variable, when set to @samp{on}, causes Readline to match files whose +names begin with a @samp{.} (hidden files) when performing filename +completion, unless the leading @samp{.} is +supplied by the user in the filename to be completed. +This variable is @samp{on} by default. + +@item output-meta +@vindex output-meta +If set to @samp{on}, Readline will display characters with the +eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape +sequence. The default is @samp{off}. + +@item page-completions +@vindex page-completions +If set to @samp{on}, Readline uses an internal @code{more}-like pager +to display a screenful of possible completions at a time. +This variable is @samp{on} by default. + +@item print-completions-horizontally +If set to @samp{on}, Readline will display completions with matches +sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen. +The default is @samp{off}. + +@item show-all-if-ambiguous +@vindex show-all-if-ambiguous +This alters the default behavior of the completion functions. If +set to @samp{on}, +words which have more than one possible completion cause the +matches to be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell. +The default value is @samp{off}. + +@item show-all-if-unmodified +@vindex show-all-if-unmodified +This alters the default behavior of the completion functions in +a fashion similar to @var{show-all-if-ambiguous}. +If set to @samp{on}, +words which have more than one possible completion without any +possible partial completion (the possible completions don't share +a common prefix) cause the matches to be listed immediately instead +of ringing the bell. +The default value is @samp{off}. + +@item visible-stats +@vindex visible-stats +If set to @samp{on}, a character denoting a file's type +is appended to the filename when listing possible +completions. The default is @samp{off}. + +@end table + +@item Key Bindings +The syntax for controlling key bindings in the init file is +simple. First you need to find the name of the command that you +want to change. The following sections contain tables of the command +name, the default keybinding, if any, and a short description of what +the command does. + +Once you know the name of the command, simply place on a line +in the init file the name of the key +you wish to bind the command to, a colon, and then the name of the +command. The name of the key +can be expressed in different ways, depending on what you find most +comfortable. + +In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound +to a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a @var{macro}). + +@ifset BashFeatures +The @w{@code{bind -p}} command displays Readline function names and +bindings in a format that can put directly into an initialization file. +@xref{Bash Builtins}. +@end ifset + +@table @asis +@item @w{@var{keyname}: @var{function-name} or @var{macro}} +@var{keyname} is the name of a key spelled out in English. For example: +@example +Control-u: universal-argument +Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word +Control-o: "> output" +@end example + +In the above example, @kbd{C-u} is bound to the function +@code{universal-argument}, +@kbd{M-DEL} is bound to the function @code{backward-kill-word}, and +@kbd{C-o} is bound to run the macro +expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text +@samp{> output} into the line). + +A number of symbolic character names are recognized while +processing this key binding syntax: +@var{DEL}, +@var{ESC}, +@var{ESCAPE}, +@var{LFD}, +@var{NEWLINE}, +@var{RET}, +@var{RETURN}, +@var{RUBOUT}, +@var{SPACE}, +@var{SPC}, +and +@var{TAB}. + +@item @w{"@var{keyseq}": @var{function-name} or @var{macro}} +@var{keyseq} differs from @var{keyname} above in that strings +denoting an entire key sequence can be specified, by placing +the key sequence in double quotes. Some @sc{gnu} Emacs style key +escapes can be used, as in the following example, but the +special character names are not recognized. + +@example +"\C-u": universal-argument +"\C-x\C-r": re-read-init-file +"\e[11~": "Function Key 1" +@end example + +In the above example, @kbd{C-u} is again bound to the function +@code{universal-argument} (just as it was in the first example), +@samp{@kbd{C-x} @kbd{C-r}} is bound to the function @code{re-read-init-file}, +and @samp{@key{ESC} @key{[} @key{1} @key{1} @key{~}} is bound to insert +the text @samp{Function Key 1}. + +@end table + +The following @sc{gnu} Emacs style escape sequences are available when +specifying key sequences: + +@table @code +@item @kbd{\C-} +control prefix +@item @kbd{\M-} +meta prefix +@item @kbd{\e} +an escape character +@item @kbd{\\} +backslash +@item @kbd{\"} +@key{"}, a double quotation mark +@item @kbd{\'} +@key{'}, a single quote or apostrophe +@end table + +In addition to the @sc{gnu} Emacs style escape sequences, a second +set of backslash escapes is available: + +@table @code +@item \a +alert (bell) +@item \b +backspace +@item \d +delete +@item \f +form feed +@item \n +newline +@item \r +carriage return +@item \t +horizontal tab +@item \v +vertical tab +@item \@var{nnn} +the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value @var{nnn} +(one to three digits) +@item \x@var{HH} +the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value @var{HH} +(one or two hex digits) +@end table + +When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes must +be used to indicate a macro definition. +Unquoted text is assumed to be a function name. +In the macro body, the backslash escapes described above are expanded. +Backslash will quote any other character in the macro text, +including @samp{"} and @samp{'}. +For example, the following binding will make @samp{@kbd{C-x} \} +insert a single @samp{\} into the line: +@example +"\C-x\\": "\\" +@end example + +@end table + +@node Conditional Init Constructs +@subsection Conditional Init Constructs + +Readline implements a facility similar in spirit to the conditional +compilation features of the C preprocessor which allows key +bindings and variable settings to be performed as the result +of tests. There are four parser directives used. + +@table @code +@item $if +The @code{$if} construct allows bindings to be made based on the +editing mode, the terminal being used, or the application using +Readline. The text of the test extends to the end of the line; +no characters are required to isolate it. + +@table @code +@item mode +The @code{mode=} form of the @code{$if} directive is used to test +whether Readline is in @code{emacs} or @code{vi} mode. +This may be used in conjunction +with the @samp{set keymap} command, for instance, to set bindings in +the @code{emacs-standard} and @code{emacs-ctlx} keymaps only if +Readline is starting out in @code{emacs} mode. + +@item term +The @code{term=} form may be used to include terminal-specific +key bindings, perhaps to bind the key sequences output by the +terminal's function keys. The word on the right side of the +@samp{=} is tested against both the full name of the terminal and +the portion of the terminal name before the first @samp{-}. This +allows @code{sun} to match both @code{sun} and @code{sun-cmd}, +for instance. + +@item application +The @var{application} construct is used to include +application-specific settings. Each program using the Readline +library sets the @var{application name}, and you can test for +a particular value. +This could be used to bind key sequences to functions useful for +a specific program. For instance, the following command adds a +key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash: +@example +$if Bash +# Quote the current or previous word +"\C-xq": "\eb\"\ef\"" +$endif +@end example +@end table + +@item $endif +This command, as seen in the previous example, terminates an +@code{$if} command. + +@item $else +Commands in this branch of the @code{$if} directive are executed if +the test fails. + +@item $include +This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads commands +and bindings from that file. +For example, the following directive reads from @file{/etc/inputrc}: +@example +$include /etc/inputrc +@end example +@end table + +@node Sample Init File +@subsection Sample Init File + +Here is an example of an @var{inputrc} file. This illustrates key +binding, variable assignment, and conditional syntax. + +@example +@page +# This file controls the behaviour of line input editing for +# programs that use the GNU Readline library. Existing +# programs include FTP, Bash, and GDB. +# +# You can re-read the inputrc file with C-x C-r. +# Lines beginning with '#' are comments. +# +# First, include any systemwide bindings and variable +# assignments from /etc/Inputrc +$include /etc/Inputrc + +# +# Set various bindings for emacs mode. + +set editing-mode emacs + +$if mode=emacs + +Meta-Control-h: backward-kill-word Text after the function name is ignored + +# +# Arrow keys in keypad mode +# +#"\M-OD": backward-char +#"\M-OC": forward-char +#"\M-OA": previous-history +#"\M-OB": next-history +# +# Arrow keys in ANSI mode +# +"\M-[D": backward-char +"\M-[C": forward-char +"\M-[A": previous-history +"\M-[B": next-history +# +# Arrow keys in 8 bit keypad mode +# +#"\M-\C-OD": backward-char +#"\M-\C-OC": forward-char +#"\M-\C-OA": previous-history +#"\M-\C-OB": next-history +# +# Arrow keys in 8 bit ANSI mode +# +#"\M-\C-[D": backward-char +#"\M-\C-[C": forward-char +#"\M-\C-[A": previous-history +#"\M-\C-[B": next-history + +C-q: quoted-insert + +$endif + +# An old-style binding. This happens to be the default. +TAB: complete + +# Macros that are convenient for shell interaction +$if Bash +# edit the path +"\C-xp": "PATH=$@{PATH@}\e\C-e\C-a\ef\C-f" +# prepare to type a quoted word -- +# insert open and close double quotes +# and move to just after the open quote +"\C-x\"": "\"\"\C-b" +# insert a backslash (testing backslash escapes +# in sequences and macros) +"\C-x\\": "\\" +# Quote the current or previous word +"\C-xq": "\eb\"\ef\"" +# Add a binding to refresh the line, which is unbound +"\C-xr": redraw-current-line +# Edit variable on current line. +"\M-\C-v": "\C-a\C-k$\C-y\M-\C-e\C-a\C-y=" +$endif + +# use a visible bell if one is available +set bell-style visible + +# don't strip characters to 7 bits when reading +set input-meta on + +# allow iso-latin1 characters to be inserted rather +# than converted to prefix-meta sequences +set convert-meta off + +# display characters with the eighth bit set directly +# rather than as meta-prefixed characters +set output-meta on + +# if there are more than 150 possible completions for +# a word, ask the user if he wants to see all of them +set completion-query-items 150 + +# For FTP +$if Ftp +"\C-xg": "get \M-?" +"\C-xt": "put \M-?" +"\M-.": yank-last-arg +$endif +@end example + +@node Bindable Readline Commands +@section Bindable Readline Commands + +@menu +* Commands For Moving:: Moving about the line. +* Commands For History:: Getting at previous lines. +* Commands For Text:: Commands for changing text. +* Commands For Killing:: Commands for killing and yanking. +* Numeric Arguments:: Specifying numeric arguments, repeat counts. +* Commands For Completion:: Getting Readline to do the typing for you. +* Keyboard Macros:: Saving and re-executing typed characters +* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other miscellaneous commands. +@end menu + +This section describes Readline commands that may be bound to key +sequences. +@ifset BashFeatures +You can list your key bindings by executing +@w{@code{bind -P}} or, for a more terse format, suitable for an +@var{inputrc} file, @w{@code{bind -p}}. (@xref{Bash Builtins}.) +@end ifset +Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default. + +In the following descriptions, @dfn{point} refers to the current cursor +position, and @dfn{mark} refers to a cursor position saved by the +@code{set-mark} command. +The text between the point and mark is referred to as the @dfn{region}. + +@node Commands For Moving +@subsection Commands For Moving +@ftable @code +@item beginning-of-line (C-a) +Move to the start of the current line. + +@item end-of-line (C-e) +Move to the end of the line. + +@item forward-char (C-f) +Move forward a character. + +@item backward-char (C-b) +Move back a character. + +@item forward-word (M-f) +Move forward to the end of the next word. Words are composed of +letters and digits. + +@item backward-word (M-b) +Move back to the start of the current or previous word. Words are +composed of letters and digits. + +@item clear-screen (C-l) +Clear the screen and redraw the current line, +leaving the current line at the top of the screen. + +@item redraw-current-line () +Refresh the current line. By default, this is unbound. + +@end ftable + +@node Commands For History +@subsection Commands For Manipulating The History + +@ftable @code +@item accept-line (Newline or Return) +@ifset BashFeatures +Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is. +If this line is +non-empty, add it to the history list according to the setting of +the @env{HISTCONTROL} and @env{HISTIGNORE} variables. +If this line is a modified history line, then restore the history line +to its original state. +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is. +If this line is +non-empty, it may be added to the history list for future recall with +@code{add_history()}. +If this line is a modified history line, the history line is restored +to its original state. +@end ifclear + +@item previous-history (C-p) +Move `back' through the history list, fetching the previous command. + +@item next-history (C-n) +Move `forward' through the history list, fetching the next command. + +@item beginning-of-history (M-<) +Move to the first line in the history. + +@item end-of-history (M->) +Move to the end of the input history, i.e., the line currently +being entered. + +@item reverse-search-history (C-r) +Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up' through +the history as necessary. This is an incremental search. + +@item forward-search-history (C-s) +Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down' through +the the history as necessary. This is an incremental search. + +@item non-incremental-reverse-search-history (M-p) +Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up' +through the history as necessary using a non-incremental search +for a string supplied by the user. + +@item non-incremental-forward-search-history (M-n) +Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down' +through the the history as necessary using a non-incremental search +for a string supplied by the user. + +@item history-search-forward () +Search forward through the history for the string of characters +between the start of the current line and the point. +This is a non-incremental search. +By default, this command is unbound. + +@item history-search-backward () +Search backward through the history for the string of characters +between the start of the current line and the point. This +is a non-incremental search. By default, this command is unbound. + +@item yank-nth-arg (M-C-y) +Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually +the second word on the previous line) at point. +With an argument @var{n}, +insert the @var{n}th word from the previous command (the words +in the previous command begin with word 0). A negative argument +inserts the @var{n}th word from the end of the previous command. +Once the argument @var{n} is computed, the argument is extracted +as if the @samp{!@var{n}} history expansion had been specified. + +@item yank-last-arg (M-. or M-_) +Insert last argument to the previous command (the last word of the +previous history entry). With an +argument, behave exactly like @code{yank-nth-arg}. +Successive calls to @code{yank-last-arg} move back through the history +list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn. +The history expansion facilities are used to extract the last argument, +as if the @samp{!$} history expansion had been specified. + +@end ftable + +@node Commands For Text +@subsection Commands For Changing Text + +@ftable @code +@item delete-char (C-d) +Delete the character at point. If point is at the +beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and +the last character typed was not bound to @code{delete-char}, then +return @sc{eof}. + +@item backward-delete-char (Rubout) +Delete the character behind the cursor. A numeric argument means +to kill the characters instead of deleting them. + +@item forward-backward-delete-char () +Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the +end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is +deleted. By default, this is not bound to a key. + +@item quoted-insert (C-q or C-v) +Add the next character typed to the line verbatim. This is +how to insert key sequences like @kbd{C-q}, for example. + +@ifclear BashFeatures +@item tab-insert (M-@key{TAB}) +Insert a tab character. +@end ifclear + +@item self-insert (a, b, A, 1, !, @dots{}) +Insert yourself. + +@item transpose-chars (C-t) +Drag the character before the cursor forward over +the character at the cursor, moving the +cursor forward as well. If the insertion point +is at the end of the line, then this +transposes the last two characters of the line. +Negative arguments have no effect. + +@item transpose-words (M-t) +Drag the word before point past the word after point, +moving point past that word as well. +If the insertion point is at the end of the line, this transposes +the last two words on the line. + +@item upcase-word (M-u) +Uppercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +uppercase the previous word, but do not move the cursor. + +@item downcase-word (M-l) +Lowercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +lowercase the previous word, but do not move the cursor. + +@item capitalize-word (M-c) +Capitalize the current (or following) word. With a negative argument, +capitalize the previous word, but do not move the cursor. + +@item overwrite-mode () +Toggle overwrite mode. With an explicit positive numeric argument, +switches to overwrite mode. With an explicit non-positive numeric +argument, switches to insert mode. This command affects only +@code{emacs} mode; @code{vi} mode does overwrite differently. +Each call to @code{readline()} starts in insert mode. + +In overwrite mode, characters bound to @code{self-insert} replace +the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right. +Characters bound to @code{backward-delete-char} replace the character +before point with a space. + +By default, this command is unbound. + +@end ftable + +@node Commands For Killing +@subsection Killing And Yanking + +@ftable @code + +@item kill-line (C-k) +Kill the text from point to the end of the line. + +@item backward-kill-line (C-x Rubout) +Kill backward to the beginning of the line. + +@item unix-line-discard (C-u) +Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + +@item kill-whole-line () +Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is. +By default, this is unbound. + +@item kill-word (M-d) +Kill from point to the end of the current word, or if between +words, to the end of the next word. +Word boundaries are the same as @code{forward-word}. + +@item backward-kill-word (M-@key{DEL}) +Kill the word behind point. +Word boundaries are the same as @code{backward-word}. + +@item unix-word-rubout (C-w) +Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary. +The killed text is saved on the kill-ring. + +@item unix-filename-rubout () +Kill the word behind point, using white space and the slash character +as the word boundaries. +The killed text is saved on the kill-ring. + +@item delete-horizontal-space () +Delete all spaces and tabs around point. By default, this is unbound. + +@item kill-region () +Kill the text in the current region. +By default, this command is unbound. + +@item copy-region-as-kill () +Copy the text in the region to the kill buffer, so it can be yanked +right away. By default, this command is unbound. + +@item copy-backward-word () +Copy the word before point to the kill buffer. +The word boundaries are the same as @code{backward-word}. +By default, this command is unbound. + +@item copy-forward-word () +Copy the word following point to the kill buffer. +The word boundaries are the same as @code{forward-word}. +By default, this command is unbound. + +@item yank (C-y) +Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point. + +@item yank-pop (M-y) +Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top. You can only do this if +the prior command is @code{yank} or @code{yank-pop}. +@end ftable + +@node Numeric Arguments +@subsection Specifying Numeric Arguments +@ftable @code + +@item digit-argument (@kbd{M-0}, @kbd{M-1}, @dots{} @kbd{M--}) +Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new +argument. @kbd{M--} starts a negative argument. + +@item universal-argument () +This is another way to specify an argument. +If this command is followed by one or more digits, optionally with a +leading minus sign, those digits define the argument. +If the command is followed by digits, executing @code{universal-argument} +again ends the numeric argument, but is otherwise ignored. +As a special case, if this command is immediately followed by a +character that is neither a digit or minus sign, the argument count +for the next command is multiplied by four. +The argument count is initially one, so executing this function the +first time makes the argument count four, a second time makes the +argument count sixteen, and so on. +By default, this is not bound to a key. +@end ftable + +@node Commands For Completion +@subsection Letting Readline Type For You + +@ftable @code +@item complete (@key{TAB}) +Attempt to perform completion on the text before point. +The actual completion performed is application-specific. +@ifset BashFeatures +Bash attempts completion treating the text as a variable (if the +text begins with @samp{$}), username (if the text begins with +@samp{~}), hostname (if the text begins with @samp{@@}), or +command (including aliases and functions) in turn. If none +of these produces a match, filename completion is attempted. +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +The default is filename completion. +@end ifclear + +@item possible-completions (M-?) +List the possible completions of the text before point. + +@item insert-completions (M-*) +Insert all completions of the text before point that would have +been generated by @code{possible-completions}. + +@item menu-complete () +Similar to @code{complete}, but replaces the word to be completed +with a single match from the list of possible completions. +Repeated execution of @code{menu-complete} steps through the list +of possible completions, inserting each match in turn. +At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung +(subject to the setting of @code{bell-style}) +and the original text is restored. +An argument of @var{n} moves @var{n} positions forward in the list +of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward +through the list. +This command is intended to be bound to @key{TAB}, but is unbound +by default. + +@item delete-char-or-list () +Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or +end of the line (like @code{delete-char}). +If at the end of the line, behaves identically to +@code{possible-completions}. +This command is unbound by default. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@item complete-filename (M-/) +Attempt filename completion on the text before point. + +@item possible-filename-completions (C-x /) +List the possible completions of the text before point, +treating it as a filename. + +@item complete-username (M-~) +Attempt completion on the text before point, treating +it as a username. + +@item possible-username-completions (C-x ~) +List the possible completions of the text before point, +treating it as a username. + +@item complete-variable (M-$) +Attempt completion on the text before point, treating +it as a shell variable. + +@item possible-variable-completions (C-x $) +List the possible completions of the text before point, +treating it as a shell variable. + +@item complete-hostname (M-@@) +Attempt completion on the text before point, treating +it as a hostname. + +@item possible-hostname-completions (C-x @@) +List the possible completions of the text before point, +treating it as a hostname. + +@item complete-command (M-!) +Attempt completion on the text before point, treating +it as a command name. Command completion attempts to +match the text against aliases, reserved words, shell +functions, shell builtins, and finally executable filenames, +in that order. + +@item possible-command-completions (C-x !) +List the possible completions of the text before point, +treating it as a command name. + +@item dynamic-complete-history (M-@key{TAB}) +Attempt completion on the text before point, comparing +the text against lines from the history list for possible +completion matches. + +@item complete-into-braces (M-@{) +Perform filename completion and insert the list of possible completions +enclosed within braces so the list is available to the shell +(@pxref{Brace Expansion}). + +@end ifset +@end ftable + +@node Keyboard Macros +@subsection Keyboard Macros +@ftable @code + +@item start-kbd-macro (C-x () +Begin saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro. + +@item end-kbd-macro (C-x )) +Stop saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro +and save the definition. + +@item call-last-kbd-macro (C-x e) +Re-execute the last keyboard macro defined, by making the characters +in the macro appear as if typed at the keyboard. + +@end ftable + +@node Miscellaneous Commands +@subsection Some Miscellaneous Commands +@ftable @code + +@item re-read-init-file (C-x C-r) +Read in the contents of the @var{inputrc} file, and incorporate +any bindings or variable assignments found there. + +@item abort (C-g) +Abort the current editing command and +ring the terminal's bell (subject to the setting of +@code{bell-style}). + +@item do-uppercase-version (M-a, M-b, M-@var{x}, @dots{}) +If the metafied character @var{x} is lowercase, run the command +that is bound to the corresponding uppercase character. + +@item prefix-meta (@key{ESC}) +Metafy the next character typed. This is for keyboards +without a meta key. Typing @samp{@key{ESC} f} is equivalent to typing +@kbd{M-f}. + +@item undo (C-_ or C-x C-u) +Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line. + +@item revert-line (M-r) +Undo all changes made to this line. This is like executing the @code{undo} +command enough times to get back to the beginning. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@item tilde-expand (M-&) +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +@item tilde-expand (M-~) +@end ifclear +Perform tilde expansion on the current word. + +@item set-mark (C-@@) +Set the mark to the point. If a +numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position. + +@item exchange-point-and-mark (C-x C-x) +Swap the point with the mark. The current cursor position is set to +the saved position, and the old cursor position is saved as the mark. + +@item character-search (C-]) +A character is read and point is moved to the next occurrence of that +character. A negative count searches for previous occurrences. + +@item character-search-backward (M-C-]) +A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence +of that character. A negative count searches for subsequent +occurrences. + +@item insert-comment (M-#) +Without a numeric argument, the value of the @code{comment-begin} +variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line. +If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle: if +the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value +of @code{comment-begin}, the value is inserted, otherwise +the characters in @code{comment-begin} are deleted from the beginning of +the line. +In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed. +@ifset BashFeatures +The default value of @code{comment-begin} causes this command +to make the current line a shell comment. +If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line +will be executed by the shell. +@end ifset + +@item dump-functions () +Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the +Readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an @var{inputrc} file. This command is unbound by default. + +@item dump-variables () +Print all of the settable variables and their values to the +Readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an @var{inputrc} file. This command is unbound by default. + +@item dump-macros () +Print all of the Readline key sequences bound to macros and the +strings they output. If a numeric argument is supplied, +the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part +of an @var{inputrc} file. This command is unbound by default. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@item glob-complete-word (M-g) +The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion, +with an asterisk implicitly appended. This pattern is used to +generate a list of matching file names for possible completions. + +@item glob-expand-word (C-x *) +The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion, +and the list of matching file names is inserted, replacing the word. +If a numeric argument is supplied, a @samp{*} is appended before +pathname expansion. + +@item glob-list-expansions (C-x g) +The list of expansions that would have been generated by +@code{glob-expand-word} is displayed, and the line is redrawn. +If a numeric argument is supplied, a @samp{*} is appended before +pathname expansion. + +@item display-shell-version (C-x C-v) +Display version information about the current instance of Bash. + +@item shell-expand-line (M-C-e) +Expand the line as the shell does. +This performs alias and history expansion as well as all of the shell +word expansions (@pxref{Shell Expansions}). + +@item history-expand-line (M-^) +Perform history expansion on the current line. + +@item magic-space () +Perform history expansion on the current line and insert a space +(@pxref{History Interaction}). + +@item alias-expand-line () +Perform alias expansion on the current line (@pxref{Aliases}). + +@item history-and-alias-expand-line () +Perform history and alias expansion on the current line. + +@item insert-last-argument (M-. or M-_) +A synonym for @code{yank-last-arg}. + +@item operate-and-get-next (C-o) +Accept the current line for execution and fetch the next line +relative to the current line from the history for editing. Any +argument is ignored. + +@item edit-and-execute-command (C-xC-e) +Invoke an editor on the current command line, and execute the result as shell +commands. +Bash attempts to invoke +@code{$VISUAL}, @code{$EDITOR}, and @code{emacs} +as the editor, in that order. + +@end ifset + +@ifclear BashFeatures +@item emacs-editing-mode (C-e) +When in @code{vi} command mode, this causes a switch to @code{emacs} +editing mode. + +@item vi-editing-mode (M-C-j) +When in @code{emacs} editing mode, this causes a switch to @code{vi} +editing mode. + +@end ifclear + +@end ftable + +@node Readline vi Mode +@section Readline vi Mode + +While the Readline library does not have a full set of @code{vi} +editing functions, it does contain enough to allow simple editing +of the line. The Readline @code{vi} mode behaves as specified in +the @sc{posix} 1003.2 standard. + +@ifset BashFeatures +In order to switch interactively between @code{emacs} and @code{vi} +editing modes, use the @samp{set -o emacs} and @samp{set -o vi} +commands (@pxref{The Set Builtin}). +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +In order to switch interactively between @code{emacs} and @code{vi} +editing modes, use the command @kbd{M-C-j} (bound to emacs-editing-mode +when in @code{vi} mode and to vi-editing-mode in @code{emacs} mode). +@end ifclear +The Readline default is @code{emacs} mode. + +When you enter a line in @code{vi} mode, you are already placed in +`insertion' mode, as if you had typed an @samp{i}. Pressing @key{ESC} +switches you into `command' mode, where you can edit the text of the +line with the standard @code{vi} movement keys, move to previous +history lines with @samp{k} and subsequent lines with @samp{j}, and +so forth. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@node Programmable Completion +@section Programmable Completion +@cindex programmable completion + +When word completion is attempted for an argument to a command for +which a completion specification (a @var{compspec}) has been defined +using the @code{complete} builtin (@pxref{Programmable Completion Builtins}), +the programmable completion facilities are invoked. + +First, the command name is identified. +If a compspec has been defined for that command, the +compspec is used to generate the list of possible completions for the word. +If the command word is a full pathname, a compspec for the full +pathname is searched for first. +If no compspec is found for the full pathname, an attempt is made to +find a compspec for the portion following the final slash. + +Once a compspec has been found, it is used to generate the list of +matching words. +If a compspec is not found, the default Bash completion +described above (@pxref{Commands For Completion}) is performed. + +First, the actions specified by the compspec are used. +Only matches which are prefixed by the word being completed are +returned. +When the @option{-f} or @option{-d} option is used for filename or +directory name completion, the shell variable @env{FIGNORE} is +used to filter the matches. +@xref{Bash Variables}, for a description of @env{FIGNORE}. + +Any completions specified by a filename expansion pattern to the +@option{-G} option are generated next. +The words generated by the pattern need not match the word being completed. +The @env{GLOBIGNORE} shell variable is not used to filter the matches, +but the @env{FIGNORE} shell variable is used. + +Next, the string specified as the argument to the @option{-W} option +is considered. +The string is first split using the characters in the @env{IFS} +special variable as delimiters. +Shell quoting is honored. +Each word is then expanded using +brace expansion, tilde expansion, parameter and variable expansion, +command substitution, and arithmetic expansion, +as described above (@pxref{Shell Expansions}). +The results are split using the rules described above +(@pxref{Word Splitting}). +The results of the expansion are prefix-matched against the word being +completed, and the matching words become the possible completions. + +After these matches have been generated, any shell function or command +specified with the @option{-F} and @option{-C} options is invoked. +When the command or function is invoked, the @env{COMP_LINE} and +@env{COMP_POINT} variables are assigned values as described above +(@pxref{Bash Variables}). +If a shell function is being invoked, the @env{COMP_WORDS} and +@env{COMP_CWORD} variables are also set. +When the function or command is invoked, the first argument is the +name of the command whose arguments are being completed, the +second argument is the word being completed, and the third argument +is the word preceding the word being completed on the current command line. +No filtering of the generated completions against the word being completed +is performed; the function or command has complete freedom in generating +the matches. + +Any function specified with @option{-F} is invoked first. +The function may use any of the shell facilities, including the +@code{compgen} builtin described below +(@pxref{Programmable Completion Builtins}), to generate the matches. +It must put the possible completions in the @env{COMPREPLY} array +variable. + +Next, any command specified with the @option{-C} option is invoked +in an environment equivalent to command substitution. +It should print a list of completions, one per line, to +the standard output. +Backslash may be used to escape a newline, if necessary. + +After all of the possible completions are generated, any filter +specified with the @option{-X} option is applied to the list. +The filter is a pattern as used for pathname expansion; a @samp{&} +in the pattern is replaced with the text of the word being completed. +A literal @samp{&} may be escaped with a backslash; the backslash +is removed before attempting a match. +Any completion that matches the pattern will be removed from the list. +A leading @samp{!} negates the pattern; in this case any completion +not matching the pattern will be removed. + +Finally, any prefix and suffix specified with the @option{-P} and @option{-S} +options are added to each member of the completion list, and the result is +returned to the Readline completion code as the list of possible +completions. + +If the previously-applied actions do not generate any matches, and the +@option{-o dirnames} option was supplied to @code{complete} when the +compspec was defined, directory name completion is attempted. + +If the @option{-o plusdirs} option was supplied to @code{complete} when +the compspec was defined, directory name completion is attempted and any +matches are added to the results of the other actions. + +By default, if a compspec is found, whatever it generates is returned to +the completion code as the full set of possible completions. +The default Bash completions are not attempted, and the Readline default +of filename completion is disabled. +If the @option{-o bashdefault} option was supplied to @code{complete} when +the compspec was defined, the default Bash completions are attempted +if the compspec generates no matches. +If the @option{-o default} option was supplied to @code{complete} when the +compspec was defined, Readline's default completion will be performed +if the compspec (and, if attempted, the default Bash completions) +generate no matches. + +When a compspec indicates that directory name completion is desired, +the programmable completion functions force Readline to append a slash +to completed names which are symbolic links to directories, subject to +the value of the @var{mark-directories} Readline variable, regardless +of the setting of the @var{mark-symlinked-directories} Readline variable. + +@node Programmable Completion Builtins +@section Programmable Completion Builtins +@cindex completion builtins + +Two builtin commands are available to manipulate the programmable completion +facilities. + +@table @code +@item compgen +@btindex compgen +@example +@code{compgen [@var{option}] [@var{word}]} +@end example + +Generate possible completion matches for @var{word} according to +the @var{option}s, which may be any option accepted by the +@code{complete} +builtin with the exception of @option{-p} and @option{-r}, and write +the matches to the standard output. +When using the @option{-F} or @option{-C} options, the various shell variables +set by the programmable completion facilities, while available, will not +have useful values. + +The matches will be generated in the same way as if the programmable +completion code had generated them directly from a completion specification +with the same flags. +If @var{word} is specified, only those completions matching @var{word} +will be displayed. + +The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, or no +matches were generated. + +@item complete +@btindex complete +@example +@code{complete [-abcdefgjksuv] [-o @var{comp-option}] [-A @var{action}] [-G @var{globpat}] [-W @var{wordlist}] +[-P @var{prefix}] [-S @var{suffix}] [-X @var{filterpat}] [-F @var{function}] +[-C @var{command}] @var{name} [@var{name} @dots{}]} +@code{complete -pr [@var{name} @dots{}]} +@end example + +Specify how arguments to each @var{name} should be completed. +If the @option{-p} option is supplied, or if no options are supplied, existing +completion specifications are printed in a way that allows them to be +reused as input. +The @option{-r} option removes a completion specification for +each @var{name}, or, if no @var{name}s are supplied, all +completion specifications. + +The process of applying these completion specifications when word completion +is attempted is described above (@pxref{Programmable Completion}). + +Other options, if specified, have the following meanings. +The arguments to the @option{-G}, @option{-W}, and @option{-X} options +(and, if necessary, the @option{-P} and @option{-S} options) +should be quoted to protect them from expansion before the +@code{complete} builtin is invoked. + + +@table @code +@item -o @var{comp-option} +The @var{comp-option} controls several aspects of the compspec's behavior +beyond the simple generation of completions. +@var{comp-option} may be one of: + +@table @code + +@item bashdefault +Perform the rest of the default Bash completions if the compspec +generates no matches. + +@item default +Use Readline's default filename completion if the compspec generates +no matches. + +@item dirnames +Perform directory name completion if the compspec generates no matches. + +@item filenames +Tell Readline that the compspec generates filenames, so it can perform any +filename-specific processing (like adding a slash to directory names or +suppressing trailing spaces). This option is intended to be used with +shell functions specified with @option{-F}. + +@item nospace +Tell Readline not to append a space (the default) to words completed at +the end of the line. + +@item plusdirs +After any matches defined by the compspec are generated, +directory name completion is attempted and any +matches are added to the results of the other actions. + +@end table + +@item -A @var{action} +The @var{action} may be one of the following to generate a list of possible +completions: + +@table @code +@item alias +Alias names. May also be specified as @option{-a}. + +@item arrayvar +Array variable names. + +@item binding +Readline key binding names (@pxref{Bindable Readline Commands}). + +@item builtin +Names of shell builtin commands. May also be specified as @option{-b}. + +@item command +Command names. May also be specified as @option{-c}. + +@item directory +Directory names. May also be specified as @option{-d}. + +@item disabled +Names of disabled shell builtins. + +@item enabled +Names of enabled shell builtins. + +@item export +Names of exported shell variables. May also be specified as @option{-e}. + +@item file +File names. May also be specified as @option{-f}. + +@item function +Names of shell functions. + +@item group +Group names. May also be specified as @option{-g}. + +@item helptopic +Help topics as accepted by the @code{help} builtin (@pxref{Bash Builtins}). + +@item hostname +Hostnames, as taken from the file specified by the +@env{HOSTFILE} shell variable (@pxref{Bash Variables}). + +@item job +Job names, if job control is active. May also be specified as @option{-j}. + +@item keyword +Shell reserved words. May also be specified as @option{-k}. + +@item running +Names of running jobs, if job control is active. + +@item service +Service names. May also be specified as @option{-s}. + +@item setopt +Valid arguments for the @option{-o} option to the @code{set} builtin +(@pxref{The Set Builtin}). + +@item shopt +Shell option names as accepted by the @code{shopt} builtin +(@pxref{Bash Builtins}). + +@item signal +Signal names. + +@item stopped +Names of stopped jobs, if job control is active. + +@item user +User names. May also be specified as @option{-u}. + +@item variable +Names of all shell variables. May also be specified as @option{-v}. +@end table + +@item -G @var{globpat} +The filename expansion pattern @var{globpat} is expanded to generate +the possible completions. + +@item -W @var{wordlist} +The @var{wordlist} is split using the characters in the +@env{IFS} special variable as delimiters, and each resultant word +is expanded. +The possible completions are the members of the resultant list which +match the word being completed. + +@item -C @var{command} +@var{command} is executed in a subshell environment, and its output is +used as the possible completions. + +@item -F @var{function} +The shell function @var{function} is executed in the current shell +environment. +When it finishes, the possible completions are retrieved from the value +of the @env{COMPREPLY} array variable. + +@item -X @var{filterpat} +@var{filterpat} is a pattern as used for filename expansion. +It is applied to the list of possible completions generated by the +preceding options and arguments, and each completion matching +@var{filterpat} is removed from the list. +A leading @samp{!} in @var{filterpat} negates the pattern; in this +case, any completion not matching @var{filterpat} is removed. + +@item -P @var{prefix} +@var{prefix} is added at the beginning of each possible completion +after all other options have been applied. + +@item -S @var{suffix} +@var{suffix} is appended to each possible completion +after all other options have been applied. +@end table + +The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, an option +other than @option{-p} or @option{-r} is supplied without a @var{name} +argument, an attempt is made to remove a completion specification for +a @var{name} for which no specification exists, or +an error occurs adding a completion specification. + +@end table +@end ifset
    rluser.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: hstech.texi =================================================================== --- hstech.texi (nonexistent) +++ hstech.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,573 @@ +@ignore +This file documents the user interface to the GNU History library. + +Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual +provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on +all copies. + +Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission notice +identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this +paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +GNU Copyright statement is available to the distributee, and provided that +the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a +permission notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. +@end ignore + +@node Programming with GNU History +@chapter Programming with GNU History + +This chapter describes how to interface programs that you write +with the @sc{gnu} History Library. +It should be considered a technical guide. +For information on the interactive use of @sc{gnu} History, @pxref{Using +History Interactively}. + +@menu +* Introduction to History:: What is the GNU History library for? +* History Storage:: How information is stored. +* History Functions:: Functions that you can use. +* History Variables:: Variables that control behaviour. +* History Programming Example:: Example of using the GNU History Library. +@end menu + +@node Introduction to History +@section Introduction to History + +Many programs read input from the user a line at a time. The @sc{gnu} +History library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary +data with each line, and utilize information from previous lines in +composing new ones. + +The programmer using the History library has available functions +for remembering lines on a history list, associating arbitrary data +with a line, removing lines from the list, searching through the list +for a line containing an arbitrary text string, and referencing any line +in the list directly. In addition, a history @dfn{expansion} function +is available which provides for a consistent user interface across +different programs. + +The user using programs written with the History library has the +benefit of a consistent user interface with a set of well-known +commands for manipulating the text of previous lines and using that text +in new commands. The basic history manipulation commands are similar to +the history substitution provided by @code{csh}. + +If the programmer desires, he can use the Readline library, which +includes some history manipulation by default, and has the added +advantage of command line editing. + +Before declaring any functions using any functionality the History +library provides in other code, an application writer should include +the file @code{} in any file that uses the +History library's features. It supplies extern declarations for all +of the library's public functions and variables, and declares all of +the public data structures. + +@node History Storage +@section History Storage + +The history list is an array of history entries. A history entry is +declared as follows: + +@example +typedef void *histdata_t; + +typedef struct _hist_entry @{ + char *line; + char *timestamp; + histdata_t data; +@} HIST_ENTRY; +@end example + +The history list itself might therefore be declared as + +@example +HIST_ENTRY **the_history_list; +@end example + +The state of the History library is encapsulated into a single structure: + +@example +/* + * A structure used to pass around the current state of the history. + */ +typedef struct _hist_state @{ + HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */ + int offset; /* The location pointer within this array. */ + int length; /* Number of elements within this array. */ + int size; /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */ + int flags; +@} HISTORY_STATE; +@end example + +If the flags member includes @code{HS_STIFLED}, the history has been +stifled. + +@node History Functions +@section History Functions + +This section describes the calling sequence for the various functions +exported by the @sc{gnu} History library. + +@menu +* Initializing History and State Management:: Functions to call when you + want to use history in a + program. +* History List Management:: Functions used to manage the list + of history entries. +* Information About the History List:: Functions returning information about + the history list. +* Moving Around the History List:: Functions used to change the position + in the history list. +* Searching the History List:: Functions to search the history list + for entries containing a string. +* Managing the History File:: Functions that read and write a file + containing the history list. +* History Expansion:: Functions to perform csh-like history + expansion. +@end menu + +@node Initializing History and State Management +@subsection Initializing History and State Management + +This section describes functions used to initialize and manage +the state of the History library when you want to use the history +functions in your program. + +@deftypefun void using_history (void) +Begin a session in which the history functions might be used. This +initializes the interactive variables. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HISTORY_STATE *} history_get_history_state (void) +Return a structure describing the current state of the input history. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void history_set_history_state (HISTORY_STATE *state) +Set the state of the history list according to @var{state}. +@end deftypefun + +@node History List Management +@subsection History List Management + +These functions manage individual entries on the history list, or set +parameters managing the list itself. + +@deftypefun void add_history (const char *string) +Place @var{string} at the end of the history list. The associated data +field (if any) is set to @code{NULL}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void add_history_time (const char *string) +Change the time stamp associated with the most recent history entry to +@var{string}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} remove_history (int which) +Remove history entry at offset @var{which} from the history. The +removed element is returned so you can free the line, data, +and containing structure. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {histdata_t} free_history_entry (HIST_ENTRY *histent) +Free the history entry @var{histent} and any history library private +data associated with it. Returns the application-specific data +so the caller can dispose of it. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} replace_history_entry (int which, const char *line, histdata_t data) +Make the history entry at offset @var{which} have @var{line} and @var{data}. +This returns the old entry so the caller can dispose of any +application-specific data. In the case +of an invalid @var{which}, a @code{NULL} pointer is returned. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void clear_history (void) +Clear the history list by deleting all the entries. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void stifle_history (int max) +Stifle the history list, remembering only the last @var{max} entries. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int unstifle_history (void) +Stop stifling the history. This returns the previously-set +maximum number of history entries (as set by @code{stifle_history()}). +The value is positive if the history was +stifled, negative if it wasn't. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int history_is_stifled (void) +Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not. +@end deftypefun + +@node Information About the History List +@subsection Information About the History List + +These functions return information about the entire history list or +individual list entries. + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY **} history_list (void) +Return a @code{NULL} terminated array of @code{HIST_ENTRY *} which is the +current input history. Element 0 of this list is the beginning of time. +If there is no history, return @code{NULL}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int where_history (void) +Returns the offset of the current history element. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} current_history (void) +Return the history entry at the current position, as determined by +@code{where_history()}. If there is no entry there, return a @code{NULL} +pointer. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} history_get (int offset) +Return the history entry at position @var{offset}, starting from +@code{history_base} (@pxref{History Variables}). +If there is no entry there, or if @var{offset} +is greater than the history length, return a @code{NULL} pointer. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun time_t history_get_time (HIST_ENTRY *entry) +Return the time stamp associated with the history entry @var{entry}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int history_total_bytes (void) +Return the number of bytes that the primary history entries are using. +This function returns the sum of the lengths of all the lines in the +history. +@end deftypefun + +@node Moving Around the History List +@subsection Moving Around the History List + +These functions allow the current index into the history list to be +set or changed. + +@deftypefun int history_set_pos (int pos) +Set the current history offset to @var{pos}, an absolute index +into the list. +Returns 1 on success, 0 if @var{pos} is less than zero or greater +than the number of history entries. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} previous_history (void) +Back up the current history offset to the previous history entry, and +return a pointer to that entry. If there is no previous entry, return +a @code{NULL} pointer. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} next_history (void) +Move the current history offset forward to the next history entry, and +return the a pointer to that entry. If there is no next entry, return +a @code{NULL} pointer. +@end deftypefun + +@node Searching the History List +@subsection Searching the History List +@cindex History Searching + +These functions allow searching of the history list for entries containing +a specific string. Searching may be performed both forward and backward +from the current history position. The search may be @dfn{anchored}, +meaning that the string must match at the beginning of the history entry. +@cindex anchored search + +@deftypefun int history_search (const char *string, int direction) +Search the history for @var{string}, starting at the current history offset. +If @var{direction} is less than 0, then the search is through +previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries. +If @var{string} is found, then +the current history index is set to that history entry, and the value +returned is the offset in the line of the entry where +@var{string} was found. Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is +returned. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int history_search_prefix (const char *string, int direction) +Search the history for @var{string}, starting at the current history +offset. The search is anchored: matching lines must begin with +@var{string}. If @var{direction} is less than 0, then the search is +through previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries. +If @var{string} is found, then the +current history index is set to that entry, and the return value is 0. +Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is returned. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int history_search_pos (const char *string, int direction, int pos) +Search for @var{string} in the history list, starting at @var{pos}, an +absolute index into the list. If @var{direction} is negative, the search +proceeds backward from @var{pos}, otherwise forward. Returns the absolute +index of the history element where @var{string} was found, or -1 otherwise. +@end deftypefun + +@node Managing the History File +@subsection Managing the History File + +The History library can read the history from and write it to a file. +This section documents the functions for managing a history file. + +@deftypefun int read_history (const char *filename) +Add the contents of @var{filename} to the history list, a line at a time. +If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then read from @file{~/.history}. +Returns 0 if successful, or @code{errno} if not. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int read_history_range (const char *filename, int from, int to) +Read a range of lines from @var{filename}, adding them to the history list. +Start reading at line @var{from} and end at @var{to}. +If @var{from} is zero, start at the beginning. If @var{to} is less than +@var{from}, then read until the end of the file. If @var{filename} is +@code{NULL}, then read from @file{~/.history}. Returns 0 if successful, +or @code{errno} if not. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int write_history (const char *filename) +Write the current history to @var{filename}, overwriting @var{filename} +if necessary. +If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then write the history list to +@file{~/.history}. +Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on a read or write error. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int append_history (int nelements, const char *filename) +Append the last @var{nelements} of the history list to @var{filename}. +If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then append to @file{~/.history}. +Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on a read or write error. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int history_truncate_file (const char *filename, int nlines) +Truncate the history file @var{filename}, leaving only the last +@var{nlines} lines. +If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then @file{~/.history} is truncated. +Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on failure. +@end deftypefun + +@node History Expansion +@subsection History Expansion + +These functions implement history expansion. + +@deftypefun int history_expand (char *string, char **output) +Expand @var{string}, placing the result into @var{output}, a pointer +to a string (@pxref{History Interaction}). Returns: +@table @code +@item 0 +If no expansions took place (or, if the only change in +the text was the removal of escape characters preceding the history expansion +character); +@item 1 +if expansions did take place; +@item -1 +if there was an error in expansion; +@item 2 +if the returned line should be displayed, but not executed, +as with the @code{:p} modifier (@pxref{Modifiers}). +@end table + +If an error ocurred in expansion, then @var{output} contains a descriptive +error message. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} get_history_event (const char *string, int *cindex, int qchar) +Returns the text of the history event beginning at @var{string} + +@var{*cindex}. @var{*cindex} is modified to point to after the event +specifier. At function entry, @var{cindex} points to the index into +@var{string} where the history event specification begins. @var{qchar} +is a character that is allowed to end the event specification in addition +to the ``normal'' terminating characters. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char **} history_tokenize (const char *string) +Return an array of tokens parsed out of @var{string}, much as the +shell might. The tokens are split on the characters in the +@var{history_word_delimiters} variable, +and shell quoting conventions are obeyed. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} history_arg_extract (int first, int last, const char *string) +Extract a string segment consisting of the @var{first} through @var{last} +arguments present in @var{string}. Arguments are split using +@code{history_tokenize}. +@end deftypefun + +@node History Variables +@section History Variables + +This section describes the externally-visible variables exported by +the @sc{gnu} History Library. + +@deftypevar int history_base +The logical offset of the first entry in the history list. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int history_length +The number of entries currently stored in the history list. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int history_max_entries +The maximum number of history entries. This must be changed using +@code{stifle_history()}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int history_write_timestamps +If non-zero, timestamps are written to the history file, so they can be +preserved between sessions. The default value is 0, meaning that +timestamps are not saved. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar char history_expansion_char +The character that introduces a history event. The default is @samp{!}. +Setting this to 0 inhibits history expansion. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar char history_subst_char +The character that invokes word substitution if found at the start of +a line. The default is @samp{^}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar char history_comment_char +During tokenization, if this character is seen as the first character +of a word, then it and all subsequent characters up to a newline are +ignored, suppressing history expansion for the remainder of the line. +This is disabled by default. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {char *} history_word_delimiters +The characters that separate tokens for @code{history_tokenize()}. +The default value is @code{" \t\n()<>;&|"}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {char *} history_search_delimiter_chars +The list of additional characters which can delimit a history search +string, in addition to space, TAB, @samp{:} and @samp{?} in the case of +a substring search. The default is empty. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {char *} history_no_expand_chars +The list of characters which inhibit history expansion if found immediately +following @var{history_expansion_char}. The default is space, tab, newline, +carriage return, and @samp{=}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int history_quotes_inhibit_expansion +If non-zero, single-quoted words are not scanned for the history expansion +character. The default value is 0. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_linebuf_func_t *} history_inhibit_expansion_function +This should be set to the address of a function that takes two arguments: +a @code{char *} (@var{string}) +and an @code{int} index into that string (@var{i}). +It should return a non-zero value if the history expansion starting at +@var{string[i]} should not be performed; zero if the expansion should +be done. +It is intended for use by applications like Bash that use the history +expansion character for additional purposes. +By default, this variable is set to @code{NULL}. +@end deftypevar + +@node History Programming Example +@section History Programming Example + +The following program demonstrates simple use of the @sc{gnu} History Library. + +@smallexample +#include +#include + +main (argc, argv) + int argc; + char **argv; +@{ + char line[1024], *t; + int len, done = 0; + + line[0] = 0; + + using_history (); + while (!done) + @{ + printf ("history$ "); + fflush (stdout); + t = fgets (line, sizeof (line) - 1, stdin); + if (t && *t) + @{ + len = strlen (t); + if (t[len - 1] == '\n') + t[len - 1] = '\0'; + @} + + if (!t) + strcpy (line, "quit"); + + if (line[0]) + @{ + char *expansion; + int result; + + result = history_expand (line, &expansion); + if (result) + fprintf (stderr, "%s\n", expansion); + + if (result < 0 || result == 2) + @{ + free (expansion); + continue; + @} + + add_history (expansion); + strncpy (line, expansion, sizeof (line) - 1); + free (expansion); + @} + + if (strcmp (line, "quit") == 0) + done = 1; + else if (strcmp (line, "save") == 0) + write_history ("history_file"); + else if (strcmp (line, "read") == 0) + read_history ("history_file"); + else if (strcmp (line, "list") == 0) + @{ + register HIST_ENTRY **the_list; + register int i; + + the_list = history_list (); + if (the_list) + for (i = 0; the_list[i]; i++) + printf ("%d: %s\n", i + history_base, the_list[i]->line); + @} + else if (strncmp (line, "delete", 6) == 0) + @{ + int which; + if ((sscanf (line + 6, "%d", &which)) == 1) + @{ + HIST_ENTRY *entry = remove_history (which); + if (!entry) + fprintf (stderr, "No such entry %d\n", which); + else + @{ + free (entry->line); + free (entry); + @} + @} + else + @{ + fprintf (stderr, "non-numeric arg given to `delete'\n"); + @} + @} + @} +@} +@end smallexample
    hstech.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: inc-hist.texinfo =================================================================== --- inc-hist.texinfo (nonexistent) +++ inc-hist.texinfo (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,457 @@ +@ignore +This file documents the user interface to the GNU History library. + +Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual +provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on +all copies. + +Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission notice +identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this +paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +GNU Copyright statement is available to the distributee, and provided that +the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a +permission notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. +@end ignore + +@node Using History Interactively +@chapter Using History Interactively + +@c @ifclear BashFeatures +@c @defcodeindex bt +@c @end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +This chapter describes how to use the @sc{gnu} History Library +interactively, from a user's standpoint. +It should be considered a user's guide. +For information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in other programs, +see the @sc{gnu} Readline Library Manual. +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +This chapter describes how to use the @sc{gnu} History Library interactively, +from a user's standpoint. It should be considered a user's guide. +For information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in other programs, +see the @sc{gnu} Readline Library Manual. +@end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +@menu +* Bash History Facilities:: How Bash lets you manipulate your command + history. +* Bash History Builtins:: The Bash builtin commands that manipulate + the command history. +* History Interaction:: What it feels like using History as a user. +@end menu +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +@menu +* History Interaction:: What it feels like using History as a user. +@end menu +@end ifclear + +@ifset BashFeatures +@node Bash History Facilities +@section Bash History Facilities +@cindex command history +@cindex history list + +When the @option{-o history} option to the @code{set} builtin +is enabled (@pxref{The Set Builtin}), +the shell provides access to the @dfn{command history}, +the list of commands previously typed. +The value of the @env{HISTSIZE} shell variable is used as the +number of commands to save in a history list. +The text of the last @env{$HISTSIZE} +commands (default 500) is saved. +The shell stores each command in the history list prior to +parameter and variable expansion +but after history expansion is performed, subject to the +values of the shell variables +@env{HISTIGNORE} and @env{HISTCONTROL}. + +When the shell starts up, the history is initialized from the +file named by the @env{HISTFILE} variable (default @file{~/.bash_history}). +The file named by the value of @env{HISTFILE} is truncated, if +necessary, to contain no more than the number of lines specified by +the value of the @env{HISTFILESIZE} variable. +When an interactive shell exits, the last +@env{$HISTSIZE} lines are copied from the history list to the file +named by @env{$HISTFILE}. +If the @code{histappend} shell option is set (@pxref{Bash Builtins}), +the lines are appended to the history file, +otherwise the history file is overwritten. +If @env{HISTFILE} +is unset, or if the history file is unwritable, the history is +not saved. After saving the history, the history file is truncated +to contain no more than @env{$HISTFILESIZE} +lines. If @env{HISTFILESIZE} is not set, no truncation is performed. + +If the @env{HISTTIMEFORMAT} is set, the time stamp information +associated with each history entry is written to the history file. + +The builtin command @code{fc} may be used to list or edit and re-execute +a portion of the history list. +The @code{history} builtin may be used to display or modify the history +list and manipulate the history file. +When using command-line editing, search commands +are available in each editing mode that provide access to the +history list (@pxref{Commands For History}). + +The shell allows control over which commands are saved on the history +list. The @env{HISTCONTROL} and @env{HISTIGNORE} +variables may be set to cause the shell to save only a subset of the +commands entered. +The @code{cmdhist} +shell option, if enabled, causes the shell to attempt to save each +line of a multi-line command in the same history entry, adding +semicolons where necessary to preserve syntactic correctness. +The @code{lithist} +shell option causes the shell to save the command with embedded newlines +instead of semicolons. +The @code{shopt} builtin is used to set these options. +@xref{Bash Builtins}, for a description of @code{shopt}. + +@node Bash History Builtins +@section Bash History Builtins +@cindex history builtins + +Bash provides two builtin commands which manipulate the +history list and history file. + +@table @code + +@item fc +@btindex fc +@example +@code{fc [-e @var{ename}] [-nlr] [@var{first}] [@var{last}]} +@code{fc -s [@var{pat}=@var{rep}] [@var{command}]} +@end example + +Fix Command. In the first form, a range of commands from @var{first} to +@var{last} is selected from the history list. Both @var{first} and +@var{last} may be specified as a string (to locate the most recent +command beginning with that string) or as a number (an index into the +history list, where a negative number is used as an offset from the +current command number). If @var{last} is not specified it is set to +@var{first}. If @var{first} is not specified it is set to the previous +command for editing and @minus{}16 for listing. If the @option{-l} flag is +given, the commands are listed on standard output. The @option{-n} flag +suppresses the command numbers when listing. The @option{-r} flag +reverses the order of the listing. Otherwise, the editor given by +@var{ename} is invoked on a file containing those commands. If +@var{ename} is not given, the value of the following variable expansion +is used: @code{$@{FCEDIT:-$@{EDITOR:-vi@}@}}. This says to use the +value of the @env{FCEDIT} variable if set, or the value of the +@env{EDITOR} variable if that is set, or @code{vi} if neither is set. +When editing is complete, the edited commands are echoed and executed. + +In the second form, @var{command} is re-executed after each instance +of @var{pat} in the selected command is replaced by @var{rep}. + +A useful alias to use with the @code{fc} command is @code{r='fc -s'}, so +that typing @samp{r cc} runs the last command beginning with @code{cc} +and typing @samp{r} re-executes the last command (@pxref{Aliases}). + +@item history +@btindex history +@example +history [@var{n}] +history -c +history -d @var{offset} +history [-anrw] [@var{filename}] +history -ps @var{arg} +@end example + +With no options, display the history list with line numbers. +Lines prefixed with a @samp{*} have been modified. +An argument of @var{n} lists only the last @var{n} lines. +If the shell variable @env{HISTTIMEFORMAT} is set and not null, +it is used as a format string for @var{strftime} to display +the time stamp associated with each displayed history entry. +No intervening blank is printed between the formatted time stamp +and the history line. + +Options, if supplied, have the following meanings: + +@table @code +@item -c +Clear the history list. This may be combined +with the other options to replace the history list completely. + +@item -d @var{offset} +Delete the history entry at position @var{offset}. +@var{offset} should be specified as it appears when the history is +displayed. + +@item -a +Append the new +history lines (history lines entered since the beginning of the +current Bash session) to the history file. + +@item -n +Append the history lines not already read from the history file +to the current history list. These are lines appended to the history +file since the beginning of the current Bash session. + +@item -r +Read the current history file and append its contents to +the history list. + +@item -w +Write out the current history to the history file. + +@item -p +Perform history substitution on the @var{arg}s and display the result +on the standard output, without storing the results in the history list. + +@item -s +The @var{arg}s are added to the end of +the history list as a single entry. + +@end table + +When any of the @option{-w}, @option{-r}, @option{-a}, or @option{-n} options is +used, if @var{filename} +is given, then it is used as the history file. If not, then +the value of the @env{HISTFILE} variable is used. + +@end table +@end ifset + +@node History Interaction +@section History Expansion +@cindex history expansion + +The History library provides a history expansion feature that is similar +to the history expansion provided by @code{csh}. This section +describes the syntax used to manipulate the history information. + +History expansions introduce words from the history list into +the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the +arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or +fix errors in previous commands quickly. + +History expansion takes place in two parts. The first is to determine +which line from the history list should be used during substitution. +The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into the +current one. The line selected from the history is called the +@dfn{event}, and the portions of that line that are acted upon are +called @dfn{words}. Various @dfn{modifiers} are available to manipulate +the selected words. The line is broken into words in the same fashion +that Bash does, so that several words +surrounded by quotes are considered one word. +History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the +history expansion character, which is @samp{!} by default. +@ifset BashFeatures +Only @samp{\} and @samp{'} may be used to escape the history expansion +character. +@end ifset + +@ifset BashFeatures +Several shell options settable with the @code{shopt} +builtin (@pxref{Bash Builtins}) may be used to tailor +the behavior of history expansion. If the +@code{histverify} shell option is enabled, and Readline +is being used, history substitutions are not immediately passed to +the shell parser. +Instead, the expanded line is reloaded into the Readline +editing buffer for further modification. +If Readline is being used, and the @code{histreedit} +shell option is enabled, a failed history expansion will be +reloaded into the Readline editing buffer for correction. +The @option{-p} option to the @code{history} builtin command +may be used to see what a history expansion will do before using it. +The @option{-s} option to the @code{history} builtin may be used to +add commands to the end of the history list without actually executing +them, so that they are available for subsequent recall. +This is most useful in conjunction with Readline. + +The shell allows control of the various characters used by the +history expansion mechanism with the @code{histchars} variable. +@end ifset + +@menu +* Event Designators:: How to specify which history line to use. +* Word Designators:: Specifying which words are of interest. +* Modifiers:: Modifying the results of substitution. +@end menu + +@node Event Designators +@subsection Event Designators +@cindex event designators + +An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the +history list. +@cindex history events + +@table @asis + +@item @code{!} +@ifset BashFeatures +Start a history substitution, except when followed by a space, tab, +the end of the line, @samp{=} or @samp{(} (when the +@code{extglob} shell option is enabled using the @code{shopt} builtin). +@end ifset +@ifclear BashFeatures +Start a history substitution, except when followed by a space, tab, +the end of the line, or @samp{=}. +@end ifclear + +@item @code{!@var{n}} +Refer to command line @var{n}. + +@item @code{!-@var{n}} +Refer to the command @var{n} lines back. + +@item @code{!!} +Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for @samp{!-1}. + +@item @code{!@var{string}} +Refer to the most recent command starting with @var{string}. + +@item @code{!?@var{string}[?]} +Refer to the most recent command containing @var{string}. The trailing +@samp{?} may be omitted if the @var{string} is followed immediately by +a newline. + +@item @code{^@var{string1}^@var{string2}^} +Quick Substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing @var{string1} +with @var{string2}. Equivalent to +@code{!!:s/@var{string1}/@var{string2}/}. + +@item @code{!#} +The entire command line typed so far. + +@end table + +@node Word Designators +@subsection Word Designators + +Word designators are used to select desired words from the event. +A @samp{:} separates the event specification from the word designator. It +may be omitted if the word designator begins with a @samp{^}, @samp{$}, +@samp{*}, @samp{-}, or @samp{%}. Words are numbered from the beginning +of the line, with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero). Words are +inserted into the current line separated by single spaces. + +@need 0.75 +For example, + +@table @code +@item !! +designates the preceding command. When you type this, the preceding +command is repeated in toto. + +@item !!:$ +designates the last argument of the preceding command. This may be +shortened to @code{!$}. + +@item !fi:2 +designates the second argument of the most recent command starting with +the letters @code{fi}. +@end table + +@need 0.75 +Here are the word designators: + +@table @code + +@item 0 (zero) +The @code{0}th word. For many applications, this is the command word. + +@item @var{n} +The @var{n}th word. + +@item ^ +The first argument; that is, word 1. + +@item $ +The last argument. + +@item % +The word matched by the most recent @samp{?@var{string}?} search. + +@item @var{x}-@var{y} +A range of words; @samp{-@var{y}} abbreviates @samp{0-@var{y}}. + +@item * +All of the words, except the @code{0}th. This is a synonym for @samp{1-$}. +It is not an error to use @samp{*} if there is just one word in the event; +the empty string is returned in that case. + +@item @var{x}* +Abbreviates @samp{@var{x}-$} + +@item @var{x}- +Abbreviates @samp{@var{x}-$} like @samp{@var{x}*}, but omits the last word. + +@end table + +If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the +previous command is used as the event. + +@node Modifiers +@subsection Modifiers + +After the optional word designator, you can add a sequence of one or more +of the following modifiers, each preceded by a @samp{:}. + +@table @code + +@item h +Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving only the head. + +@item t +Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. + +@item r +Remove a trailing suffix of the form @samp{.@var{suffix}}, leaving +the basename. + +@item e +Remove all but the trailing suffix. + +@item p +Print the new command but do not execute it. + +@ifset BashFeatures +@item q +Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions. + +@item x +Quote the substituted words as with @samp{q}, +but break into words at spaces, tabs, and newlines. +@end ifset + +@item s/@var{old}/@var{new}/ +Substitute @var{new} for the first occurrence of @var{old} in the +event line. Any delimiter may be used in place of @samp{/}. +The delimiter may be quoted in @var{old} and @var{new} +with a single backslash. If @samp{&} appears in @var{new}, +it is replaced by @var{old}. A single backslash will quote +the @samp{&}. The final delimiter is optional if it is the last +character on the input line. + +@item & +Repeat the previous substitution. + +@item g +@itemx a +Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. Used in +conjunction with @samp{s}, as in @code{gs/@var{old}/@var{new}/}, +or with @samp{&}. + +@item G +Apply the following @samp{s} modifier once to each word in the event. + +@end table Index: rltech.texi =================================================================== --- rltech.texi (nonexistent) +++ rltech.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,2285 @@ +@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setfilename rltech.info +@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setchapternewpage odd + +@ifinfo +This document describes the GNU Readline Library, a utility for aiding +in the consistency of user interface across discrete programs that need +to provide a command line interface. + +Copyright (C) 1988-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +pare preserved on all copies. + +@ignore +Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the +results, provided the printed document carries copying permission +notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph +(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). +@end ignore + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved +by the Foundation. +@end ifinfo + +@node Programming with GNU Readline +@chapter Programming with GNU Readline + +This chapter describes the interface between the @sc{gnu} Readline Library and +other programs. If you are a programmer, and you wish to include the +features found in @sc{gnu} Readline +such as completion, line editing, and interactive history manipulation +in your own programs, this section is for you. + +@menu +* Basic Behavior:: Using the default behavior of Readline. +* Custom Functions:: Adding your own functions to Readline. +* Readline Variables:: Variables accessible to custom + functions. +* Readline Convenience Functions:: Functions which Readline supplies to + aid in writing your own custom + functions. +* Readline Signal Handling:: How Readline behaves when it receives signals. +* Custom Completers:: Supplanting or supplementing Readline's + completion functions. +@end menu + +@node Basic Behavior +@section Basic Behavior + +Many programs provide a command line interface, such as @code{mail}, +@code{ftp}, and @code{sh}. For such programs, the default behaviour of +Readline is sufficient. This section describes how to use Readline in +the simplest way possible, perhaps to replace calls in your code to +@code{gets()} or @code{fgets()}. + +@findex readline +@cindex readline, function + +The function @code{readline()} prints a prompt @var{prompt} +and then reads and returns a single line of text from the user. +If @var{prompt} is @code{NULL} or the empty string, no prompt is displayed. +The line @code{readline} returns is allocated with @code{malloc()}; +the caller should @code{free()} the line when it has finished with it. +The declaration for @code{readline} in ANSI C is + +@example +@code{char *readline (const char *@var{prompt});} +@end example + +@noindent +So, one might say +@example +@code{char *line = readline ("Enter a line: ");} +@end example +@noindent +in order to read a line of text from the user. +The line returned has the final newline removed, so only the +text remains. + +If @code{readline} encounters an @code{EOF} while reading the line, and the +line is empty at that point, then @code{(char *)NULL} is returned. +Otherwise, the line is ended just as if a newline had been typed. + +If you want the user to be able to get at the line later, (with +@key{C-p} for example), you must call @code{add_history()} to save the +line away in a @dfn{history} list of such lines. + +@example +@code{add_history (line)}; +@end example + +@noindent +For full details on the GNU History Library, see the associated manual. + +It is preferable to avoid saving empty lines on the history list, since +users rarely have a burning need to reuse a blank line. Here is +a function which usefully replaces the standard @code{gets()} library +function, and has the advantage of no static buffer to overflow: + +@example +/* A static variable for holding the line. */ +static char *line_read = (char *)NULL; + +/* Read a string, and return a pointer to it. + Returns NULL on EOF. */ +char * +rl_gets () +@{ + /* If the buffer has already been allocated, + return the memory to the free pool. */ + if (line_read) + @{ + free (line_read); + line_read = (char *)NULL; + @} + + /* Get a line from the user. */ + line_read = readline (""); + + /* If the line has any text in it, + save it on the history. */ + if (line_read && *line_read) + add_history (line_read); + + return (line_read); +@} +@end example + +This function gives the user the default behaviour of @key{TAB} +completion: completion on file names. If you do not want Readline to +complete on filenames, you can change the binding of the @key{TAB} key +with @code{rl_bind_key()}. + +@example +@code{int rl_bind_key (int @var{key}, rl_command_func_t *@var{function});} +@end example + +@code{rl_bind_key()} takes two arguments: @var{key} is the character that +you want to bind, and @var{function} is the address of the function to +call when @var{key} is pressed. Binding @key{TAB} to @code{rl_insert()} +makes @key{TAB} insert itself. +@code{rl_bind_key()} returns non-zero if @var{key} is not a valid +ASCII character code (between 0 and 255). + +Thus, to disable the default @key{TAB} behavior, the following suffices: +@example +@code{rl_bind_key ('\t', rl_insert);} +@end example + +This code should be executed once at the start of your program; you +might write a function called @code{initialize_readline()} which +performs this and other desired initializations, such as installing +custom completers (@pxref{Custom Completers}). + +@node Custom Functions +@section Custom Functions + +Readline provides many functions for manipulating the text of +the line, but it isn't possible to anticipate the needs of all +programs. This section describes the various functions and variables +defined within the Readline library which allow a user program to add +customized functionality to Readline. + +Before declaring any functions that customize Readline's behavior, or +using any functionality Readline provides in other code, an +application writer should include the file @code{} +in any file that uses Readline's features. Since some of the definitions +in @code{readline.h} use the @code{stdio} library, the file +@code{} should be included before @code{readline.h}. + +@code{readline.h} defines a C preprocessor variable that should +be treated as an integer, @code{RL_READLINE_VERSION}, which may +be used to conditionally compile application code depending on +the installed Readline version. The value is a hexadecimal +encoding of the major and minor version numbers of the library, +of the form 0x@var{MMmm}. @var{MM} is the two-digit major +version number; @var{mm} is the two-digit minor version number. +For Readline 4.2, for example, the value of +@code{RL_READLINE_VERSION} would be @code{0x0402}. + +@menu +* Readline Typedefs:: C declarations to make code readable. +* Function Writing:: Variables and calling conventions. +@end menu + +@node Readline Typedefs +@subsection Readline Typedefs + +For readabilty, we declare a number of new object types, all pointers +to functions. + +The reason for declaring these new types is to make it easier to write +code describing pointers to C functions with appropriately prototyped +arguments and return values. + +For instance, say we want to declare a variable @var{func} as a pointer +to a function which takes two @code{int} arguments and returns an +@code{int} (this is the type of all of the Readline bindable functions). +Instead of the classic C declaration + +@code{int (*func)();} + +@noindent +or the ANSI-C style declaration + +@code{int (*func)(int, int);} + +@noindent +we may write + +@code{rl_command_func_t *func;} + +The full list of function pointer types available is + +@table @code +@item typedef int rl_command_func_t (int, int); + +@item typedef char *rl_compentry_func_t (const char *, int); + +@item typedef char **rl_completion_func_t (const char *, int, int); + +@item typedef char *rl_quote_func_t (char *, int, char *); + +@item typedef char *rl_dequote_func_t (char *, int); + +@item typedef int rl_compignore_func_t (char **); + +@item typedef void rl_compdisp_func_t (char **, int, int); + +@item typedef int rl_hook_func_t (void); + +@item typedef int rl_getc_func_t (FILE *); + +@item typedef int rl_linebuf_func_t (char *, int); + +@item typedef int rl_intfunc_t (int); +@item #define rl_ivoidfunc_t rl_hook_func_t +@item typedef int rl_icpfunc_t (char *); +@item typedef int rl_icppfunc_t (char **); + +@item typedef void rl_voidfunc_t (void); +@item typedef void rl_vintfunc_t (int); +@item typedef void rl_vcpfunc_t (char *); +@item typedef void rl_vcppfunc_t (char **); + +@end table + +@node Function Writing +@subsection Writing a New Function + +In order to write new functions for Readline, you need to know the +calling conventions for keyboard-invoked functions, and the names of the +variables that describe the current state of the line read so far. + +The calling sequence for a command @code{foo} looks like + +@example +@code{int foo (int count, int key)} +@end example + +@noindent +where @var{count} is the numeric argument (or 1 if defaulted) and +@var{key} is the key that invoked this function. + +It is completely up to the function as to what should be done with the +numeric argument. Some functions use it as a repeat count, some +as a flag, and others to choose alternate behavior (refreshing the current +line as opposed to refreshing the screen, for example). Some choose to +ignore it. In general, if a +function uses the numeric argument as a repeat count, it should be able +to do something useful with both negative and positive arguments. +At the very least, it should be aware that it can be passed a +negative argument. + +A command function should return 0 if its action completes successfully, +and a non-zero value if some error occurs. +This is the convention obeyed by all of the builtin Readline bindable +command functions. + +@node Readline Variables +@section Readline Variables + +These variables are available to function writers. + +@deftypevar {char *} rl_line_buffer +This is the line gathered so far. You are welcome to modify the +contents of the line, but see @ref{Allowing Undoing}. The +function @code{rl_extend_line_buffer} is available to increase +the memory allocated to @code{rl_line_buffer}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_point +The offset of the current cursor position in @code{rl_line_buffer} +(the @emph{point}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_end +The number of characters present in @code{rl_line_buffer}. When +@code{rl_point} is at the end of the line, @code{rl_point} and +@code{rl_end} are equal. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_mark +The @var{mark} (saved position) in the current line. If set, the mark +and point define a @emph{region}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_done +Setting this to a non-zero value causes Readline to return the current +line immediately. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_num_chars_to_read +Setting this to a positive value before calling @code{readline()} causes +Readline to return after accepting that many characters, rather +than reading up to a character bound to @code{accept-line}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_pending_input +Setting this to a value makes it the next keystroke read. This is a +way to stuff a single character into the input stream. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_dispatching +Set to a non-zero value if a function is being called from a key binding; +zero otherwise. Application functions can test this to discover whether +they were called directly or by Readline's dispatching mechanism. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_erase_empty_line +Setting this to a non-zero value causes Readline to completely erase +the current line, including any prompt, any time a newline is typed as +the only character on an otherwise-empty line. The cursor is moved to +the beginning of the newly-blank line. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {char *} rl_prompt +The prompt Readline uses. This is set from the argument to +@code{readline()}, and should not be assigned to directly. +The @code{rl_set_prompt()} function (@pxref{Redisplay}) may +be used to modify the prompt string after calling @code{readline()}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_already_prompted +If an application wishes to display the prompt itself, rather than have +Readline do it the first time @code{readline()} is called, it should set +this variable to a non-zero value after displaying the prompt. +The prompt must also be passed as the argument to @code{readline()} so +the redisplay functions can update the display properly. +The calling application is responsible for managing the value; Readline +never sets it. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_library_version +The version number of this revision of the library. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_readline_version +An integer encoding the current version of the library. The encoding is +of the form 0x@var{MMmm}, where @var{MM} is the two-digit major version +number, and @var{mm} is the two-digit minor version number. +For example, for Readline-4.2, @code{rl_readline_version} would have the +value 0x0402. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_gnu_readline_p +Always set to 1, denoting that this is @sc{gnu} readline rather than some +emulation. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_terminal_name +The terminal type, used for initialization. If not set by the application, +Readline sets this to the value of the @env{TERM} environment variable +the first time it is called. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_readline_name +This variable is set to a unique name by each application using Readline. +The value allows conditional parsing of the inputrc file +(@pxref{Conditional Init Constructs}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {FILE *} rl_instream +The stdio stream from which Readline reads input. +If @code{NULL}, Readline defaults to @var{stdin}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {FILE *} rl_outstream +The stdio stream to which Readline performs output. +If @code{NULL}, Readline defaults to @var{stdout}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_prefer_env_winsize +If non-zero, Readline gives values found in the @env{LINES} and +@env{COLUMNS} environment variables greater precedence than values fetched +from the kernel when computing the screen dimensions. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_command_func_t *} rl_last_func +The address of the last command function Readline executed. May be used to +test whether or not a function is being executed twice in succession, for +example. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_startup_hook +If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call just +before @code{readline} prints the first prompt. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_pre_input_hook +If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call after +the first prompt has been printed and just before @code{readline} +starts reading input characters. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_event_hook +If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call periodically +when Readline is waiting for terminal input. +By default, this will be called at most ten times a second if there +is no keyboard input. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_getc_func_t *} rl_getc_function +If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer +to get a character from the input stream. By default, it is set to +@code{rl_getc}, the default Readline character input function +(@pxref{Character Input}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_voidfunc_t *} rl_redisplay_function +If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer +to update the display with the current contents of the editing buffer. +By default, it is set to @code{rl_redisplay}, the default Readline +redisplay function (@pxref{Redisplay}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_vintfunc_t *} rl_prep_term_function +If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer +to initialize the terminal. The function takes a single argument, an +@code{int} flag that says whether or not to use eight-bit characters. +By default, this is set to @code{rl_prep_terminal} +(@pxref{Terminal Management}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_voidfunc_t *} rl_deprep_term_function +If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer +to reset the terminal. This function should undo the effects of +@code{rl_prep_term_function}. +By default, this is set to @code{rl_deprep_terminal} +(@pxref{Terminal Management}). +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {Keymap} rl_executing_keymap +This variable is set to the keymap (@pxref{Keymaps}) in which the +currently executing readline function was found. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {Keymap} rl_binding_keymap +This variable is set to the keymap (@pxref{Keymaps}) in which the +last key binding occurred. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {char *} rl_executing_macro +This variable is set to the text of any currently-executing macro. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_readline_state +A variable with bit values that encapsulate the current Readline state. +A bit is set with the @code{RL_SETSTATE} macro, and unset with the +@code{RL_UNSETSTATE} macro. Use the @code{RL_ISSTATE} macro to test +whether a particular state bit is set. Current state bits include: + +@table @code +@item RL_STATE_NONE +Readline has not yet been called, nor has it begun to intialize. +@item RL_STATE_INITIALIZING +Readline is initializing its internal data structures. +@item RL_STATE_INITIALIZED +Readline has completed its initialization. +@item RL_STATE_TERMPREPPED +Readline has modified the terminal modes to do its own input and redisplay. +@item RL_STATE_READCMD +Readline is reading a command from the keyboard. +@item RL_STATE_METANEXT +Readline is reading more input after reading the meta-prefix character. +@item RL_STATE_DISPATCHING +Readline is dispatching to a command. +@item RL_STATE_MOREINPUT +Readline is reading more input while executing an editing command. +@item RL_STATE_ISEARCH +Readline is performing an incremental history search. +@item RL_STATE_NSEARCH +Readline is performing a non-incremental history search. +@item RL_STATE_SEARCH +Readline is searching backward or forward through the history for a string. +@item RL_STATE_NUMERICARG +Readline is reading a numeric argument. +@item RL_STATE_MACROINPUT +Readline is currently getting its input from a previously-defined keyboard +macro. +@item RL_STATE_MACRODEF +Readline is currently reading characters defining a keyboard macro. +@item RL_STATE_OVERWRITE +Readline is in overwrite mode. +@item RL_STATE_COMPLETING +Readline is performing word completion. +@item RL_STATE_SIGHANDLER +Readline is currently executing the readline signal handler. +@item RL_STATE_UNDOING +Readline is performing an undo. +@item RL_STATE_DONE +Readline has read a key sequence bound to @code{accept-line} +and is about to return the line to the caller. +@end table + +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_explicit_arg +Set to a non-zero value if an explicit numeric argument was specified by +the user. Only valid in a bindable command function. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_numeric_arg +Set to the value of any numeric argument explicitly specified by the user +before executing the current Readline function. Only valid in a bindable +command function. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_editing_mode +Set to a value denoting Readline's current editing mode. A value of +@var{1} means Readline is currently in emacs mode; @var{0} +means that vi mode is active. +@end deftypevar + + +@node Readline Convenience Functions +@section Readline Convenience Functions + +@menu +* Function Naming:: How to give a function you write a name. +* Keymaps:: Making keymaps. +* Binding Keys:: Changing Keymaps. +* Associating Function Names and Bindings:: Translate function names to + key sequences. +* Allowing Undoing:: How to make your functions undoable. +* Redisplay:: Functions to control line display. +* Modifying Text:: Functions to modify @code{rl_line_buffer}. +* Character Input:: Functions to read keyboard input. +* Terminal Management:: Functions to manage terminal settings. +* Utility Functions:: Generally useful functions and hooks. +* Miscellaneous Functions:: Functions that don't fall into any category. +* Alternate Interface:: Using Readline in a `callback' fashion. +* A Readline Example:: An example Readline function. +@end menu + +@node Function Naming +@subsection Naming a Function + +The user can dynamically change the bindings of keys while using +Readline. This is done by representing the function with a descriptive +name. The user is able to type the descriptive name when referring to +the function. Thus, in an init file, one might find + +@example +Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word +@end example + +This binds the keystroke @key{Meta-Rubout} to the function +@emph{descriptively} named @code{backward-kill-word}. You, as the +programmer, should bind the functions you write to descriptive names as +well. Readline provides a function for doing that: + +@deftypefun int rl_add_defun (const char *name, rl_command_func_t *function, int key) +Add @var{name} to the list of named functions. Make @var{function} be +the function that gets called. If @var{key} is not -1, then bind it to +@var{function} using @code{rl_bind_key()}. +@end deftypefun + +Using this function alone is sufficient for most applications. +It is the recommended way to add a few functions to the default +functions that Readline has built in. +If you need to do something other than adding a function to Readline, +you may need to use the underlying functions described below. + +@node Keymaps +@subsection Selecting a Keymap + +Key bindings take place on a @dfn{keymap}. The keymap is the +association between the keys that the user types and the functions that +get run. You can make your own keymaps, copy existing keymaps, and tell +Readline which keymap to use. + +@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_bare_keymap (void) +Returns a new, empty keymap. The space for the keymap is allocated with +@code{malloc()}; the caller should free it by calling +@code{rl_discard_keymap()} when done. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun Keymap rl_copy_keymap (Keymap map) +Return a new keymap which is a copy of @var{map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_keymap (void) +Return a new keymap with the printing characters bound to rl_insert, +the lowercase Meta characters bound to run their equivalents, and +the Meta digits bound to produce numeric arguments. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_discard_keymap (Keymap keymap) +Free the storage associated with @var{keymap}. +@end deftypefun + +Readline has several internal keymaps. These functions allow you to +change which keymap is active. + +@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap (void) +Returns the currently active keymap. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_set_keymap (Keymap keymap) +Makes @var{keymap} the currently active keymap. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap_by_name (const char *name) +Return the keymap matching @var{name}. @var{name} is one which would +be supplied in a @code{set keymap} inputrc line (@pxref{Readline Init File}). +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_get_keymap_name (Keymap keymap) +Return the name matching @var{keymap}. @var{name} is one which would +be supplied in a @code{set keymap} inputrc line (@pxref{Readline Init File}). +@end deftypefun + +@node Binding Keys +@subsection Binding Keys + +Key sequences are associate with functions through the keymap. +Readline has several internal keymaps: @code{emacs_standard_keymap}, +@code{emacs_meta_keymap}, @code{emacs_ctlx_keymap}, +@code{vi_movement_keymap}, and @code{vi_insertion_keymap}. +@code{emacs_standard_keymap} is the default, and the examples in +this manual assume that. + +Since @code{readline()} installs a set of default key bindings the first +time it is called, there is always the danger that a custom binding +installed before the first call to @code{readline()} will be overridden. +An alternate mechanism is to install custom key bindings in an +initialization function assigned to the @code{rl_startup_hook} variable +(@pxref{Readline Variables}). + +These functions manage key bindings. + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_key (int key, rl_command_func_t *function) +Binds @var{key} to @var{function} in the currently active keymap. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{key}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_key_in_map (int key, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Bind @var{key} to @var{function} in @var{map}. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{key}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_key_if_unbound (int key, rl_command_func_t *function) +Binds @var{key} to @var{function} if it is not already bound in the +currently active keymap. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{key} or if @var{key} is +already bound. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_key_if_unbound_in_map (int key, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Binds @var{key} to @var{function} if it is not already bound in @var{map}. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{key} or if @var{key} is +already bound. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_unbind_key (int key) +Bind @var{key} to the null function in the currently active keymap. +Returns non-zero in case of error. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_unbind_key_in_map (int key, Keymap map) +Bind @var{key} to the null function in @var{map}. +Returns non-zero in case of error. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_unbind_function_in_map (rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Unbind all keys that execute @var{function} in @var{map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_unbind_command_in_map (const char *command, Keymap map) +Unbind all keys that are bound to @var{command} in @var{map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_keyseq (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function) +Bind the key sequence represented by the string @var{keyseq} to the function +@var{function}, beginning in the current keymap. +This makes new keymaps as necessary. +The return value is non-zero if @var{keyseq} is invalid. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_keyseq_in_map (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Bind the key sequence represented by the string @var{keyseq} to the function +@var{function}. This makes new keymaps as necessary. +Initial bindings are performed in @var{map}. +The return value is non-zero if @var{keyseq} is invalid. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_set_key (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Equivalent to @code{rl_bind_keyseq_in_map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_keyseq_if_unbound (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function) +Binds @var{keyseq} to @var{function} if it is not already bound in the +currently active keymap. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{keyseq} or if @var{keyseq} is +already bound. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_bind_keyseq_if_unbound_in_map (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Binds @var{keyseq} to @var{function} if it is not already bound in @var{map}. +Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{keyseq} or if @var{keyseq} is +already bound. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_generic_bind (int type, const char *keyseq, char *data, Keymap map) +Bind the key sequence represented by the string @var{keyseq} to the arbitrary +pointer @var{data}. @var{type} says what kind of data is pointed to by +@var{data}; this can be a function (@code{ISFUNC}), a macro +(@code{ISMACR}), or a keymap (@code{ISKMAP}). This makes new keymaps as +necessary. The initial keymap in which to do bindings is @var{map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_parse_and_bind (char *line) +Parse @var{line} as if it had been read from the @code{inputrc} file and +perform any key bindings and variable assignments found +(@pxref{Readline Init File}). +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_read_init_file (const char *filename) +Read keybindings and variable assignments from @var{filename} +(@pxref{Readline Init File}). +@end deftypefun + +@node Associating Function Names and Bindings +@subsection Associating Function Names and Bindings + +These functions allow you to find out what keys invoke named functions +and the functions invoked by a particular key sequence. You may also +associate a new function name with an arbitrary function. + +@deftypefun {rl_command_func_t *} rl_named_function (const char *name) +Return the function with name @var{name}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {rl_command_func_t *} rl_function_of_keyseq (const char *keyseq, Keymap map, int *type) +Return the function invoked by @var{keyseq} in keymap @var{map}. +If @var{map} is @code{NULL}, the current keymap is used. If @var{type} is +not @code{NULL}, the type of the object is returned in the @code{int} variable +it points to (one of @code{ISFUNC}, @code{ISKMAP}, or @code{ISMACR}). +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs (rl_command_func_t *function) +Return an array of strings representing the key sequences used to +invoke @var{function} in the current keymap. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs_in_map (rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map) +Return an array of strings representing the key sequences used to +invoke @var{function} in the keymap @var{map}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_function_dumper (int readable) +Print the readline function names and the key sequences currently +bound to them to @code{rl_outstream}. If @var{readable} is non-zero, +the list is formatted in such a way that it can be made part of an +@code{inputrc} file and re-read. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_list_funmap_names (void) +Print the names of all bindable Readline functions to @code{rl_outstream}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {const char **} rl_funmap_names (void) +Return a NULL terminated array of known function names. The array is +sorted. The array itself is allocated, but not the strings inside. You +should @code{free()} the array when you are done, but not the pointers. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_add_funmap_entry (const char *name, rl_command_func_t *function) +Add @var{name} to the list of bindable Readline command names, and make +@var{function} the function to be called when @var{name} is invoked. +@end deftypefun + +@node Allowing Undoing +@subsection Allowing Undoing + +Supporting the undo command is a painless thing, and makes your +functions much more useful. It is certainly easy to try +something if you know you can undo it. + +If your function simply inserts text once, or deletes text once, and +uses @code{rl_insert_text()} or @code{rl_delete_text()} to do it, then +undoing is already done for you automatically. + +If you do multiple insertions or multiple deletions, or any combination +of these operations, you should group them together into one operation. +This is done with @code{rl_begin_undo_group()} and +@code{rl_end_undo_group()}. + +The types of events that can be undone are: + +@smallexample +enum undo_code @{ UNDO_DELETE, UNDO_INSERT, UNDO_BEGIN, UNDO_END @}; +@end smallexample + +Notice that @code{UNDO_DELETE} means to insert some text, and +@code{UNDO_INSERT} means to delete some text. That is, the undo code +tells what to undo, not how to undo it. @code{UNDO_BEGIN} and +@code{UNDO_END} are tags added by @code{rl_begin_undo_group()} and +@code{rl_end_undo_group()}. + +@deftypefun int rl_begin_undo_group (void) +Begins saving undo information in a group construct. The undo +information usually comes from calls to @code{rl_insert_text()} and +@code{rl_delete_text()}, but could be the result of calls to +@code{rl_add_undo()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_end_undo_group (void) +Closes the current undo group started with @code{rl_begin_undo_group +()}. There should be one call to @code{rl_end_undo_group()} +for each call to @code{rl_begin_undo_group()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_add_undo (enum undo_code what, int start, int end, char *text) +Remember how to undo an event (according to @var{what}). The affected +text runs from @var{start} to @var{end}, and encompasses @var{text}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_free_undo_list (void) +Free the existing undo list. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_do_undo (void) +Undo the first thing on the undo list. Returns @code{0} if there was +nothing to undo, non-zero if something was undone. +@end deftypefun + +Finally, if you neither insert nor delete text, but directly modify the +existing text (e.g., change its case), call @code{rl_modifying()} +once, just before you modify the text. You must supply the indices of +the text range that you are going to modify. + +@deftypefun int rl_modifying (int start, int end) +Tell Readline to save the text between @var{start} and @var{end} as a +single undo unit. It is assumed that you will subsequently modify +that text. +@end deftypefun + +@node Redisplay +@subsection Redisplay + +@deftypefun void rl_redisplay (void) +Change what's displayed on the screen to reflect the current contents +of @code{rl_line_buffer}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_forced_update_display (void) +Force the line to be updated and redisplayed, whether or not +Readline thinks the screen display is correct. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line (void) +Tell the update functions that we have moved onto a new (empty) line, +usually after ouputting a newline. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line_with_prompt (void) +Tell the update functions that we have moved onto a new line, with +@var{rl_prompt} already displayed. +This could be used by applications that want to output the prompt string +themselves, but still need Readline to know the prompt string length for +redisplay. +It should be used after setting @var{rl_already_prompted}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_reset_line_state (void) +Reset the display state to a clean state and redisplay the current line +starting on a new line. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_crlf (void) +Move the cursor to the start of the next screen line. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_show_char (int c) +Display character @var{c} on @code{rl_outstream}. +If Readline has not been set to display meta characters directly, this +will convert meta characters to a meta-prefixed key sequence. +This is intended for use by applications which wish to do their own +redisplay. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_message (const char *, @dots{}) +The arguments are a format string as would be supplied to @code{printf}, +possibly containing conversion specifications such as @samp{%d}, and +any additional arguments necessary to satisfy the conversion specifications. +The resulting string is displayed in the @dfn{echo area}. The echo area +is also used to display numeric arguments and search strings. +You should call @code{rl_save_prompt} to save the prompt information +before calling this function. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_clear_message (void) +Clear the message in the echo area. If the prompt was saved with a call to +@code{rl_save_prompt} before the last call to @code{rl_message}, +call @code{rl_restore_prompt} before calling this function. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_save_prompt (void) +Save the local Readline prompt display state in preparation for +displaying a new message in the message area with @code{rl_message()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_restore_prompt (void) +Restore the local Readline prompt display state saved by the most +recent call to @code{rl_save_prompt}. +if @code{rl_save_prompt} was called to save the prompt before a call +to @code{rl_message}, this function should be called before the +corresponding call to @code{rl_clear_message}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_expand_prompt (char *prompt) +Expand any special character sequences in @var{prompt} and set up the +local Readline prompt redisplay variables. +This function is called by @code{readline()}. It may also be called to +expand the primary prompt if the @code{rl_on_new_line_with_prompt()} +function or @code{rl_already_prompted} variable is used. +It returns the number of visible characters on the last line of the +(possibly multi-line) prompt. +Applications may indicate that the prompt contains characters that take +up no physical screen space when displayed by bracketing a sequence of +such characters with the special markers @code{RL_PROMPT_START_IGNORE} +and @code{RL_PROMPT_END_IGNORE} (declared in @file{readline.h}. This may +be used to embed terminal-specific escape sequences in prompts. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_set_prompt (const char *prompt) +Make Readline use @var{prompt} for subsequent redisplay. This calls +@code{rl_expand_prompt()} to expand the prompt and sets @code{rl_prompt} +to the result. +@end deftypefun + +@node Modifying Text +@subsection Modifying Text + +@deftypefun int rl_insert_text (const char *text) +Insert @var{text} into the line at the current cursor position. +Returns the number of characters inserted. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_delete_text (int start, int end) +Delete the text between @var{start} and @var{end} in the current line. +Returns the number of characters deleted. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_copy_text (int start, int end) +Return a copy of the text between @var{start} and @var{end} in +the current line. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_kill_text (int start, int end) +Copy the text between @var{start} and @var{end} in the current line +to the kill ring, appending or prepending to the last kill if the +last command was a kill command. The text is deleted. +If @var{start} is less than @var{end}, +the text is appended, otherwise prepended. If the last command was +not a kill, a new kill ring slot is used. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_push_macro_input (char *macro) +Cause @var{macro} to be inserted into the line, as if it had been invoked +by a key bound to a macro. Not especially useful; use +@code{rl_insert_text()} instead. +@end deftypefun + +@node Character Input +@subsection Character Input + +@deftypefun int rl_read_key (void) +Return the next character available from Readline's current input stream. +This handles input inserted into +the input stream via @var{rl_pending_input} (@pxref{Readline Variables}) +and @code{rl_stuff_char()}, macros, and characters read from the keyboard. +While waiting for input, this function will call any function assigned to +the @code{rl_event_hook} variable. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_getc (FILE *stream) +Return the next character available from @var{stream}, which is assumed to +be the keyboard. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_stuff_char (int c) +Insert @var{c} into the Readline input stream. It will be "read" +before Readline attempts to read characters from the terminal with +@code{rl_read_key()}. Up to 512 characters may be pushed back. +@code{rl_stuff_char} returns 1 if the character was successfully inserted; +0 otherwise. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_execute_next (int c) +Make @var{c} be the next command to be executed when @code{rl_read_key()} +is called. This sets @var{rl_pending_input}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_clear_pending_input (void) +Unset @var{rl_pending_input}, effectively negating the effect of any +previous call to @code{rl_execute_next()}. This works only if the +pending input has not already been read with @code{rl_read_key()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_set_keyboard_input_timeout (int u) +While waiting for keyboard input in @code{rl_read_key()}, Readline will +wait for @var{u} microseconds for input before calling any function +assigned to @code{rl_event_hook}. The default waiting period is +one-tenth of a second. Returns the old timeout value. +@end deftypefun + +@node Terminal Management +@subsection Terminal Management + +@deftypefun void rl_prep_terminal (int meta_flag) +Modify the terminal settings for Readline's use, so @code{readline()} +can read a single character at a time from the keyboard. +The @var{meta_flag} argument should be non-zero if Readline should +read eight-bit input. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_deprep_terminal (void) +Undo the effects of @code{rl_prep_terminal()}, leaving the terminal in +the state in which it was before the most recent call to +@code{rl_prep_terminal()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_tty_set_default_bindings (Keymap kmap) +Read the operating system's terminal editing characters (as would be +displayed by @code{stty}) to their Readline equivalents. +The bindings are performed in @var{kmap}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_tty_unset_default_bindings (Keymap kmap) +Reset the bindings manipulated by @code{rl_tty_set_default_bindings} so +that the terminal editing characters are bound to @code{rl_insert}. +The bindings are performed in @var{kmap}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_reset_terminal (const char *terminal_name) +Reinitialize Readline's idea of the terminal settings using +@var{terminal_name} as the terminal type (e.g., @code{vt100}). +If @var{terminal_name} is @code{NULL}, the value of the @code{TERM} +environment variable is used. +@end deftypefun + +@node Utility Functions +@subsection Utility Functions + +@deftypefun void rl_replace_line (const char *text, int clear_undo) +Replace the contents of @code{rl_line_buffer} with @var{text}. +The point and mark are preserved, if possible. +If @var{clear_undo} is non-zero, the undo list associated with the +current line is cleared. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_extend_line_buffer (int len) +Ensure that @code{rl_line_buffer} has enough space to hold @var{len} +characters, possibly reallocating it if necessary. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_initialize (void) +Initialize or re-initialize Readline's internal state. +It's not strictly necessary to call this; @code{readline()} calls it before +reading any input. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_ding (void) +Ring the terminal bell, obeying the setting of @code{bell-style}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_alphabetic (int c) +Return 1 if @var{c} is an alphabetic character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_display_match_list (char **matches, int len, int max) +A convenience function for displaying a list of strings in +columnar format on Readline's output stream. @code{matches} is the list +of strings, in argv format, such as a list of completion matches. +@code{len} is the number of strings in @code{matches}, and @code{max} +is the length of the longest string in @code{matches}. This function uses +the setting of @code{print-completions-horizontally} to select how the +matches are displayed (@pxref{Readline Init File Syntax}). +@end deftypefun + +The following are implemented as macros, defined in @code{chardefs.h}. +Applications should refrain from using them. + +@deftypefun int _rl_uppercase_p (int c) +Return 1 if @var{c} is an uppercase alphabetic character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int _rl_lowercase_p (int c) +Return 1 if @var{c} is a lowercase alphabetic character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int _rl_digit_p (int c) +Return 1 if @var{c} is a numeric character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int _rl_to_upper (int c) +If @var{c} is a lowercase alphabetic character, return the corresponding +uppercase character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int _rl_to_lower (int c) +If @var{c} is an uppercase alphabetic character, return the corresponding +lowercase character. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int _rl_digit_value (int c) +If @var{c} is a number, return the value it represents. +@end deftypefun + +@node Miscellaneous Functions +@subsection Miscellaneous Functions + +@deftypefun int rl_macro_bind (const char *keyseq, const char *macro, Keymap map) +Bind the key sequence @var{keyseq} to invoke the macro @var{macro}. +The binding is performed in @var{map}. When @var{keyseq} is invoked, the +@var{macro} will be inserted into the line. This function is deprecated; +use @code{rl_generic_bind()} instead. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_macro_dumper (int readable) +Print the key sequences bound to macros and their values, using +the current keymap, to @code{rl_outstream}. +If @var{readable} is non-zero, the list is formatted in such a way +that it can be made part of an @code{inputrc} file and re-read. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_variable_bind (const char *variable, const char *value) +Make the Readline variable @var{variable} have @var{value}. +This behaves as if the readline command +@samp{set @var{variable} @var{value}} had been executed in an @code{inputrc} +file (@pxref{Readline Init File Syntax}). +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_variable_value (const char *variable) +Return a string representing the value of the Readline variable @var{variable}. +For boolean variables, this string is either @samp{on} or @samp{off}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_variable_dumper (int readable) +Print the readline variable names and their current values +to @code{rl_outstream}. +If @var{readable} is non-zero, the list is formatted in such a way +that it can be made part of an @code{inputrc} file and re-read. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_set_paren_blink_timeout (int u) +Set the time interval (in microseconds) that Readline waits when showing +a balancing character when @code{blink-matching-paren} has been enabled. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_get_termcap (const char *cap) +Retrieve the string value of the termcap capability @var{cap}. +Readline fetches the termcap entry for the current terminal name and +uses those capabilities to move around the screen line and perform other +terminal-specific operations, like erasing a line. Readline does not +use all of a terminal's capabilities, and this function will return +values for only those capabilities Readline uses. +@end deftypefun + +@node Alternate Interface +@subsection Alternate Interface + +An alternate interface is available to plain @code{readline()}. Some +applications need to interleave keyboard I/O with file, device, or +window system I/O, typically by using a main loop to @code{select()} +on various file descriptors. To accomodate this need, readline can +also be invoked as a `callback' function from an event loop. There +are functions available to make this easy. + +@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_install (const char *prompt, rl_vcpfunc_t *lhandler) +Set up the terminal for readline I/O and display the initial +expanded value of @var{prompt}. Save the value of @var{lhandler} to +use as a function to call when a complete line of input has been entered. +The function takes the text of the line as an argument. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_callback_read_char (void) +Whenever an application determines that keyboard input is available, it +should call @code{rl_callback_read_char()}, which will read the next +character from the current input source. +If that character completes the line, @code{rl_callback_read_char} will +invoke the @var{lhandler} function saved by @code{rl_callback_handler_install} +to process the line. +Before calling the @var{lhandler} function, the terminal settings are +reset to the values they had before calling +@code{rl_callback_handler_install}. +If the @var{lhandler} function returns, +the terminal settings are modified for Readline's use again. +@code{EOF} is indicated by calling @var{lhandler} with a +@code{NULL} line. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_remove (void) +Restore the terminal to its initial state and remove the line handler. +This may be called from within a callback as well as independently. +If the @var{lhandler} installed by @code{rl_callback_handler_install} +does not exit the program, either this function or the function referred +to by the value of @code{rl_deprep_term_function} should be called before +the program exits to reset the terminal settings. +@end deftypefun + +@node A Readline Example +@subsection A Readline Example + +Here is a function which changes lowercase characters to their uppercase +equivalents, and uppercase characters to lowercase. If +this function was bound to @samp{M-c}, then typing @samp{M-c} would +change the case of the character under point. Typing @samp{M-1 0 M-c} +would change the case of the following 10 characters, leaving the cursor on +the last character changed. + +@example +/* Invert the case of the COUNT following characters. */ +int +invert_case_line (count, key) + int count, key; +@{ + register int start, end, i; + + start = rl_point; + + if (rl_point >= rl_end) + return (0); + + if (count < 0) + @{ + direction = -1; + count = -count; + @} + else + direction = 1; + + /* Find the end of the range to modify. */ + end = start + (count * direction); + + /* Force it to be within range. */ + if (end > rl_end) + end = rl_end; + else if (end < 0) + end = 0; + + if (start == end) + return (0); + + if (start > end) + @{ + int temp = start; + start = end; + end = temp; + @} + + /* Tell readline that we are modifying the line, + so it will save the undo information. */ + rl_modifying (start, end); + + for (i = start; i != end; i++) + @{ + if (_rl_uppercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i])) + rl_line_buffer[i] = _rl_to_lower (rl_line_buffer[i]); + else if (_rl_lowercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i])) + rl_line_buffer[i] = _rl_to_upper (rl_line_buffer[i]); + @} + /* Move point to on top of the last character changed. */ + rl_point = (direction == 1) ? end - 1 : start; + return (0); +@} +@end example + +@node Readline Signal Handling +@section Readline Signal Handling + +Signals are asynchronous events sent to a process by the Unix kernel, +sometimes on behalf of another process. They are intended to indicate +exceptional events, like a user pressing the interrupt key on his terminal, +or a network connection being broken. There is a class of signals that can +be sent to the process currently reading input from the keyboard. Since +Readline changes the terminal attributes when it is called, it needs to +perform special processing when such a signal is received in order to +restore the terminal to a sane state, or provide application writers with +functions to do so manually. + +Readline contains an internal signal handler that is installed for a +number of signals (@code{SIGINT}, @code{SIGQUIT}, @code{SIGTERM}, +@code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGTSTP}, @code{SIGTTIN}, and @code{SIGTTOU}). +When one of these signals is received, the signal handler +will reset the terminal attributes to those that were in effect before +@code{readline()} was called, reset the signal handling to what it was +before @code{readline()} was called, and resend the signal to the calling +application. +If and when the calling application's signal handler returns, Readline +will reinitialize the terminal and continue to accept input. +When a @code{SIGINT} is received, the Readline signal handler performs +some additional work, which will cause any partially-entered line to be +aborted (see the description of @code{rl_free_line_state()} below). + +There is an additional Readline signal handler, for @code{SIGWINCH}, which +the kernel sends to a process whenever the terminal's size changes (for +example, if a user resizes an @code{xterm}). The Readline @code{SIGWINCH} +handler updates Readline's internal screen size information, and then calls +any @code{SIGWINCH} signal handler the calling application has installed. +Readline calls the application's @code{SIGWINCH} signal handler without +resetting the terminal to its original state. If the application's signal +handler does more than update its idea of the terminal size and return (for +example, a @code{longjmp} back to a main processing loop), it @emph{must} +call @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal()} (described below), to restore the +terminal state. + +Readline provides two variables that allow application writers to +control whether or not it will catch certain signals and act on them +when they are received. It is important that applications change the +values of these variables only when calling @code{readline()}, not in +a signal handler, so Readline's internal signal state is not corrupted. + +@deftypevar int rl_catch_signals +If this variable is non-zero, Readline will install signal handlers for +@code{SIGINT}, @code{SIGQUIT}, @code{SIGTERM}, @code{SIGALRM}, +@code{SIGTSTP}, @code{SIGTTIN}, and @code{SIGTTOU}. + +The default value of @code{rl_catch_signals} is 1. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_catch_sigwinch +If this variable is non-zero, Readline will install a signal handler for +@code{SIGWINCH}. + +The default value of @code{rl_catch_sigwinch} is 1. +@end deftypevar + +If an application does not wish to have Readline catch any signals, or +to handle signals other than those Readline catches (@code{SIGHUP}, +for example), +Readline provides convenience functions to do the necessary terminal +and internal state cleanup upon receipt of a signal. + +@deftypefun void rl_cleanup_after_signal (void) +This function will reset the state of the terminal to what it was before +@code{readline()} was called, and remove the Readline signal handlers for +all signals, depending on the values of @code{rl_catch_signals} and +@code{rl_catch_sigwinch}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_free_line_state (void) +This will free any partial state associated with the current input line +(undo information, any partial history entry, any partially-entered +keyboard macro, and any partially-entered numeric argument). This +should be called before @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal()}. The +Readline signal handler for @code{SIGINT} calls this to abort the +current input line. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_reset_after_signal (void) +This will reinitialize the terminal and reinstall any Readline signal +handlers, depending on the values of @code{rl_catch_signals} and +@code{rl_catch_sigwinch}. +@end deftypefun + +If an application does not wish Readline to catch @code{SIGWINCH}, it may +call @code{rl_resize_terminal()} or @code{rl_set_screen_size()} to force +Readline to update its idea of the terminal size when a @code{SIGWINCH} +is received. + +@deftypefun void rl_resize_terminal (void) +Update Readline's internal screen size by reading values from the kernel. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_set_screen_size (int rows, int cols) +Set Readline's idea of the terminal size to @var{rows} rows and +@var{cols} columns. If either @var{rows} or @var{columns} is less than +or equal to 0, Readline's idea of that terminal dimension is unchanged. +@end deftypefun + +If an application does not want to install a @code{SIGWINCH} handler, but +is still interested in the screen dimensions, Readline's idea of the screen +size may be queried. + +@deftypefun void rl_get_screen_size (int *rows, int *cols) +Return Readline's idea of the terminal's size in the +variables pointed to by the arguments. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun void rl_reset_screen_size (void) +Cause Readline to reobtain the screen size and recalculate its dimensions. +@end deftypefun + +The following functions install and remove Readline's signal handlers. + +@deftypefun int rl_set_signals (void) +Install Readline's signal handler for @code{SIGINT}, @code{SIGQUIT}, +@code{SIGTERM}, @code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGTSTP}, @code{SIGTTIN}, +@code{SIGTTOU}, and @code{SIGWINCH}, depending on the values of +@code{rl_catch_signals} and @code{rl_catch_sigwinch}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_clear_signals (void) +Remove all of the Readline signal handlers installed by +@code{rl_set_signals()}. +@end deftypefun + +@node Custom Completers +@section Custom Completers +@cindex application-specific completion functions + +Typically, a program that reads commands from the user has a way of +disambiguating commands and data. If your program is one of these, then +it can provide completion for commands, data, or both. +The following sections describe how your program and Readline +cooperate to provide this service. + +@menu +* How Completing Works:: The logic used to do completion. +* Completion Functions:: Functions provided by Readline. +* Completion Variables:: Variables which control completion. +* A Short Completion Example:: An example of writing completer subroutines. +@end menu + +@node How Completing Works +@subsection How Completing Works + +In order to complete some text, the full list of possible completions +must be available. That is, it is not possible to accurately +expand a partial word without knowing all of the possible words +which make sense in that context. The Readline library provides +the user interface to completion, and two of the most common +completion functions: filename and username. For completing other types +of text, you must write your own completion function. This section +describes exactly what such functions must do, and provides an example. + +There are three major functions used to perform completion: + +@enumerate +@item +The user-interface function @code{rl_complete()}. This function is +called with the same arguments as other bindable Readline functions: +@var{count} and @var{invoking_key}. +It isolates the word to be completed and calls +@code{rl_completion_matches()} to generate a list of possible completions. +It then either lists the possible completions, inserts the possible +completions, or actually performs the +completion, depending on which behavior is desired. + +@item +The internal function @code{rl_completion_matches()} uses an +application-supplied @dfn{generator} function to generate the list of +possible matches, and then returns the array of these matches. +The caller should place the address of its generator function in +@code{rl_completion_entry_function}. + +@item +The generator function is called repeatedly from +@code{rl_completion_matches()}, returning a string each time. The +arguments to the generator function are @var{text} and @var{state}. +@var{text} is the partial word to be completed. @var{state} is zero the +first time the function is called, allowing the generator to perform +any necessary initialization, and a positive non-zero integer for +each subsequent call. The generator function returns +@code{(char *)NULL} to inform @code{rl_completion_matches()} that there are +no more possibilities left. Usually the generator function computes the +list of possible completions when @var{state} is zero, and returns them +one at a time on subsequent calls. Each string the generator function +returns as a match must be allocated with @code{malloc()}; Readline +frees the strings when it has finished with them. +Such a generator function is referred to as an +@dfn{application-specific completion function}. + +@end enumerate + +@deftypefun int rl_complete (int ignore, int invoking_key) +Complete the word at or before point. You have supplied the function +that does the initial simple matching selection algorithm (see +@code{rl_completion_matches()}). The default is to do filename completion. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypevar {rl_compentry_func_t *} rl_completion_entry_function +This is a pointer to the generator function for +@code{rl_completion_matches()}. +If the value of @code{rl_completion_entry_function} is +@code{NULL} then the default filename generator +function, @code{rl_filename_completion_function()}, is used. +An @dfn{application-specific completion function} is a function whose +address is assigned to @code{rl_completion_entry_function} and whose +return values are used to generate possible completions. +@end deftypevar + +@node Completion Functions +@subsection Completion Functions + +Here is the complete list of callable completion functions present in +Readline. + +@deftypefun int rl_complete_internal (int what_to_do) +Complete the word at or before point. @var{what_to_do} says what to do +with the completion. A value of @samp{?} means list the possible +completions. @samp{TAB} means do standard completion. @samp{*} means +insert all of the possible completions. @samp{!} means to display +all of the possible completions, if there is more than one, as well as +performing partial completion. @samp{@@} is similar to @samp{!}, but +possible completions are not listed if the possible completions share +a common prefix. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_complete (int ignore, int invoking_key) +Complete the word at or before point. You have supplied the function +that does the initial simple matching selection algorithm (see +@code{rl_completion_matches()} and @code{rl_completion_entry_function}). +The default is to do filename +completion. This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an +argument depending on @var{invoking_key}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_possible_completions (int count, int invoking_key) +List the possible completions. See description of @code{rl_complete +()}. This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an argument of +@samp{?}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_insert_completions (int count, int invoking_key) +Insert the list of possible completions into the line, deleting the +partially-completed word. See description of @code{rl_complete()}. +This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an argument of @samp{*}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun int rl_completion_mode (rl_command_func_t *cfunc) +Returns the apppriate value to pass to @code{rl_complete_internal()} +depending on whether @var{cfunc} was called twice in succession and +the values of the @code{show-all-if-ambiguous} and +@code{show-all-if-unmodified} variables. +Application-specific completion functions may use this function to present +the same interface as @code{rl_complete()}. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char **} rl_completion_matches (const char *text, rl_compentry_func_t *entry_func) +Returns an array of strings which is a list of completions for +@var{text}. If there are no completions, returns @code{NULL}. +The first entry in the returned array is the substitution for @var{text}. +The remaining entries are the possible completions. The array is +terminated with a @code{NULL} pointer. + +@var{entry_func} is a function of two args, and returns a +@code{char *}. The first argument is @var{text}. The second is a +state argument; it is zero on the first call, and non-zero on subsequent +calls. @var{entry_func} returns a @code{NULL} pointer to the caller +when there are no more matches. +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_filename_completion_function (const char *text, int state) +A generator function for filename completion in the general case. +@var{text} is a partial filename. +The Bash source is a useful reference for writing application-specific +completion functions (the Bash completion functions call this and other +Readline functions). +@end deftypefun + +@deftypefun {char *} rl_username_completion_function (const char *text, int state) +A completion generator for usernames. @var{text} contains a partial +username preceded by a random character (usually @samp{~}). As with all +completion generators, @var{state} is zero on the first call and non-zero +for subsequent calls. +@end deftypefun + +@node Completion Variables +@subsection Completion Variables + +@deftypevar {rl_compentry_func_t *} rl_completion_entry_function +A pointer to the generator function for @code{rl_completion_matches()}. +@code{NULL} means to use @code{rl_filename_completion_function()}, +the default filename completer. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_completion_func_t *} rl_attempted_completion_function +A pointer to an alternative function to create matches. +The function is called with @var{text}, @var{start}, and @var{end}. +@var{start} and @var{end} are indices in @code{rl_line_buffer} defining +the boundaries of @var{text}, which is a character string. +If this function exists and returns @code{NULL}, or if this variable is +set to @code{NULL}, then @code{rl_complete()} will call the value of +@code{rl_completion_entry_function} to generate matches, otherwise the +array of strings returned will be used. +If this function sets the @code{rl_attempted_completion_over} +variable to a non-zero value, Readline will not perform its default +completion even if this function returns no matches. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_quote_func_t *} rl_filename_quoting_function +A pointer to a function that will quote a filename in an +application-specific fashion. This is called if filename completion is being +attempted and one of the characters in @code{rl_filename_quote_characters} +appears in a completed filename. The function is called with +@var{text}, @var{match_type}, and @var{quote_pointer}. The @var{text} +is the filename to be quoted. The @var{match_type} is either +@code{SINGLE_MATCH}, if there is only one completion match, or +@code{MULT_MATCH}. Some functions use this to decide whether or not to +insert a closing quote character. The @var{quote_pointer} is a pointer +to any opening quote character the user typed. Some functions choose +to reset this character. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_dequote_func_t *} rl_filename_dequoting_function +A pointer to a function that will remove application-specific quoting +characters from a filename before completion is attempted, so those +characters do not interfere with matching the text against names in +the filesystem. It is called with @var{text}, the text of the word +to be dequoted, and @var{quote_char}, which is the quoting character +that delimits the filename (usually @samp{'} or @samp{"}). If +@var{quote_char} is zero, the filename was not in an embedded string. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_linebuf_func_t *} rl_char_is_quoted_p +A pointer to a function to call that determines whether or not a specific +character in the line buffer is quoted, according to whatever quoting +mechanism the program calling Readline uses. The function is called with +two arguments: @var{text}, the text of the line, and @var{index}, the +index of the character in the line. It is used to decide whether a +character found in @code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} should be +used to break words for the completer. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_compignore_func_t *} rl_ignore_some_completions_function +This function, if defined, is called by the completer when real filename +completion is done, after all the matching names have been generated. +It is passed a @code{NULL} terminated array of matches. +The first element (@code{matches[0]}) is the +maximal substring common to all matches. This function can +re-arrange the list of matches as required, but each element deleted +from the array must be freed. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_icppfunc_t *} rl_directory_completion_hook +This function, if defined, is allowed to modify the directory portion +of filenames Readline completes. It is called with the address of a +string (the current directory name) as an argument, and may modify that string. +If the string is replaced with a new string, the old value should be freed. +Any modified directory name should have a trailing slash. +The modified value will be displayed as part of the completion, replacing +the directory portion of the pathname the user typed. +It returns an integer that should be non-zero if the function modifies +its directory argument. +It could be used to expand symbolic links or shell variables in pathnames. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_compdisp_func_t *} rl_completion_display_matches_hook +If non-zero, then this is the address of a function to call when +completing a word would normally display the list of possible matches. +This function is called in lieu of Readline displaying the list. +It takes three arguments: +(@code{char **}@var{matches}, @code{int} @var{num_matches}, @code{int} @var{max_length}) +where @var{matches} is the array of matching strings, +@var{num_matches} is the number of strings in that array, and +@var{max_length} is the length of the longest string in that array. +Readline provides a convenience function, @code{rl_display_match_list}, +that takes care of doing the display to Readline's output stream. That +function may be called from this hook. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_basic_word_break_characters +The basic list of characters that signal a break between words for the +completer routine. The default value of this variable is the characters +which break words for completion in Bash: +@code{" \t\n\"\\'`@@$><=;|&@{("}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_basic_quote_characters +A list of quote characters which can cause a word break. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_completer_word_break_characters +The list of characters that signal a break between words for +@code{rl_complete_internal()}. The default list is the value of +@code{rl_basic_word_break_characters}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {rl_cpvfunc_t *} rl_completion_word_break_hook +If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call when Readline is +deciding where to separate words for word completion. It should return +a character string like @code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} to be +used to perform the current completion. The function may choose to set +@code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} itself. If the function +returns @code{NULL}, @code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} is used. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_completer_quote_characters +A list of characters which can be used to quote a substring of the line. +Completion occurs on the entire substring, and within the substring +@code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} are treated as any other character, +unless they also appear within this list. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_filename_quote_characters +A list of characters that cause a filename to be quoted by the completer +when they appear in a completed filename. The default is the null string. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {const char *} rl_special_prefixes +The list of characters that are word break characters, but should be +left in @var{text} when it is passed to the completion function. +Programs can use this to help determine what kind of completing to do. +For instance, Bash sets this variable to "$@@" so that it can complete +shell variables and hostnames. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_query_items +Up to this many items will be displayed in response to a +possible-completions call. After that, readline asks the user if she is sure +she wants to see them all. The default value is 100. A negative value +indicates that Readline should never ask the user. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar {int} rl_completion_append_character +When a single completion alternative matches at the end of the command +line, this character is appended to the inserted completion text. The +default is a space character (@samp{ }). Setting this to the null +character (@samp{\0}) prevents anything being appended automatically. +This can be changed in application-specific completion functions to +provide the ``most sensible word separator character'' according to +an application-specific command line syntax specification. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_suppress_append +If non-zero, @var{rl_completion_append_character} is not appended to +matches at the end of the command line, as described above. +It is set to 0 before any application-specific completion function +is called, and may only be changed within such a function. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_quote_character +When Readline is completing quoted text, as delimited by one of the +characters in @var{rl_completer_quote_characters}, it sets this variable +to the quoting character found. +This is set before any application-specific completion function is called. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_suppress_quote +If non-zero, Readline does not append a matching quote character when +performing completion on a quoted string. +It is set to 0 before any application-specific completion function +is called, and may only be changed within such a function. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_found_quote +When Readline is completing quoted text, it sets this variable +to a non-zero value if the word being completed contains or is delimited +by any quoting characters, including backslashes. +This is set before any application-specific completion function is called. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_mark_symlink_dirs +If non-zero, a slash will be appended to completed filenames that are +symbolic links to directory names, subject to the value of the +user-settable @var{mark-directories} variable. +This variable exists so that application-specific completion functions +can override the user's global preference (set via the +@var{mark-symlinked-directories} Readline variable) if appropriate. +This variable is set to the user's preference before any +application-specific completion function is called, so unless that +function modifies the value, the user's preferences are honored. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_ignore_completion_duplicates +If non-zero, then duplicates in the matches are removed. +The default is 1. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_filename_completion_desired +Non-zero means that the results of the matches are to be treated as +filenames. This is @emph{always} zero when completion is attempted, +and can only be changed +within an application-specific completion function. If it is set to a +non-zero value by such a function, directory names have a slash appended +and Readline attempts to quote completed filenames if they contain any +characters in @code{rl_filename_quote_characters} and +@code{rl_filename_quoting_desired} is set to a non-zero value. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_filename_quoting_desired +Non-zero means that the results of the matches are to be quoted using +double quotes (or an application-specific quoting mechanism) if the +completed filename contains any characters in +@code{rl_filename_quote_chars}. This is @emph{always} non-zero +when completion is attempted, and can only be changed within an +application-specific completion function. +The quoting is effected via a call to the function pointed to +by @code{rl_filename_quoting_function}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_attempted_completion_over +If an application-specific completion function assigned to +@code{rl_attempted_completion_function} sets this variable to a non-zero +value, Readline will not perform its default filename completion even +if the application's completion function returns no matches. +It should be set only by an application's completion function. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_completion_type +Set to a character describing the type of completion Readline is currently +attempting; see the description of @code{rl_complete_internal()} +(@pxref{Completion Functions}) for the list of characters. +This is set to the appropriate value before any application-specific +completion function is called, allowing such functions to present +the same interface as @code{rl_complete()}. +@end deftypevar + +@deftypevar int rl_inhibit_completion +If this variable is non-zero, completion is inhibited. The completion +character will be inserted as any other bound to @code{self-insert}. +@end deftypevar + +@node A Short Completion Example +@subsection A Short Completion Example + +Here is a small application demonstrating the use of the GNU Readline +library. It is called @code{fileman}, and the source code resides in +@file{examples/fileman.c}. This sample application provides +completion of command names, line editing features, and access to the +history list. + +@page +@smallexample +/* fileman.c -- A tiny application which demonstrates how to use the + GNU Readline library. This application interactively allows users + to manipulate files and their modes. */ + +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#include +#include + +extern char *xmalloc (); + +/* The names of functions that actually do the manipulation. */ +int com_list __P((char *)); +int com_view __P((char *)); +int com_rename __P((char *)); +int com_stat __P((char *)); +int com_pwd __P((char *)); +int com_delete __P((char *)); +int com_help __P((char *)); +int com_cd __P((char *)); +int com_quit __P((char *)); + +/* A structure which contains information on the commands this program + can understand. */ + +typedef struct @{ + char *name; /* User printable name of the function. */ + rl_icpfunc_t *func; /* Function to call to do the job. */ + char *doc; /* Documentation for this function. */ +@} COMMAND; + +COMMAND commands[] = @{ + @{ "cd", com_cd, "Change to directory DIR" @}, + @{ "delete", com_delete, "Delete FILE" @}, + @{ "help", com_help, "Display this text" @}, + @{ "?", com_help, "Synonym for `help'" @}, + @{ "list", com_list, "List files in DIR" @}, + @{ "ls", com_list, "Synonym for `list'" @}, + @{ "pwd", com_pwd, "Print the current working directory" @}, + @{ "quit", com_quit, "Quit using Fileman" @}, + @{ "rename", com_rename, "Rename FILE to NEWNAME" @}, + @{ "stat", com_stat, "Print out statistics on FILE" @}, + @{ "view", com_view, "View the contents of FILE" @}, + @{ (char *)NULL, (rl_icpfunc_t *)NULL, (char *)NULL @} +@}; + +/* Forward declarations. */ +char *stripwhite (); +COMMAND *find_command (); + +/* The name of this program, as taken from argv[0]. */ +char *progname; + +/* When non-zero, this means the user is done using this program. */ +int done; + +char * +dupstr (s) + int s; +@{ + char *r; + + r = xmalloc (strlen (s) + 1); + strcpy (r, s); + return (r); +@} + +main (argc, argv) + int argc; + char **argv; +@{ + char *line, *s; + + progname = argv[0]; + + initialize_readline (); /* Bind our completer. */ + + /* Loop reading and executing lines until the user quits. */ + for ( ; done == 0; ) + @{ + line = readline ("FileMan: "); + + if (!line) + break; + + /* Remove leading and trailing whitespace from the line. + Then, if there is anything left, add it to the history list + and execute it. */ + s = stripwhite (line); + + if (*s) + @{ + add_history (s); + execute_line (s); + @} + + free (line); + @} + exit (0); +@} + +/* Execute a command line. */ +int +execute_line (line) + char *line; +@{ + register int i; + COMMAND *command; + char *word; + + /* Isolate the command word. */ + i = 0; + while (line[i] && whitespace (line[i])) + i++; + word = line + i; + + while (line[i] && !whitespace (line[i])) + i++; + + if (line[i]) + line[i++] = '\0'; + + command = find_command (word); + + if (!command) + @{ + fprintf (stderr, "%s: No such command for FileMan.\n", word); + return (-1); + @} + + /* Get argument to command, if any. */ + while (whitespace (line[i])) + i++; + + word = line + i; + + /* Call the function. */ + return ((*(command->func)) (word)); +@} + +/* Look up NAME as the name of a command, and return a pointer to that + command. Return a NULL pointer if NAME isn't a command name. */ +COMMAND * +find_command (name) + char *name; +@{ + register int i; + + for (i = 0; commands[i].name; i++) + if (strcmp (name, commands[i].name) == 0) + return (&commands[i]); + + return ((COMMAND *)NULL); +@} + +/* Strip whitespace from the start and end of STRING. Return a pointer + into STRING. */ +char * +stripwhite (string) + char *string; +@{ + register char *s, *t; + + for (s = string; whitespace (*s); s++) + ; + + if (*s == 0) + return (s); + + t = s + strlen (s) - 1; + while (t > s && whitespace (*t)) + t--; + *++t = '\0'; + + return s; +@} + +/* **************************************************************** */ +/* */ +/* Interface to Readline Completion */ +/* */ +/* **************************************************************** */ + +char *command_generator __P((const char *, int)); +char **fileman_completion __P((const char *, int, int)); + +/* Tell the GNU Readline library how to complete. We want to try to + complete on command names if this is the first word in the line, or + on filenames if not. */ +initialize_readline () +@{ + /* Allow conditional parsing of the ~/.inputrc file. */ + rl_readline_name = "FileMan"; + + /* Tell the completer that we want a crack first. */ + rl_attempted_completion_function = fileman_completion; +@} + +/* Attempt to complete on the contents of TEXT. START and END + bound the region of rl_line_buffer that contains the word to + complete. TEXT is the word to complete. We can use the entire + contents of rl_line_buffer in case we want to do some simple + parsing. Returnthe array of matches, or NULL if there aren't any. */ +char ** +fileman_completion (text, start, end) + const char *text; + int start, end; +@{ + char **matches; + + matches = (char **)NULL; + + /* If this word is at the start of the line, then it is a command + to complete. Otherwise it is the name of a file in the current + directory. */ + if (start == 0) + matches = rl_completion_matches (text, command_generator); + + return (matches); +@} + +/* Generator function for command completion. STATE lets us + know whether to start from scratch; without any state + (i.e. STATE == 0), then we start at the top of the list. */ +char * +command_generator (text, state) + const char *text; + int state; +@{ + static int list_index, len; + char *name; + + /* If this is a new word to complete, initialize now. This + includes saving the length of TEXT for efficiency, and + initializing the index variable to 0. */ + if (!state) + @{ + list_index = 0; + len = strlen (text); + @} + + /* Return the next name which partially matches from the + command list. */ + while (name = commands[list_index].name) + @{ + list_index++; + + if (strncmp (name, text, len) == 0) + return (dupstr(name)); + @} + + /* If no names matched, then return NULL. */ + return ((char *)NULL); +@} + +/* **************************************************************** */ +/* */ +/* FileMan Commands */ +/* */ +/* **************************************************************** */ + +/* String to pass to system (). This is for the LIST, VIEW and RENAME + commands. */ +static char syscom[1024]; + +/* List the file(s) named in arg. */ +com_list (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + if (!arg) + arg = ""; + + sprintf (syscom, "ls -FClg %s", arg); + return (system (syscom)); +@} + +com_view (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + if (!valid_argument ("view", arg)) + return 1; + + sprintf (syscom, "more %s", arg); + return (system (syscom)); +@} + +com_rename (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + too_dangerous ("rename"); + return (1); +@} + +com_stat (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + struct stat finfo; + + if (!valid_argument ("stat", arg)) + return (1); + + if (stat (arg, &finfo) == -1) + @{ + perror (arg); + return (1); + @} + + printf ("Statistics for `%s':\n", arg); + + printf ("%s has %d link%s, and is %d byte%s in length.\n", arg, + finfo.st_nlink, + (finfo.st_nlink == 1) ? "" : "s", + finfo.st_size, + (finfo.st_size == 1) ? "" : "s"); + printf ("Inode Last Change at: %s", ctime (&finfo.st_ctime)); + printf (" Last access at: %s", ctime (&finfo.st_atime)); + printf (" Last modified at: %s", ctime (&finfo.st_mtime)); + return (0); +@} + +com_delete (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + too_dangerous ("delete"); + return (1); +@} + +/* Print out help for ARG, or for all of the commands if ARG is + not present. */ +com_help (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + register int i; + int printed = 0; + + for (i = 0; commands[i].name; i++) + @{ + if (!*arg || (strcmp (arg, commands[i].name) == 0)) + @{ + printf ("%s\t\t%s.\n", commands[i].name, commands[i].doc); + printed++; + @} + @} + + if (!printed) + @{ + printf ("No commands match `%s'. Possibilties are:\n", arg); + + for (i = 0; commands[i].name; i++) + @{ + /* Print in six columns. */ + if (printed == 6) + @{ + printed = 0; + printf ("\n"); + @} + + printf ("%s\t", commands[i].name); + printed++; + @} + + if (printed) + printf ("\n"); + @} + return (0); +@} + +/* Change to the directory ARG. */ +com_cd (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + if (chdir (arg) == -1) + @{ + perror (arg); + return 1; + @} + + com_pwd (""); + return (0); +@} + +/* Print out the current working directory. */ +com_pwd (ignore) + char *ignore; +@{ + char dir[1024], *s; + + s = getcwd (dir, sizeof(dir) - 1); + if (s == 0) + @{ + printf ("Error getting pwd: %s\n", dir); + return 1; + @} + + printf ("Current directory is %s\n", dir); + return 0; +@} + +/* The user wishes to quit using this program. Just set DONE + non-zero. */ +com_quit (arg) + char *arg; +@{ + done = 1; + return (0); +@} + +/* Function which tells you that you can't do this. */ +too_dangerous (caller) + char *caller; +@{ + fprintf (stderr, + "%s: Too dangerous for me to distribute.\n", + caller); + fprintf (stderr, "Write it yourself.\n"); +@} + +/* Return non-zero if ARG is a valid argument for CALLER, + else print an error message and return zero. */ +int +valid_argument (caller, arg) + char *caller, *arg; +@{ + if (!arg || !*arg) + @{ + fprintf (stderr, "%s: Argument required.\n", caller); + return (0); + @} + + return (1); +@} +@end smallexample
    rltech.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: version.texi =================================================================== --- version.texi (nonexistent) +++ version.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +@ignore +Copyright (C) 1988-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +@end ignore + +@set EDITION 5.1-beta1 +@set VERSION 5.1-beta1 +@set UPDATED 11 November 2005 +@set UPDATED-MONTH November 2005 + +@set LASTCHANGE Fri Nov 11 19:50:51 EST 2005
    version.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: texi2dvi =================================================================== --- texi2dvi (nonexistent) +++ texi2dvi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,660 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# texi2dvi --- produce DVI (or PDF) files from Texinfo (or LaTeX) sources. +# $Id: texi2dvi,v 1.14 2003/02/05 00:42:33 karl Exp $ +# +# Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, +# 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, you can either send email to this +# program's maintainer or write to: The Free Software Foundation, +# Inc.; 59 Temple Place, Suite 330; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +# +# Original author: Noah Friedman . +# +# Please send bug reports, etc. to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. +# If possible, please send a copy of the output of the script called with +# the `--debug' option when making a bug report. + +# This string is expanded by rcs automatically when this file is checked out. +rcs_revision='$Revision: 1.14 $' +rcs_version=`set - $rcs_revision; echo $2` +program=`echo $0 | sed -e 's!.*/!!'` +version="texi2dvi (GNU Texinfo 4.5) $rcs_version + +Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. +For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING." + +usage="Usage: $program [OPTION]... FILE... + +Run each Texinfo or LaTeX FILE through TeX in turn until all +cross-references are resolved, building all indices. The directory +containing each FILE is searched for included files. The suffix of FILE +is used to determine its language (LaTeX or Texinfo). + +Makeinfo is used to perform Texinfo macro expansion before running TeX +when needed. + +Operation modes: + -b, --batch no interaction + -c, --clean remove all auxiliary files + -D, --debug turn on shell debugging (set -x) + -h, --help display this help and exit successfully + -o, --output=OFILE leave output in OFILE (implies --clean); + Only one input FILE may be specified in this case + -q, --quiet no output unless errors (implies --batch) + -s, --silent same as --quiet + -v, --version display version information and exit successfully + -V, --verbose report on what is done + +TeX tuning: + -@ use @input instead of \input; for preloaded Texinfo + -e, -E, --expand force macro expansion using makeinfo + -I DIR search DIR for Texinfo files + -l, --language=LANG specify the LANG of FILE (LaTeX or Texinfo) + -p, --pdf use pdftex or pdflatex for processing + -t, --texinfo=CMD insert CMD after @setfilename in copy of input file + multiple values accumulate + +The values of the BIBTEX, LATEX (or PDFLATEX), MAKEINDEX, MAKEINFO, +TEX (or PDFTEX), and TEXINDEX environment variables are used to run +those commands, if they are set. + +Email bug reports to , +general questions and discussion to . +Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" + +# Initialize variables for option overriding and otherwise. +# Don't use `unset' since old bourne shells don't have this command. +# Instead, assign them an empty value. +batch=false # eval for batch mode +clean= +debug= +escape='\' +expand= # t for expansion via makeinfo +miincludes= # makeinfo include path +oformat=dvi +oname= # --output +quiet= # by default let the tools' message be displayed +set_language= +textra= +tmpdir=${TMPDIR:-/tmp}/t2d$$ # avoid collisions on 8.3 filesystems. +txincludes= # TEXINPUTS extensions, with trailing colon +txiprereq=19990129 # minimum texinfo.tex version to have macro expansion +verbose=false # echo for verbose mode + +orig_pwd=`pwd` + +# Systems which define $COMSPEC or $ComSpec use semicolons to separate +# directories in TEXINPUTS. +if test -n "$COMSPEC$ComSpec"; then + path_sep=";" +else + path_sep=":" +fi + +# Pacify verbose cds. +CDPATH=${ZSH_VERSION+.}$path_sep + +# In case someone crazy insists on using grep -E. +: ${EGREP=egrep} + +# Save this so we can construct a new TEXINPUTS path for each file. +TEXINPUTS_orig="$TEXINPUTS" +# Unfortunately makeindex does not read TEXINPUTS. +INDEXSTYLE_orig="$INDEXSTYLE" +export TEXINPUTS INDEXSTYLE + +# Push a token among the arguments that will be used to notice when we +# ended options/arguments parsing. +# Use "set dummy ...; shift" rather than 'set - ..." because on +# Solaris set - turns off set -x (but keeps set -e). +# Use ${1+"$@"} rather than "$@" because Digital Unix and Ultrix 4.3 +# still expand "$@" to a single argument (the empty string) rather +# than nothing at all. +arg_sep="$$--$$" +set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$arg_sep"; shift + +# +# Parse command line arguments. +while test x"$1" != x"$arg_sep"; do + + # Handle --option=value by splitting apart and putting back on argv. + case "$1" in + --*=*) + opt=`echo "$1" | sed -e 's/=.*//'` + val=`echo "$1" | sed -e 's/[^=]*=//'` + shift + set dummy "$opt" "$val" ${1+"$@"}; shift + ;; + esac + + # This recognizes --quark as --quiet. So what. + case "$1" in + -@ ) escape=@;; + # Silently and without documentation accept -b and --b[atch] as synonyms. + -b | --b*) batch=eval;; + -q | -s | --q* | --s*) quiet=t; batch=eval;; + -c | --c*) clean=t;; + -D | --d*) debug=t;; + -e | -E | --e*) expand=t;; + -h | --h*) echo "$usage"; exit 0;; + -I | --I*) + shift + miincludes="$miincludes -I $1" + txincludes="$txincludes$1$path_sep" + ;; + -l | --l*) shift; set_language=$1;; + -o | --o*) + shift + clean=t + case "$1" in + /* | ?:/*) oname=$1;; + *) oname="$orig_pwd/$1";; + esac;; + -p | --p*) oformat=pdf;; + -t | --t*) shift; textra="$textra\\ +$1";; + -v | --vers*) echo "$version"; exit 0;; + -V | --verb*) verbose=echo;; + --) # What remains are not options. + shift + while test x"$1" != x"$arg_sep"; do + set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$1"; shift + shift + done + break;; + -*) + echo "$0: Unknown or ambiguous option \`$1'." >&2 + echo "$0: Try \`--help' for more information." >&2 + exit 1;; + *) set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$1"; shift;; + esac + shift +done +# Pop the token +shift + +# Interpret remaining command line args as filenames. +case $# in + 0) + echo "$0: Missing file arguments." >&2 + echo "$0: Try \`--help' for more information." >&2 + exit 2 + ;; + 1) ;; + *) + if test -n "$oname"; then + echo "$0: Can't use option \`--output' with more than one argument." >&2 + exit 2 + fi + ;; +esac + +# Prepare the temporary directory. Remove it at exit, unless debugging. +if test -z "$debug"; then + trap "cd / && rm -rf $tmpdir" 0 1 2 15 +fi + +# Create the temporary directory with strict rights +(umask 077 && mkdir $tmpdir) || exit 1 + +# Prepare the tools we might need. This may be extra work in some +# cases, but improves the readibility of the script. +utildir=$tmpdir/utils +mkdir $utildir || exit 1 + +# A sed script that preprocesses Texinfo sources in order to keep the +# iftex sections only. We want to remove non TeX sections, and +# comment (with `@c texi2dvi') TeX sections so that makeinfo does not +# try to parse them. Nevertheless, while commenting TeX sections, +# don't comment @macro/@end macro so that makeinfo does propagate +# them. Unfortunately makeinfo --iftex --no-ifhtml --no-ifinfo +# doesn't work well enough (yet) to use that, so work around with sed. +comment_iftex_sed=$utildir/comment.sed +cat <$comment_iftex_sed +/^@tex/,/^@end tex/{ + s/^/@c texi2dvi/ +} +/^@iftex/,/^@end iftex/{ + s/^/@c texi2dvi/ + /^@c texi2dvi@macro/,/^@c texi2dvi@end macro/{ + s/^@c texi2dvi// + } +} +/^@html/,/^@end html/{ + s/^/@c (texi2dvi)/ +} +/^@ifhtml/,/^@end ifhtml/{ + s/^/@c (texi2dvi)/ +} +/^@ifnottex/,/^@end ifnottex/{ + s/^/@c (texi2dvi)/ +} +/^@ifinfo/,/^@end ifinfo/{ + /^@node/p + /^@menu/,/^@end menu/p + t + s/^/@c (texi2dvi)/ +} +s/^@ifnotinfo/@c texi2dvi@ifnotinfo/ +s/^@end ifnotinfo/@c texi2dvi@end ifnotinfo/ +EOF +# Uncommenting is simple: Remove any leading `@c texi2dvi'. +uncomment_iftex_sed=$utildir/uncomment.sed +cat <$uncomment_iftex_sed +s/^@c texi2dvi// +EOF + +# A shell script that computes the list of xref files. +# Takes the filename (without extension) of which we look for xref +# files as argument. The index files must be reported last. +get_xref_files=$utildir/get_xref.sh +cat <<\EOF >$get_xref_files +#! /bin/sh + +# Get list of xref files (indexes, tables and lists). +# Find all files having root filename with a two-letter extension, +# saves the ones that are really Texinfo-related files. .?o? catches +# many files: .toc, .log, LaTeX tables and lists, FiXme's .lox, maybe more. +for this_file in "$1".?o? "$1".aux "$1".?? "$1".idx; do + # If file is empty, skip it. + test -s "$this_file" || continue + # If the file is not suitable to be an index or xref file, don't + # process it. The file can't be if its first character is not a + # backslash or single quote. + first_character=`sed -n '1s/^\(.\).*$/\1/p;q' $this_file` + if test "x$first_character" = "x\\" \ + || test "x$first_character" = "x'"; then + xref_files="$xref_files ./$this_file" + fi +done +echo "$xref_files" +EOF +chmod 500 $get_xref_files + +# File descriptor usage: +# 0 standard input +# 1 standard output (--verbose messages) +# 2 standard error +# 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty +# 4 used on the Kubota Titan +# 5 tools output (turned off by --quiet) + +# Tools' output. If quiet, discard, else redirect to the message flow. +if test "$quiet" = t; then + exec 5>/dev/null +else + exec 5>&1 +fi + +# Enable tracing +test "$debug" = t && set -x + +# +# TeXify files. + +for command_line_filename in ${1+"$@"}; do + $verbose "Processing $command_line_filename ..." + + # If the COMMAND_LINE_FILENAME is not absolute (e.g., --debug.tex), + # prepend `./' in order to avoid that the tools take it as an option. + echo "$command_line_filename" | $EGREP '^(/|[A-z]:/)' >/dev/null \ + || command_line_filename="./$command_line_filename" + + # See if the file exists. If it doesn't we're in trouble since, even + # though the user may be able to reenter a valid filename at the tex + # prompt (assuming they're attending the terminal), this script won't + # be able to find the right xref files and so forth. + if test ! -r "$command_line_filename"; then + echo "$0: Could not read $command_line_filename, skipping." >&2 + continue + fi + + # Get the name of the current directory. We want the full path + # because in clean mode we are in tmp, in which case a relative + # path has no meaning. + filename_dir=`echo $command_line_filename | sed 's!/[^/]*$!!;s!^$!.!'` + filename_dir=`cd "$filename_dir" >/dev/null && pwd` + + # Strip directory part but leave extension. + filename_ext=`basename "$command_line_filename"` + # Strip extension. + filename_noext=`echo "$filename_ext" | sed 's/\.[^.]*$//'` + ext=`echo "$filename_ext" | sed 's/^.*\.//'` + + # _src. Use same basename since we want to generate aux files with + # the same basename as the manual. If --expand, then output the + # macro-expanded file to here, else copy the original file. + tmpdir_src=$tmpdir/src + filename_src=$tmpdir_src/$filename_noext.$ext + + # _xtr. The file with the user's extra commands. + tmpdir_xtr=$tmpdir/xtr + filename_xtr=$tmpdir_xtr/$filename_noext.$ext + + # _bak. Copies of the previous xref files (another round is run if + # they differ from the new one). + tmpdir_bak=$tmpdir/bak + + # Make all those directories and give up if we can't succeed. + mkdir $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak || exit 1 + + # Source file might include additional sources. + # We want `.:$orig_pwd' before anything else. (We'll add `.:' later + # after all other directories have been turned into absolute paths.) + # `.' goes first to ensure that any old .aux, .cps, + # etc. files in ${directory} don't get used in preference to fresher + # files in `.'. Include orig_pwd in case we are in clean mode, where + # we've cd'd to a temp directory. + common="$orig_pwd$path_sep$filename_dir$path_sep$txincludes" + TEXINPUTS="$common$TEXINPUTS_orig" + INDEXSTYLE="$common$INDEXSTYLE_orig" + + # Convert relative paths to absolute paths, so we can run in another + # directory (e.g., in --clean mode, or during the macro-support + # detection.) + # + # Empty path components are meaningful to tex. We rewrite them + # as `EMPTY' so they don't get lost when we split on $path_sep. + TEXINPUTS=`echo $TEXINPUTS |sed 's/^:/EMPTY:/;s/:$/:EMPTY/;s/::/:EMPTY:/g'` + INDEXSTYLE=`echo $INDEXSTYLE |sed 's/^:/EMPTY:/;s/:$/:EMPTY/;s/::/:EMPTY:/g'` + save_IFS=$IFS + IFS=$path_sep + set x $TEXINPUTS; shift + TEXINPUTS=. + for dir + do + case $dir in + EMPTY) + TEXINPUTS=$TEXINPUTS$path_sep + ;; + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) # Absolute paths don't need to be expansed. + TEXINPUTS=$TEXINPUTS$path_sep$dir + ;; + *) + abs=`cd "$dir" && pwd` && TEXINPUTS=$TEXINPUTS$path_sep$abs + ;; + esac + done + set x $INDEXSTYLE; shift + INDEXSTYLE=. + for dir + do + case $dir in + EMPTY) + INDEXSTYLE=$INDEXSTYLE$path_sep + ;; + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) # Absolute paths don't need to be expansed. + INDEXSTYLE=$INDEXSTYLE$path_sep$dir + ;; + *) + abs=`cd "$dir" && pwd` && INDEXSTYLE=$INDEXSTYLE$path_sep$abs + ;; + esac + done + IFS=$save_IFS + + # If the user explicitly specified the language, use that. + # Otherwise, if the first line is \input texinfo, assume it's texinfo. + # Otherwise, guess from the file extension. + if test -n "$set_language"; then + language=$set_language + elif sed 1q "$command_line_filename" | grep 'input texinfo' >/dev/null; then + language=texinfo + else + language= + fi + + # Get the type of the file (latex or texinfo) from the given language + # we just guessed, or from the file extension if not set yet. + case ${language:-$filename_ext} in + [lL]a[tT]e[xX] | *.ltx | *.tex) + # Assume a LaTeX file. LaTeX needs bibtex and uses latex for + # compilation. No makeinfo. + bibtex=${BIBTEX:-bibtex} + makeinfo= # no point in running makeinfo on latex source. + texindex=${MAKEINDEX:-makeindex} + if test $oformat = dvi; then + tex=${LATEX:-latex} + else + tex=${PDFLATEX:-pdflatex} + fi + ;; + + *) + # Assume a Texinfo file. Texinfo files need makeinfo, texindex and tex. + bibtex= + texindex=${TEXINDEX:-texindex} + if test $oformat = dvi; then + tex=${TEX:-tex} + else + tex=${PDFTEX:-pdftex} + fi + # Unless required by the user, makeinfo expansion is wanted only + # if texinfo.tex is too old. + if test "$expand" = t; then + makeinfo=${MAKEINFO:-makeinfo} + else + # Check if texinfo.tex performs macro expansion by looking for + # its version. The version is a date of the form YEAR-MO-DA. + # We don't need to use [0-9] to match the digits since anyway + # the comparison with $txiprereq, a number, will fail with non + # digits. + txiversion_tex=txiversion.tex + echo '\input texinfo.tex @bye' >$tmpdir/$txiversion_tex + # Run in the tmpdir to avoid leaving files. + eval `cd $tmpdir >/dev/null && + $tex $txiversion_tex 2>/dev/null | + sed -n 's/^.*\[\(.*\)version \(....\)-\(..\)-\(..\).*$/txiformat=\1 txiversion="\2\3\4"/p'` + $verbose "texinfo.tex preloaded as \`$txiformat', version is \`$txiversion' ..." + if test "$txiprereq" -le "$txiversion" >/dev/null 2>&1; then + makeinfo= + else + makeinfo=${MAKEINFO:-makeinfo} + fi + # As long as we had to run TeX, offer the user this convenience + if test "$txiformat" = Texinfo; then + escape=@ + fi + fi + ;; + esac + + # Expand macro commands in the original source file using Makeinfo. + # Always use `end' footnote style, since the `separate' style + # generates different output (arguably this is a bug in -E). + # Discard main info output, the user asked to run TeX, not makeinfo. + if test -n "$makeinfo"; then + $verbose "Macro-expanding $command_line_filename to $filename_src ..." + sed -f $comment_iftex_sed "$command_line_filename" \ + | $makeinfo --footnote-style=end -I "$filename_dir" $miincludes \ + -o /dev/null --macro-expand=- \ + | sed -f $uncomment_iftex_sed >"$filename_src" + filename_input=$filename_src + fi + + # If makeinfo failed (or was not even run), use the original file as input. + if test $? -ne 0 \ + || test ! -r "$filename_src"; then + $verbose "Reverting to $command_line_filename ..." + filename_input=$filename_dir/$filename_ext + fi + + # Used most commonly for @finalout, @smallbook, etc. + if test -n "$textra"; then + $verbose "Inserting extra commands: $textra" + sed '/^@setfilename/a\ +'"$textra" "$filename_input" >$filename_xtr + filename_input=$filename_xtr + fi + + # If clean mode was specified, then move to the temporary directory. + if test "$clean" = t; then + $verbose "cd $tmpdir_src" + cd "$tmpdir_src" || exit 1 + fi + + while :; do # will break out of loop below + orig_xref_files=`$get_xref_files "$filename_noext"` + + # Save copies of originals for later comparison. + if test -n "$orig_xref_files"; then + $verbose "Backing up xref files: `echo $orig_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`" + cp $orig_xref_files $tmpdir_bak + fi + + # Run bibtex on current file. + # - If its input (AUX) exists. + # - If AUX contains both `\bibdata' and `\bibstyle'. + # - If some citations are missing (LOG contains `Citation'). + # or the LOG complains of a missing .bbl + # + # We run bibtex first, because I can see reasons for the indexes + # to change after bibtex is run, but I see no reason for the + # converse. + # + # Don't try to be too smart. Running bibtex only if the bbl file + # exists and is older than the LaTeX file is wrong, since the + # document might include files that have changed. Because there + # can be several AUX (if there are \include's), but a single LOG, + # looking for missing citations in LOG is easier, though we take + # the risk to match false messages. + if test -n "$bibtex" \ + && test -r "$filename_noext.aux" \ + && test -r "$filename_noext.log" \ + && (grep '^\\bibdata[{]' "$filename_noext.aux" \ + && grep '^\\bibstyle[{]' "$filename_noext.aux" \ + && (grep 'Warning:.*Citation.*undefined' "$filename_noext.log" \ + || grep 'No file .*\.bbl\.' "$filename_noext.log")) \ + >/dev/null 2>&1; \ + then + $verbose "Running $bibtex $filename_noext ..." + if $bibtex "$filename_noext" >&5; then :; else + echo "$0: $bibtex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2 + exit 1 + fi + fi + + # What we'll run texindex on -- exclude non-index files. + # Since we know index files are last, it is correct to remove everything + # before .aux and .?o?. But don't really do o + # -- don't match whitespace as . + # Otherwise, if orig_xref_files contains something like + # foo.xo foo.whatever + # the space after the o will get matched. + index_files=`echo "$orig_xref_files" \ + | sed "s!.*\.aux!!g; + s!./$filename_noext\.[^ ]o[^ ]!!g; + s/^[ ]*//;s/[ ]*$//"` + # Run texindex (or makeindex) on current index files. If they + # already exist, and after running TeX a first time the index + # files don't change, then there's no reason to run TeX again. + # But we won't know that if the index files are out of date or + # nonexistent. + if test -n "$texindex" && test -n "$index_files"; then + $verbose "Running $texindex $index_files ..." + if $texindex $index_files 2>&5 1>&2; then :; else + echo "$0: $texindex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2 + exit 1 + fi + fi + + # Finally, run TeX. + # Prevent $ESCAPE from being interpreted by the shell if it happens + # to be `/'. + $batch tex_args="\\${escape}nonstopmode\ \\${escape}input" + cmd="$tex $tex_args $filename_input" + $verbose "Running $cmd ..." + if $cmd >&5; then :; else + echo "$0: $tex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2 + echo "$0: see $filename_noext.log for errors." >&2 + test "$clean" = t \ + && cp "$filename_noext.log" "$orig_pwd" + exit 1 + fi + + + # Decide if looping again is needed. + finished=t + + # LaTeX (and the package changebar) report in the LOG file if it + # should be rerun. This is needed for files included from + # subdirs, since texi2dvi does not try to compare xref files in + # subdirs. Performing xref files test is still good since LaTeX + # does not report changes in xref files. + if grep "Rerun to get" "$filename_noext.log" >/dev/null 2>&1; then + finished= + fi + + # Check if xref files changed. + new_xref_files=`$get_xref_files "$filename_noext"` + $verbose "Original xref files = `echo $orig_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`" + $verbose "New xref files = `echo $new_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`" + + # If old and new lists don't at least have the same file list, + # then one file or another has definitely changed. + test "x$orig_xref_files" != "x$new_xref_files" && finished= + + # File list is the same. We must compare each file until we find + # a difference. + if test -n "$finished"; then + for this_file in $new_xref_files; do + $verbose "Comparing xref file `echo $this_file | sed 's|\./||g'` ..." + # cmp -s returns nonzero exit status if files differ. + if cmp -s "$this_file" "$tmpdir_bak/$this_file"; then :; else + # We only need to keep comparing until we find one that + # differs, because we'll have to run texindex & tex again no + # matter how many more there might be. + finished= + $verbose "xref file `echo $this_file | sed 's|\./||g'` differed ..." + test "$debug" = t && diff -c "$tmpdir_bak/$this_file" "$this_file" + break + fi + done + fi + + # If finished, exit the loop, else rerun the loop. + test -n "$finished" && break + done + + # If we were in clean mode, compilation was in a tmp directory. + # Copy the DVI (or PDF) file into the directory where the compilation + # has been done. (The temp dir is about to get removed anyway.) + # We also return to the original directory so that + # - the next file is processed in correct conditions + # - the temporary file can be removed + if test -n "$clean"; then + if test -n "$oname"; then + dest=$oname + else + dest=$orig_pwd + fi + $verbose "Copying $oformat file from `pwd` to $dest" + cp -p "./$filename_noext.$oformat" "$dest" + cd / # in case $orig_pwd is on a different drive (for DOS) + cd $orig_pwd || exit 1 + fi + + # Remove temporary files. + if test "x$debug" = "x"; then + $verbose "Removing $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak ..." + cd / + rm -rf $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak + fi +done + +$verbose "$0 done." +exit 0 # exit successfully, not however we ended the loop.
    texi2dvi Property changes : Added: svn:executable ## -0,0 +1 ## +* \ No newline at end of property Index: history.3 =================================================================== --- history.3 (nonexistent) +++ history.3 (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,663 @@ +.\" +.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to +.\" +.\" Chet Ramey +.\" Information Network Services +.\" Case Western Reserve University +.\" chet@ins.CWRU.Edu +.\" +.\" Last Change: Thu Jul 31 08:46:08 EDT 2003 +.\" +.TH HISTORY 3 "2003 July 31" "GNU History 5.0" +.\" +.\" File Name macro. This used to be `.PN', for Path Name, +.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much. +.\" +.de FN +\fI\|\\$1\|\fP +.. +.ds lp \fR\|(\fP +.ds rp \fR\|)\fP +.\" FnN return-value fun-name N arguments +.de Fn1 +\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3\fP\\*(rp +.br +.. +.de Fn2 +.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4\fP\\*(rp +.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4\fP\\*(rp +.br +.. +.de Fn3 +.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4,\|\\$5\fP\|\\*(rp +.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4, \\$5\fP\\*(rp +.br +.. +.de Vb +\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP +.br +.. +.SH NAME +history \- GNU History Library +.SH COPYRIGHT +.if t The GNU History Library is Copyright \(co 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc. +.if n The GNU History Library is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc. +.SH DESCRIPTION +Many programs read input from the user a line at a time. The GNU +History library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary +data with each line, and utilize information from previous lines in +composing new ones. +.PP +.SH "HISTORY EXPANSION" +.PP +The history library supports a history expansion feature that +is identical to the history expansion in +.BR bash. +This section describes what syntax features are available. +.PP +History expansions introduce words from the history list into +the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the +arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or +fix errors in previous commands quickly. +.PP +History expansion is usually performed immediately after a complete line +is read. +It takes place in two parts. +The first is to determine which line from the history list +to use during substitution. +The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into +the current one. +The line selected from the history is the \fIevent\fP, +and the portions of that line that are acted upon are \fIwords\fP. +Various \fImodifiers\fP are available to manipulate the selected words. +The line is broken into words in the same fashion as \fBbash\fP +does when reading input, +so that several words that would otherwise be separated +are considered one word when surrounded by quotes (see the +description of \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP below). +History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the +history expansion character, which is \^\fB!\fP\^ by default. +Only backslash (\^\fB\e\fP\^) and single quotes can quote +the history expansion character. +.SS Event Designators +.PP +An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the +history list. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B ! +Start a history substitution, except when followed by a +.BR blank , +newline, = or (. +.TP +.B !\fIn\fR +Refer to command line +.IR n . +.TP +.B !\-\fIn\fR +Refer to the current command line minus +.IR n . +.TP +.B !! +Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for `!\-1'. +.TP +.B !\fIstring\fR +Refer to the most recent command starting with +.IR string . +.TP +.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR +Refer to the most recent command containing +.IR string . +The trailing \fB?\fP may be omitted if +.I string +is followed immediately by a newline. +.TP +.B \d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring1\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring2\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u +Quick substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing +.I string1 +with +.IR string2 . +Equivalent to +``!!:s/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/'' +(see \fBModifiers\fP below). +.TP +.B !# +The entire command line typed so far. +.PD +.SS Word Designators +.PP +Word designators are used to select desired words from the event. +A +.B : +separates the event specification from the word designator. +It may be omitted if the word designator begins with a +.BR ^ , +.BR $ , +.BR * , +.BR \- , +or +.BR % . +Words are numbered from the beginning of the line, +with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero). +Words are inserted into the current line separated by single spaces. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B 0 (zero) +The zeroth word. For the shell, this is the command +word. +.TP +.I n +The \fIn\fRth word. +.TP +.B ^ +The first argument. That is, word 1. +.TP +.B $ +The last argument. +.TP +.B % +The word matched by the most recent `?\fIstring\fR?' search. +.TP +.I x\fB\-\fPy +A range of words; `\-\fIy\fR' abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR'. +.TP +.B * +All of the words but the zeroth. This is a synonym +for `\fI1\-$\fP'. It is not an error to use +.B * +if there is just one +word in the event; the empty string is returned in that case. +.TP +.B x* +Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP. +.TP +.B x\- +Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP like \fBx*\fP, but omits the last word. +.PD +.PP +If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the +previous command is used as the event. +.SS Modifiers +.PP +After the optional word designator, there may appear a sequence of +one or more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'. +.PP +.PD 0 +.PP +.TP +.B h +Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only the head. +.TP +.B t +Remove all leading file name components, leaving the tail. +.TP +.B r +Remove a trailing suffix of the form \fI.xxx\fP, leaving the +basename. +.TP +.B e +Remove all but the trailing suffix. +.TP +.B p +Print the new command but do not execute it. +.TP +.B q +Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions. +.TP +.B x +Quote the substituted words as with +.BR q , +but break into words at +.B blanks +and newlines. +.TP +.B s/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/ +Substitute +.I new +for the first occurrence of +.I old +in the event line. Any delimiter can be used in place of /. The +final delimiter is optional if it is the last character of the +event line. The delimiter may be quoted in +.I old +and +.I new +with a single backslash. If & appears in +.IR new , +it is replaced by +.IR old . +A single backslash will quote the &. If +.I old +is null, it is set to the last +.I old +substituted, or, if no previous history substitutions took place, +the last +.I string +in a +.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR +search. +.TP +.B & +Repeat the previous substitution. +.TP +.B g +Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. This is +used in conjunction with `\fB:s\fP' (e.g., `\fB:gs/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/\fR') +or `\fB:&\fP'. If used with +`\fB:s\fP', any delimiter can be used +in place of /, and the final delimiter is optional +if it is the last character of the event line. +An \fBa\fP may be used as a synonym for \fBg\fP. +.TP +.B G +Apply the following `\fBs\fP' modifier once to each word in the event line. +.PD +.SH "PROGRAMMING WITH HISTORY FUNCTIONS" +This section describes how to use the History library in other programs. +.SS Introduction to History +.PP +The programmer using the History library has available functions +for remembering lines on a history list, associating arbitrary data +with a line, removing lines from the list, searching through the list +for a line containing an arbitrary text string, and referencing any line +in the list directly. In addition, a history \fIexpansion\fP function +is available which provides for a consistent user interface across +different programs. +.PP +The user using programs written with the History library has the +benefit of a consistent user interface with a set of well-known +commands for manipulating the text of previous lines and using that text +in new commands. The basic history manipulation commands are +identical to +the history substitution provided by \fBbash\fP. +.PP +If the programmer desires, he can use the Readline library, which +includes some history manipulation by default, and has the added +advantage of command line editing. +.PP +Before declaring any functions using any functionality the History +library provides in other code, an application writer should include +the file +.FN +in any file that uses the +History library's features. It supplies extern declarations for all +of the library's public functions and variables, and declares all of +the public data structures. + +.SS History Storage +.PP +The history list is an array of history entries. A history entry is +declared as follows: +.PP +.Vb "typedef void *" histdata_t; +.PP +.nf +typedef struct _hist_entry { + char *line; + char *timestamp; + histdata_t data; +} HIST_ENTRY; +.fi +.PP +The history list itself might therefore be declared as +.PP +.Vb "HIST_ENTRY **" the_history_list; +.PP +The state of the History library is encapsulated into a single structure: +.PP +.nf +/* + * A structure used to pass around the current state of the history. + */ +typedef struct _hist_state { + HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */ + int offset; /* The location pointer within this array. */ + int length; /* Number of elements within this array. */ + int size; /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */ + int flags; +} HISTORY_STATE; +.fi +.PP +If the flags member includes \fBHS_STIFLED\fP, the history has been +stifled. +.SH "History Functions" +.PP +This section describes the calling sequence for the various functions +exported by the GNU History library. +.SS Initializing History and State Management +This section describes functions used to initialize and manage +the state of the History library when you want to use the history +functions in your program. + +.Fn1 void using_history void +Begin a session in which the history functions might be used. This +initializes the interactive variables. + +.Fn1 "HISTORY_STATE *" history_get_history_state void +Return a structure describing the current state of the input history. + +.Fn1 void history_set_history_state "HISTORY_STATE *state" +Set the state of the history list according to \fIstate\fP. + +.SS History List Management + +These functions manage individual entries on the history list, or set +parameters managing the list itself. + +.Fn1 void add_history "const char *string" +Place \fIstring\fP at the end of the history list. The associated data +field (if any) is set to \fBNULL\fP. + +.Fn1 void add_history_time "const char *string" +Change the time stamp associated with the most recent history entry to +\fIstring\fP. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" remove_history "int which" +Remove history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP from the history. The +removed element is returned so you can free the line, data, +and containing structure. + +.Fn1 "histdata_t" free_history_entry "HIST_ENTRY *histent" +Free the history entry \fIhistent\fP and any history library private +data associated with it. Returns the application-specific data +so the caller can dispose of it. + +.Fn3 "HIST_ENTRY *" replace_history_entry "int which" "const char *line" "histdata_t data" +Make the history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP have \fIline\fP and \fIdata\fP. +This returns the old entry so the caller can dispose of any +application-specific data. In the case +of an invalid \fIwhich\fP, a \fBNULL\fP pointer is returned. + +.Fn1 void clear_history "void" +Clear the history list by deleting all the entries. + +.Fn1 void stifle_history "int max" +Stifle the history list, remembering only the last \fImax\fP entries. + +.Fn1 int unstifle_history "void" +Stop stifling the history. This returns the previously-set +maximum number of history entries (as set by \fBstifle_history()\fP). +history was stifled. The value is positive if the history was +stifled, negative if it wasn't. + +.Fn1 int history_is_stifled "void" +Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not. + +.SS Information About the History List + +These functions return information about the entire history list or +individual list entries. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY **" history_list "void" +Return a \fBNULL\fP terminated array of \fIHIST_ENTRY *\fP which is the +current input history. Element 0 of this list is the beginning of time. +If there is no history, return \fBNULL\fP. + +.Fn1 int where_history "void" +Returns the offset of the current history element. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" current_history "void" +Return the history entry at the current position, as determined by +\fBwhere_history()\fP. If there is no entry there, return a \fBNULL\fP +pointer. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" history_get "int offset" +Return the history entry at position \fIoffset\fP, starting from +\fBhistory_base\fP. +If there is no entry there, or if \fIoffset\fP +is greater than the history length, return a \fBNULL\fP pointer. + +.Fn1 "time_t" history_get_time "HIST_ENTRY *" +Return the time stamp associated with the history entry passed as the argument. + +.Fn1 int history_total_bytes "void" +Return the number of bytes that the primary history entries are using. +This function returns the sum of the lengths of all the lines in the +history. + +.SS Moving Around the History List + +These functions allow the current index into the history list to be +set or changed. + +.Fn1 int history_set_pos "int pos" +Set the current history offset to \fIpos\fP, an absolute index +into the list. +Returns 1 on success, 0 if \fIpos\fP is less than zero or greater +than the number of history entries. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" previous_history "void" +Back up the current history offset to the previous history entry, and +return a pointer to that entry. If there is no previous entry, return +a \fBNULL\fP pointer. + +.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" next_history "void" +Move the current history offset forward to the next history entry, and +return the a pointer to that entry. If there is no next entry, return +a \fBNULL\fP pointer. + +.SS Searching the History List + +These functions allow searching of the history list for entries containing +a specific string. Searching may be performed both forward and backward +from the current history position. The search may be \fIanchored\fP, +meaning that the string must match at the beginning of the history entry. + +.Fn2 int history_search "const char *string" "int direction" +Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history offset. +If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is through +previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries. +If \fIstring\fP is found, then +the current history index is set to that history entry, and the value +returned is the offset in the line of the entry where +\fIstring\fP was found. Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is +returned. + +.Fn2 int history_search_prefix "const char *string" "int direction" +Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history +offset. The search is anchored: matching lines must begin with +\fIstring\fP. If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is +through previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries. +If \fIstring\fP is found, then the +current history index is set to that entry, and the return value is 0. +Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is returned. + +.Fn3 int history_search_pos "const char *string" "int direction" "int pos" +Search for \fIstring\fP in the history list, starting at \fIpos\fP, an +absolute index into the list. If \fIdirection\fP is negative, the search +proceeds backward from \fIpos\fP, otherwise forward. Returns the absolute +index of the history element where \fIstring\fP was found, or -1 otherwise. + +.SS Managing the History File +The History library can read the history from and write it to a file. +This section documents the functions for managing a history file. + +.Fn1 int read_history "const char *filename" +Add the contents of \fIfilename\fP to the history list, a line at a time. +If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP. +Returns 0 if successful, or \fBerrno\fP if not. + +.Fn3 int read_history_range "const char *filename" "int from" "int to" +Read a range of lines from \fIfilename\fP, adding them to the history list. +Start reading at line \fIfrom\fP and end at \fIto\fP. +If \fIfrom\fP is zero, start at the beginning. If \fIto\fP is less than +\fIfrom\fP, then read until the end of the file. If \fIfilename\fP is +\fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP. Returns 0 if successful, +or \fBerrno\fP if not. + +.Fn1 int write_history "const char *filename" +Write the current history to \fIfilename\fP, overwriting \fIfilename\fP +if necessary. +If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then write the history list to \fI~/.history\fP. +Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error. + + +.Fn2 int append_history "int nelements" "const char *filename" +Append the last \fInelements\fP of the history list to \fIfilename\fP. +If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then append to \fI~/.history\fP. +Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error. + +.Fn2 int history_truncate_file "const char *filename" "int nlines" +Truncate the history file \fIfilename\fP, leaving only the last +\fInlines\fP lines. +If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then \fI~/.history\fP is truncated. +Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on failure. + +.SS History Expansion + +These functions implement history expansion. + +.Fn2 int history_expand "char *string" "char **output" +Expand \fIstring\fP, placing the result into \fIoutput\fP, a pointer +to a string. Returns: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +0 +If no expansions took place (or, if the only change in +the text was the removal of escape characters preceding the history expansion +character); +.TP +1 +if expansions did take place; +.TP +-1 +if there was an error in expansion; +.TP +2 +if the returned line should be displayed, but not executed, +as with the \fB:p\fP modifier. +.PD +.RE +If an error ocurred in expansion, then \fIoutput\fP contains a descriptive +error message. + +.Fn3 "char *" get_history_event "const char *string" "int *cindex" "int qchar" +Returns the text of the history event beginning at \fIstring\fP + +\fI*cindex\fP. \fI*cindex\fP is modified to point to after the event +specifier. At function entry, \fIcindex\fP points to the index into +\fIstring\fP where the history event specification begins. \fIqchar\fP +is a character that is allowed to end the event specification in addition +to the ``normal'' terminating characters. + +.Fn1 "char **" history_tokenize "const char *string" +Return an array of tokens parsed out of \fIstring\fP, much as the +shell might. +The tokens are split on the characters in the +\fBhistory_word_delimiters\fP variable, +and shell quoting conventions are obeyed. + +.Fn3 "char *" history_arg_extract "int first" "int last" "const char *string" +Extract a string segment consisting of the \fIfirst\fP through \fIlast\fP +arguments present in \fIstring\fP. Arguments are split using +\fBhistory_tokenize()\fP. + +.SS History Variables + +This section describes the externally-visible variables exported by +the GNU History Library. + +.Vb int history_base +The logical offset of the first entry in the history list. + +.Vb int history_length +The number of entries currently stored in the history list. + +.Vb int history_max_entries +The maximum number of history entries. This must be changed using +\fBstifle_history()\fP. + +.Vb int history_write_timestamps +If non-zero, timestamps are written to the history file, so they can be +preserved between sessions. The default value is 0, meaning that +timestamps are not saved. + +.Vb char history_expansion_char +The character that introduces a history event. The default is \fB!\fP. +Setting this to 0 inhibits history expansion. + +.Vb char history_subst_char +The character that invokes word substitution if found at the start of +a line. The default is \fB^\fP. + +.Vb char history_comment_char +During tokenization, if this character is seen as the first character +of a word, then it and all subsequent characters up to a newline are +ignored, suppressing history expansion for the remainder of the line. +This is disabled by default. + +.Vb "char *" history_word_delimiters +The characters that separate tokens for \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP. +The default value is \fB"\ \et\en()<>;&|"\fP. + +.Vb "char *" history_no_expand_chars +The list of characters which inhibit history expansion if found immediately +following \fBhistory_expansion_char\fP. The default is space, tab, newline, +\fB\er\fP, and \fB=\fP. + +.Vb "char *" history_search_delimiter_chars +The list of additional characters which can delimit a history search +string, in addition to space, tab, \fI:\fP and \fI?\fP in the case of +a substring search. The default is empty. + +.Vb int history_quotes_inhibit_expansion +If non-zero, single-quoted words are not scanned for the history expansion +character. The default value is 0. + +.Vb "rl_linebuf_func_t *" history_inhibit_expansion_function +This should be set to the address of a function that takes two arguments: +a \fBchar *\fP (\fIstring\fP) +and an \fBint\fP index into that string (\fIi\fP). +It should return a non-zero value if the history expansion starting at +\fIstring[i]\fP should not be performed; zero if the expansion should +be done. +It is intended for use by applications like \fBbash\fP that use the history +expansion character for additional purposes. +By default, this variable is set to \fBNULL\fP. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP +.FN ~/.history +Default filename for reading and writing saved history +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PD 0 +.TP +\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey +.TP +\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey +.TP +\fIbash\fP(1) +.TP +\fIreadline\fP(3) +.PD +.SH AUTHORS +Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation +.br +bfox@gnu.org +.PP +Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University +.br +chet@ins.CWRU.Edu +.SH BUG REPORTS +If you find a bug in the +.B history +library, you should report it. But first, you should +make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest +version of the +.B history +library that you have. +.PP +Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, mail a +bug report to \fIbug\-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP. +If you have a fix, you are welcome to mail that +as well! Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed +to \fPbug-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet +newsgroup +.BR gnu.bash.bug . +.PP +Comments and bug reports concerning +this manual page should be directed to +.IR chet@ins.CWRU.Edu . Index: history.texi =================================================================== --- history.texi (nonexistent) +++ history.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- +@c %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@setfilename history.info +@settitle GNU History Library +@c %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) + +@setchapternewpage odd + +@include version.texi + +@copying +This document describes the GNU History library +(version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), +a programming tool that provides a consistent user interface for +recalling lines of previously typed input. + +Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + +@quotation +Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document +under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or +any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no +Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual,'' +and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is +included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License.'' + +(a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify +this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free +Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' +@end quotation +@end copying + +@dircategory Libraries +@direntry +* History: (history). The GNU history library API. +@end direntry + +@titlepage +@title GNU History Library +@subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @code{History Library} Version @value{VERSION}. +@subtitle @value{UPDATED-MONTH} +@author Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University +@author Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation + +@page + +@vskip 0pt plus 1filll +@insertcopying + +@sp 1 +Published by the Free Software Foundation @* +59 Temple Place, Suite 330, @* +Boston, MA 02111-1307 @* +USA @* + +@end titlepage + +@contents + +@ifnottex +@node Top +@top GNU History Library + +This document describes the GNU History library, a programming tool that +provides a consistent user interface for recalling lines of previously +typed input. + +@menu +* Using History Interactively:: GNU History User's Manual. +* Programming with GNU History:: GNU History Programmer's Manual. +* Copying This Manual:: Copying This Manual. +* Concept Index:: Index of concepts described in this manual. +* Function and Variable Index:: Index of externally visible functions + and variables. +@end menu +@end ifnottex + +@syncodeindex fn vr + +@include hsuser.texi +@include hstech.texi + +@node Copying This Manual +@appendix Copying This Manual + +@menu +* GNU Free Documentation License:: License for copying this manual. +@end menu + +@include fdl.texi + +@node Concept Index +@appendix Concept Index +@printindex cp + +@node Function and Variable Index +@appendix Function and Variable Index +@printindex vr + +@bye
    history.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property Index: fdl.texi =================================================================== --- fdl.texi (nonexistent) +++ fdl.texi (revision 842) @@ -0,0 +1,452 @@ + +@node GNU Free Documentation License +@appendixsec GNU Free Documentation License + +@cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License +@center Version 1.2, November 2002 + +@display +Copyright @copyright{} 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +@end display + +@enumerate 0 +@item +PREAMBLE + +The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other +functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to +assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, +with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. +Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way +to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible +for modifications made by others. + +This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative +works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It +complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft +license designed for free software. + +We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free +software, because free software needs free documentation: a free +program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the +software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; +it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or +whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License +principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. + +@item +APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS + +This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that +contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be +distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a +world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that +work under the conditions stated herein. The ``Document'', below, +refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a +licensee, and is addressed as ``you''. You accept the license if you +copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission +under copyright law. + +A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the +Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with +modifications and/or translated into another language. + +A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section +of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the +publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall +subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall +directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in +part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain +any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical +connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, +commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding +them. + +The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles +are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice +that says that the Document is released under this License. If a +section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not +allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero +Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant +Sections then there are none. + +The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed, +as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that +the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may +be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. + +A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, +represented in a format whose specification is available to the +general public, that is suitable for revising the document +straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of +pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available +drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or +for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input +to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file +format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart +or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. +An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount +of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''. + +Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain +@sc{ascii} without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input +format, @acronym{SGML} or @acronym{XML} using a publicly available +@acronym{DTD}, and standard-conforming simple @acronym{HTML}, +PostScript or @acronym{PDF} designed for human modification. Examples +of transparent image formats include @acronym{PNG}, @acronym{XCF} and +@acronym{JPG}. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be +read and edited only by proprietary word processors, @acronym{SGML} or +@acronym{XML} for which the @acronym{DTD} and/or processing tools are +not generally available, and the machine-generated @acronym{HTML}, +PostScript or @acronym{PDF} produced by some word processors for +output purposes only. + +The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself, +plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material +this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in +formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means +the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, +preceding the beginning of the body of the text. + +A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose +title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following +text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a +specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'', +``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.) To ``Preserve the Title'' +of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a +section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition. + +The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which +states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty +Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this +License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other +implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has +no effect on the meaning of this License. + +@item +VERBATIM COPYING + +You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either +commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the +copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies +to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other +conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use +technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further +copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept +compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough +number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. + +You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and +you may publicly display copies. + +@item +COPYING IN QUANTITY + +If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have +printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the +Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the +copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover +Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on +the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify +you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present +the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and +visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. +Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve +the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated +as verbatim copying in other respects. + +If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit +legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit +reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent +pages. + +If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering +more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent +copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy +a computer-network location from which the general network-using +public has access to download using public-standard network protocols +a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. +If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, +when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure +that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated +location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an +Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that +edition to the public. + +It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the +Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give +them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. + +@item +MODIFICATIONS + +You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under +the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release +the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified +Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution +and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy +of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: + +@enumerate A +@item +Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct +from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions +(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section +of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version +if the original publisher of that version gives permission. + +@item +List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities +responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified +Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the +Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), +unless they release you from this requirement. + +@item +State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the +Modified Version, as the publisher. + +@item +Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. + +@item +Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications +adjacent to the other copyright notices. + +@item +Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice +giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the +terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. + +@item +Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections +and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. + +@item +Include an unaltered copy of this License. + +@item +Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add +to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and +publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If +there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one +stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as +given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified +Version as stated in the previous sentence. + +@item +Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for +public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise +the network locations given in the Document for previous versions +it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section. +You may omit a network location for a work that was published at +least four years before the Document itself, or if the original +publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. + +@item +For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve +the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the +substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or +dedications given therein. + +@item +Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, +unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers +or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. + +@item +Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section +may not be included in the Modified Version. + +@item +Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or +to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. + +@item +Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. +@end enumerate + +If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or +appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material +copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all +of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the +list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. +These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. + +You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains +nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various +parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has +been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a +standard. + +You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a +passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list +of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of +Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or +through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already +includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or +by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, +you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit +permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. + +The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License +give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or +imply endorsement of any Modified Version. + +@item +COMBINING DOCUMENTS + +You may combine the Document with other documents released under this +License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified +versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the +Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and +list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its +license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. + +The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and +multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single +copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but +different contents, make the title of each such section unique by +adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original +author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. +Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of +Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. + +In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History'' +in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled +``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', +and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all +sections Entitled ``Endorsements.'' + +@item +COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS + +You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents +released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this +License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in +the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for +verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. + +You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute +it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this +License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all +other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. + +@item +AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS + +A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate +and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or +distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright +resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights +of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. +When the Document is included an aggregate, this License does not +apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves +derivative works of the Document. + +If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these +copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of +the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on +covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the +electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. +Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole +aggregate. + +@item +TRANSLATION + +Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may +distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. +Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special +permission from their copyright holders, but you may include +translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the +original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a +translation of this License, and all the license notices in the +Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include +the original English version of this License and the original versions +of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between +the translation and the original version of this License or a notice +or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. + +If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', +``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve +its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual +title. + +@item +TERMINATION + +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except +as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to +copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will +automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, +parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this +License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + +@item +FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE + +The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions +of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See +@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}. + +Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. +If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this +License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of +following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or +of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the +Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version +number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not +as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. +@end enumerate + +@page +@appendixsubsec ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents + +To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of +the License in the document and put the following copyright and +license notices just after the title page: + +@smallexample +@group + Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{your name}. + Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document + under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 + or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; + with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. + A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU + Free Documentation License''. +@end group +@end smallexample + +If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, +replace the ``with...Texts.'' line with this: + +@smallexample +@group + with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with + the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts + being @var{list}. +@end group +@end smallexample + +If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other +combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the +situation. + +If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we +recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of +free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, +to permit their use in free software. + +@c Local Variables: +@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict" +@c End: +
    fdl.texi Property changes : Added: svn:eol-style ## -0,0 +1 ## +native \ No newline at end of property Added: svn:keywords ## -0,0 +1 ## +Id \ No newline at end of property

    powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

    © copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.
    ' . + &t2h_anchor('', $href, $entry) . + '  ' . + $descr . + "
    ' . + $entry . + '' . $descr . + "